Contents

Canon imagePRESS C7011VPS Series Operation Guide PDF

1 of 423
1 of 423

Summary of Content for Canon imagePRESS C7011VPS Series Operation Guide PDF

imagePRESS C7011VPS ser ies C7010VPS ser ies

Operation guide

Copyright 2011 - 2015 by Canon Inc. All Rights Reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any information storage or retrieval system without the prior written permission of Canon Inc.

2011 - 2015 Oc. All rights reserved.

No part of this work may be reproduced, copied, adapted, or transmitted in any form or by any means without written permission from Oc.

Oc makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose.

Furthermore, Oc reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the content hereof without obligation to notify any person of such revision or changes.

Edition 2015-05 / V4.1 US

Contents

Chapter 1 Preface................................................................................................................................. 9

Trademarks..................................................................................................................................................... 10 Copyright.........................................................................................................................................................11 Notes for the reader....................................................................................................................................... 12 Abbreviations used in this manual............................................................................................................... 13 Available documentation...............................................................................................................................14

Chapter 2 Main parts..........................................................................................................................15

Overview of the machine configuration....................................................................................................... 16 The main unit..................................................................................................................................................19 The paper modules........................................................................................................................................ 22 The tab feeder (optional)............................................................................................................................... 24 The special feeder (optional)......................................................................................................................... 25 The automatic document feeder - ADF (optional)....................................................................................... 26 The color scanner (optional)..........................................................................................................................27 The operator panel......................................................................................................................................... 28 The operator attention light...........................................................................................................................31 Finishing options............................................................................................................................................ 32 The stacker/stapler, optional inserter and optional integrated punch unit............................................... 33 The puncher.................................................................................................................................................... 40

Chapter 3 Power information............................................................................................................41

The power buttons and power modes......................................................................................................... 42 Turn on the system........................................................................................................................................ 44 Turn off the system........................................................................................................................................ 45 Restart the system..........................................................................................................................................46

Chapter 4 Operating concept............................................................................................................ 47

Operating concept.......................................................................................................................................... 48 Access the Settings Editor............................................................................................................................. 51 Maintain the Media catalog........................................................................................................................... 53 Maintain the Media families.......................................................................................................................... 55 Maintain colors settings with the Settings Editor........................................................................................57

Maintain the Color presets...................................................................................................................... 57 Maintain the Input profiles...................................................................................................................... 59 Maintain the Output profiles................................................................................................................... 60 Exchange the Spot color libraries (optional)......................................................................................... 61 Maintain the Spot colors......................................................................................................................... 62 Maintain the Color mappings (optional)................................................................................................ 63 Maintain the Color & information bars (optional).................................................................................65

Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare...................................................................................................... 66 Prepare print jobs with the printer driver.....................................................................................................68 Manage production printing..........................................................................................................................70 Monitor operator intervention remotely (optional)..................................................................................... 71

Contents

3

Chapter 5 Operator panel views....................................................................................................... 73

The dashboard................................................................................................................................................74 The Schedule view......................................................................................................................................... 76 The Jobs view.................................................................................................................................................77 The Trays view................................................................................................................................................79 The System view............................................................................................................................................ 80

Chapter 6 Adapt printer settings to your needs..............................................................................81

Introduction to the Setup section..................................................................................................................82 Work with the workflow profiles................................................................................................................... 84 Change the warning time.............................................................................................................................. 88 Disable the warning time...............................................................................................................................89 Truncate the job name................................................................................................................................... 90 Adjust the brightness and contrast of the operator panel.......................................................................... 91 Access Settings Editor settings via the operator panel...............................................................................92

Chapter 7 Media handling................................................................................................................. 95

Introduction to the Schedule view................................................................................................................ 96 Load the media using the Schedule view.................................................................................................... 99 Description of the Trays view......................................................................................................................100 Load the media using the Trays view.........................................................................................................102 Introduction to the media handling............................................................................................................ 103 Add media to the media catalog................................................................................................................. 104 Add temporary media to the media catalog.............................................................................................. 106 Handle media................................................................................................................................................107

Load the media into the paper tray...................................................................................................... 107 Adjust the paper tray to hold a different media size...........................................................................113 Load the media into the bulk media module (optional)..................................................................... 117 Adjust the media size for the bulk media module (optional)............................................................. 122 Adjust the outer size change plate of the bulk paper module (optional).......................................... 129 Load the media into the special feeder (optional)...............................................................................135 Load tabs via the tab feeder (optional)................................................................................................ 138 Adjust the media size of the tab feeder (optional).............................................................................. 144 Load the required media into the selected tray...................................................................................146 Check the status of the punch waste box............................................................................................ 151 Removing the punch waste...................................................................................................................152 Handle paper jams................................................................................................................................. 154

Correct curled output media........................................................................................................................155 Perform a media registration...................................................................................................................... 156 Correct skewed and rotated images........................................................................................................... 158

Chapter 8 Carry out print jobs.........................................................................................................159

General information..................................................................................................................................... 160 Introduction to the print function......................................................................................................... 160 Description of the print job settings..................................................................................................... 161 Contradiction handling.......................................................................................................................... 171 Work with variable data in document printing mode......................................................................... 172

Manage print jobs........................................................................................................................................ 173 Print an urgent job immediately........................................................................................................... 173 Give priority to a print job..................................................................................................................... 174 Print a scheduled job later.....................................................................................................................175 Reprint a job........................................................................................................................................... 176

Contents

4

Print a job ticket......................................................................................................................................177 Make a proof...........................................................................................................................................178 Stop the printer...................................................................................................................................... 179 Delete print jobs..................................................................................................................................... 181 Schedule a waiting job for printing...................................................................................................... 182 Select more than one job for printing.................................................................................................. 183 Bundle jobs in the list of Waiting jobs................................................................................................. 184 Print a file from a USB drive................................................................................................................. 186 Convert a job to a variable data job..................................................................................................... 187 Print variable data jobs..........................................................................................................................188 Send a job to another printer................................................................................................................189 PRISMAsync Remote Manager (Option)..............................................................................................190

Change the job settings before printing.....................................................................................................191 Change the number of sets................................................................................................................... 191 Check the first set...................................................................................................................................192 Change the use of separator sheets..................................................................................................... 193 Stack the prints with an offset.............................................................................................................. 194 Combine jobs......................................................................................................................................... 195

Change the output settings before printing............................................................................................... 197 Change 2-sided into 1-sided and vice versa........................................................................................ 197 Change the binding edge...................................................................................................................... 198 Select a different media for a job......................................................................................................... 199 Change the settings for covers............................................................................................................. 200 Shift the image roughly to create binding space................................................................................ 201 Shift the image precisely to create binding space or correct the layout...........................................202 Change the print delivery settings........................................................................................................203 Change the finishing method................................................................................................................204

Automated workflows (access through the Settings Editor).................................................................... 205 Introduction to automated workflows..................................................................................................205 Add an automated workflow.................................................................................................................206 Edit an automated workflow................................................................................................................. 207 Delete an automated workflow.............................................................................................................208 Restore the factory default workflow................................................................................................... 209

Hotfolders......................................................................................................................................................210 Introduction to hotfolders..................................................................................................................... 210 Activate the hotfolder function............................................................................................................. 211 Create a hotfolder.................................................................................................................................. 212 Create a shared network folder on a workstation............................................................................... 213 Create a hotfolder default ticket ('default_ticket.jdf').......................................................................... 214

Transaction printing (optional)....................................................................................................................215 Introduction to the Transaction section .............................................................................................. 215 Activate transaction printing.................................................................................................................218 Deactivate transaction printing.............................................................................................................219 Shift the image in the transaction printing mode............................................................................... 220 Transaction setups.................................................................................................................................221

Create a new transaction setup......................................................................................................221 Edit a transaction setup...................................................................................................................222 Activate a transaction setup........................................................................................................... 223 Exchange all setups between printers...........................................................................................224

IPDS.........................................................................................................................................................225 Media information...........................................................................................................................225 Output recovery in case of an error............................................................................................... 226

PCL.......................................................................................................................................................... 229 Media Messages (PCL)....................................................................................................................229 Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Media Mode (PCL).................................................. 230 Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Tray Mode (PCL)..................................................... 231

Chapter 9 Carry out copy jobs.........................................................................................................233

Contents

5

General information..................................................................................................................................... 234 Introduction to the copy function......................................................................................................... 234 Description of the copy job settings.....................................................................................................236 Feed originals to the ADF (optional).....................................................................................................248 Feed originals to the SADF (optional).................................................................................................. 250 Put originals on the glass plate.............................................................................................................252 Clean the glass plate..............................................................................................................................253

Copy your documents..................................................................................................................................254 Make a copy............................................................................................................................................254 Create templates to use for recurring jobs.......................................................................................... 255 Combining subsets into one document............................................................................................... 256 Access other functions during a copy job or scan job........................................................................257 The zoom behavior................................................................................................................................ 258 Rename a copy job................................................................................................................................ 260 Copy non-standard size originals......................................................................................................... 261 Scan now and print later (postponed copying)................................................................................... 262 Finish the output.................................................................................................................................... 263 Adjust the image to improve the copy and scan quality.................................................................... 264

Chapter 10 Carry out scan jobs......................................................................................................... 265

Configure the scan function........................................................................................................................ 266 Introduction to the scan function..........................................................................................................266 Configure the settings for scan to file.................................................................................................. 268 Configure the settings for scan to email.............................................................................................. 269 Configure the settings for the LDAP server......................................................................................... 270 Use the address list file (ral.csv)........................................................................................................... 271 Use the scan profiles file (sjt.csv)......................................................................................................... 272

Scan your documents.................................................................................................................................. 278 Description of the scan job settings..................................................................................................... 278 Scan to file..............................................................................................................................................285 Scan to email..........................................................................................................................................286 Scan to USB............................................................................................................................................287 Scan to DocBox...................................................................................................................................... 288 Scan to SMB........................................................................................................................................... 289 Create templates to use for recurring jobs.......................................................................................... 290 Combine subsets into one file ............................................................................................................. 291 Optimize the scan quality...................................................................................................................... 292

Chapter 11 Use the DocBox (optional)............................................................................................. 295

The DocBox function....................................................................................................................................296 Introduction to the DocBox function.................................................................................................... 296 Create a new DocBox.............................................................................................................................298

Handle the jobs in a DocBox....................................................................................................................... 299 Description of the DocBox job settings................................................................................................299 Edit a job in a DocBox............................................................................................................................308 Combine jobs in a DocBox (build function)......................................................................................... 309 Split a combined job in the DocBox..................................................................................................... 310 Lock a job in a DocBox.......................................................................................................................... 311 Unlock a job in a DocBox...................................................................................................................... 312 Move a job from one DocBox to another.............................................................................................313

Print the jobs in a DocBox........................................................................................................................... 314 Print a non-urgent job from the DocBox..............................................................................................314 Print an urgent job from the DocBox immediately............................................................................. 315 Select and print multiple jobs from the DocBox................................................................................. 316

Contents

6

Chapter 12 Accounting...................................................................................................................... 319

The accounting related settings in the Settings Editor............................................................................. 320 Account ID file...............................................................................................................................................321 The account log file...................................................................................................................................... 322 Save an account log file...............................................................................................................................328 Enter an account ID into the printer driver.................................................................................................329

Chapter 13 Add toner and staples.................................................................................................... 331

Toner............................................................................................................................................................. 332 Check the status of the toner reservoir and waste toner container...................................................332 Replacing the toner cartridge................................................................................................................334 Replacing the waste toner container....................................................................................................338

Staples...........................................................................................................................................................340 Check the status of the staple cartridges............................................................................................. 340 Replacing the staple cartridge in the stapler unit................................................................................342 Replacing the staple cartridge in the saddle stitcher unit.................................................................. 345

Chapter 14 Maintenance and print quality...................................................................................... 349

Maintenance and counters.......................................................................................................................... 350 Introduction to the Maintenance section............................................................................................. 350 Auto color mismatch correction........................................................................................................... 351 Clean the roller (main unit)................................................................................................................... 352 Clean the wire.........................................................................................................................................353 Clean the automatic document feeder rollers..................................................................................... 354 Refresh the fixing roller......................................................................................................................... 355 Engine maintenance (trained operators)............................................................................................. 356 Remote Service...................................................................................................................................... 357 Reset the day counters.......................................................................................................................... 358 Find the meter readings (counters)...................................................................................................... 359 Print the billing counters report............................................................................................................360

Keep the color quality high..........................................................................................................................361 About calibration....................................................................................................................................361 Calibrate the printer............................................................................................................................... 363 Calibrate the media family.................................................................................................................... 365

Adjust the color quality................................................................................................................................367 Create a trapping preset........................................................................................................................ 367 Perform a manual shading correction..................................................................................................369 Adjust CMYK curves for a job............................................................................................................... 371 Adjust CMYK curves for a media family.............................................................................................. 373 Density not within required range message........................................................................................375

Create output profiles.................................................................................................................................. 376 Create G7 calibration curves with an external tool............................................................................. 376 Create G7 output profiles with the embedded profiler.......................................................................377 Create output profiles with the embedded profiler.............................................................................378

Problem Solving........................................................................................................................................... 380 Install system software................................................................................................................................ 381

Chapter 15 Specifications.................................................................................................................. 383

Specifications................................................................................................................................................384 Settings Editor specifications...................................................................................................................... 396 Settings Editor settings and information....................................................................................................397

Contents

7

Chapter 16 Third-Party Software...................................................................................................... 407

Third Party Software.................................................................................................................................... 408 The Software Subjected to the Other Conditions......................................................................................409 FPU Emulation code.....................................................................................................................................410 J2ME..............................................................................................................................................................411 Library for SDE Compiler.............................................................................................................................412

Index.................................................................................................................................415

Contents

8

Chapter 1 Preface

Trademarks

List of trademarks

Oc, Oc PRISMA, Oc PRISMAsync, Oc PRISMAprepare and Oc PRISMAaccess are registered trademarks of Oc.

Adobe, Acrobat, Reader and Distiller are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

PostScript 3 is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Apple, Mac, Mac OS, Macintosh, and Safari are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

Products in this publication are referred to by their general trade names. In most, if not all cases, these designations are claimed as trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

PANTONE Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. Pantone, Inc., 2007

Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to (insert name of your company) to distribute for use only in combination with (insert appropriate name of Licensed Materials). PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of (insert appropriate name of Licensed Materials).

This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc. UFST is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions.

Copyright 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.

Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

Trademarks

10 Chapter 1 - Preface

Copyright This product includes software and/or software modules that are licensed by Canon Inc. or its licensors from third parties. Use and distribution of this software and/or software modules are subject to conditions (a) through (d) below.

(a)

Copyright 1999, 2000, 2002 Aladdin Enterprises. All rights reserved.

(b)

Copyright Unpublished Work of Novell, Inc.

All Rights Reserved

(c)

Copyright 1992,1993

The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Ralph Campbell.

(d) 1/4 University of California, Berkeley

Copyright 1990 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

2/4 David M. Gay at AT&T The author of this software is David M. Gay. Copyright 1991 by AT&T.

3/4 Sun Microsystems Copyright 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.

4/4 Cygnus Solutions Copyright 1994, 1997 Cygnus Solutions. All rights reserved.

Copyright

Chapter 1 - Preface 11

Notes for the reader

Introduction

This manual helps you to use the imagePRESS C7011VPS / C7010VPS Series. The manual contains a description of the product and guidelines to use and operate the imagePRESS C7011VPS / C7010VPS Series.

Definition

Attention-Getters

Parts of this manual require your special attention. These parts can provide the following: Additional general information, for example, information that is useful when you perform a

task. Information to prevent personal injuries or property damage.

Symbols used in this manual

The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions, handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.

Overview of the attention-getters

Word Icon Indicates

WARNING Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay at- tention to these warnings.

CAUTION Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.

IMPORTANT Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the machine correctly and to avoid damaging the ma- chine or property.

NOTE Indicates a clarification of an operation or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly recommended.

- Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully and make sure not to perform the described operations.

Notes for the reader

12 Chapter 1 - Preface

Abbreviations used in this manual

Microsoft Windows 2000: Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional: Microsoft Windows 2000 Server: Microsoft Windows Server 2003: Microsoft Windows XP: Microsoft Windows XP Professional: Microsoft Windows Vista operating system: Microsoft Windows 7 operating system: Microsoft Windows Server 2008: Microsoft Windows operating system: Novell NetWare: Apple Macintosh: Apple Mac:

Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Professional Windows 2000 Server Windows Server 2003 Windows XP Windows XP Professional Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 Windows NetWare Macintosh Mac

Abbreviations used in this manual

Chapter 1 - Preface 13

Available documentation For the imagePRESS C7011VPS / C7010VPS Series the following information is available. Operating information Operating information for finishers Operator's Maintenance Manual (English only) Safety Instructions for the printer Safety Information for the controller Material Safety Data Sheets.

Available documentation

14 Chapter 1 - Preface

Chapter 2 Main parts

Overview of the machine configuration

Introduction

The following figures display two example configurations.

1 2

3

4 7

5

68 9 1013 13141516

[1] Mass production configuration

11

12

17

[2] Space saving configuration

The next section describes all available modules and options. The availability of modules and options differs per country.

Main unit

Component Function

1 Operator panel The operator panel helps you with your daily work, for example the scheduling of the jobs. Furthermore, the operator panel helps you to solve errors.

2 Operator attention light The operator attention light enables you to check the status of the system from a distance.

3 Color scanner and original cover (Color Image Reader-H1 and Platen Cover Type K) Optional

The color scanner is used to copy and scan black & white and colored originals. The original cover holds down the origi- nal to the glass plate of the color scanner.

4 Automatic document feeder (DADF-R1) Optional

The automatic document feeder is used to copy and scan sets of 1-sided and 2-sided documents. 4

Overview of the machine configuration

16 Chapter 2 - Main parts

Component Function

5 Main unit The main unit contains the components that print the media. Access to the main unit is only required when a paper jam occurs or when maintenance is required. The main unit consists of the following main parts. Imaging unit (right-side)

(Marking Engine) Fusing unit (left-side)

(Fixing Station) Power supply unit

6 Integrated paper trays The engine module contains paper trays that contain the media that will be prin- ted.

7 Toner compartment cover Gives access to the toner bottles.

8 Waste toner tray Gives access to the waste toner container.

NOTE The spectrophotometer for calibration is not illustrated.

Optional paper modules

Input options

Component Function

9 Left-hand paper module (POD Deck-A1)

The additional paper module has paper trays that contain the media that will be printed.

10 Right-hand paper module (Secondary POD Deck-A1)

You can add a secondary paper module to increase the media input capacity.

11 Bulk paper module (Paper Deck-AC1)

The bulk paper module contains the me- dia that will be printed. The bulk paper module contains 1 media type.

12 Special feeder (Stack Bypass-A1)

The special feeder is used to feed media manually.

- Tab feeder (Tab Feeding Attachment-C1)

The tab feeder is used to load tab paper into the paper trays.

Optional finishing equipment

Output options

Component Function

13 Stacker (High Capacity Stacker-C1, High Ca- pacity Stacker-F1, High Capacity Stacker-G1 or High Capacity Stacker- H1) Optional, maximum 2.

The stacker adds output capacity to your system. The stacker cannot staple the jobs.

4

Overview of the machine configuration

Chapter 2 - Main parts 17

Component Function

14 Stacker/stapler, optional inserter and optional integrated punch unit (Finisher-AJ1 or Saddle Finisher-AJ2 with Document Insertion Unit-C1 and Puncher Unit-BB1)

The stacker/stapler offers the following functionality. Stack prints Staple prints Create stapled booklets Punch prints

With the optional inserter you can add preprinted covers to the booklet and sets.

15 Trimmer (Booklet Trimmer-D1)

The trimmer trims the long edge of a booklet.

16 Two-knife trimmer (Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer-A1)

The two-knife trimmer trims the short edges of a booklet.

17 Puncher (Professional Puncher-B1 and Professional Puncher Integration Unit-C1)

The Professional Puncher-B1 punches several types of holes. The Professional Puncher Integration Unit-C1 reverses the paper punched by the Professional Puncher-B1. The following items are not applicable to the JP model. Professional Puncher-B1 Professional Puncher Integration Unit-

C1

NOTE Please refer to the operating information that comes with the optional finish equipment.

Overview of the machine configuration

18 Chapter 2 - Main parts

The main unit

Introduction

This section describes and shows the main parts of the main unit.

External view

4

7

8

3

6 5

2

1

[3] External view

Component Function

1 Operator panel The operator panel helps you with your daily work, for example the scheduling of the jobs. Furthermore, the operator panel helps you to solve errors.

2 Main power switch of the main unit Press to the "I" side to turn the power ON.

3 Imaging unit (Marking Engine)

Gives access to the imaging unit to clear paper jams.

4 Open buttons Press to open the paper tray when you need to load paper or check for a paper jam.

5 Integrated paper trays Contain the media that will be printed.

6 Fusing unit (Fixing Station)

Gives access to the fusing unit to clear pa- per jams.

7 Power cord Supplies the power from AC outlet to the main unit and ADF.

8 Power supply unit Provides the power to the imaging unit and fusing unit.

The main unit

Chapter 2 - Main parts 19

Internal view: the imaging unit (Marking Engine)

8

6

7

1

2

3

45

[4] The location of the main parts of the unit (Marking Engine)

The function of the main parts of the imaging unit (Marking Engine)

Component Function

1 Toner unit Gives access to the toner bottles.

2 Intermediate transfer belt Transfers the toner to the paper.

3 Feeding unit Receives paper and can be opened to re- move jammed paper.

4 Skew correction roller Compensates paper skewing or disper- sion of side edge.

5 Test button (Rear)

Located on the back side of the Power supply unit. Press this button to periodi- cally test the circuit breaker.

6 Breaker (Rear)

Located on the back side of the Power supply unit. Detects excess current or leakage current.

7 LAN Port (Rear)

Located on the side of the Power supply unit. This port supports 100/ 10BASE-T. The LAN port is the communication port to the PRISMAsync controller. The USB ports are not used.

8 Data ports (Rear)

Use these ports to connect the printer to the PRISMAsync controller.

The main unit

20 Chapter 2 - Main parts

Internal view: the fusing unit (Fixing Station)

3

1

4

2

5

[5] The location of the main parts of the fusing unit (Fixing Station

The function of the main parts of the fusing unit (Fixing Station)

Component Function

1 Primary fixing assembly Fixes toner that has transferred to paper. Pull out the primary Fixing Station to clear a paper jam inside the assembly

2 Secondary fixing assembly Fixes toner securely for some paper types. Pull out the secondary Fixing Sta- tion to clear a paper jam inside the as- sembly.

3 Waste toner container tray Pull out this tray to replace waste toner container.

4 Reverse unit Reverses paper and returns it to the Mark- ing Engine for two-sided printing. Pull out the delivery/reverse unit to clear a paper jam inside the unit.

5 Decurler unit Corrects the paper curl caused by heat. Pull out this unit to clear a paper jam in- side the unit.

The main unit

Chapter 2 - Main parts 21

The paper modules

Introduction

This section describes the parts of the available paper modules.

Integrated paper trays

The printer contains 2 integrated paper trays.

External paper modules

Optionally, you can extend the printer with up to 2 external paper modules.

1 2 3

4

5

67

8

7

1 2 3

4

5

6

7

Parts of the paper module

Component Function

1 Front cover (buffer pass) Open this cover to remove jammed paper

2 Escape tray Receives detected double sheets to avoid paper jams

3 Main power switch (POD Deck-A1 and Secondary POD Deck-A1)

Press to the "I" side to turn ON the paper module

4 Open button Press to open the paper tray when you need to load paper or check for a paper jam

5 Horizontal pass cover Gives access to jammed paper

6 Front right cover Gives access to jammed paper

7 Paper trays Contains the media that will be printed

8 Tandem pass cover Gives access to jammed paper

Bulk paper module

Optionally, you can extend the printer with a bulk paper module with a capacity of 3,500 sheets.

The paper modules

22 Chapter 2 - Main parts

1

2

3

4

Parts of the bulk paper module

Component Function

1 Release button Detaches the bulk paper module from the main unit when pressed.

2 Open button Opens the paper tray to load media or check for a paper jam.

3 Paper tray Contains the media that will be printed

4 Paper supply indicator Enables you to check the amount of paper remaining in the paper tray.

Total capacity

Total capacity including the external paper modules

Paper modules Total number of sheets

Internal paper trays only 2,000 sheets

With 1 external paper module 6,000 sheets

With 2 external paper modules 10,000 sheets

Total capacity including the bulk paper module

Paper modules Total number of sheets

Internal paper trays only 2,000 sheets

With 1 external bulk paper module 5,500 sheets

The paper modules

Chapter 2 - Main parts 23

The tab feeder (optional)

Introduction

The tab feeder is needed to feed tabs via a paper tray.

Tab feeder

34

1

2

Parts of the tab feeder

Component Function

1 Paper holder The paper holder constrains the tab paper downwards.

2 Handle Grip this handle to install the tab feeding attachment in the paper trays.

3 Location fix frame Embed the location fix frame in the hole of the lifter to fix the tab feeding attach- ment to the paper deck.

4 Paper size change screw Use this screw to change the tab paper size to A4 or LTR.

Related information

Load tabs via the tab feeder (optional) on page 138

The tab feeder (optional)

24 Chapter 2 - Main parts

The special feeder (optional)

Introduction

You can use the special feeder to feed media to print on manually.

The special feeder (optional)

1

2

Parts of the special feeder

Component Function

1 Slide guides Enables you to match the size of the pa- per.

2 Auxiliary tray Enables you to guide paper with large sizes.

NOTE Feed coated paper one sheet at a time. Loading several sheets together may cause paper

jams. Not available in combination with external paper module.

The special feeder (optional)

Chapter 2 - Main parts 25

The automatic document feeder - ADF (optional)

Introduction

This section describes the part of the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF).

The automatic document feeder (ADF)

1 2 3

6 5 4

(7)

Component Function

1 Feeder cover Open this cover to clear a paper jam.

2 Original set indicator Lights when originals are placed in the original supply tray.

3 Original supply tray Place originals face up here for automatic document feeding.

4 Original output tray Receives scanned originals in the order that they are fed.

5 SADF tray Single Automatic Document Feeder Tray. To feed heavy or lightweight originals one by one, face down.

6 Slide guides Adjust the slide guides to match the width of the original.

7 ADF Access Handle-A1 Helps to close the ADF.

The automatic document feeder - ADF (optional)

26 Chapter 2 - Main parts

The color scanner (optional)

Introduction

You can use the color scanner to scan bound originals (such as books and magazines), heavy or lightweight originals, and transparencies. If the color scanner is attached, the optional ADF or Platen Cover Type K is required.

IMPORTANT When you use the glass plate to copy or scan thick originals, such as books or magazines, do not press down hard on the feeder or glass plate cover.

Color scanner (optional)

1

Component Function

1 Glass plate Scan bound originals (such as books and magazines), heavy or lightweight origi- nals, and transparencies.

The color scanner (optional)

Chapter 2 - Main parts 27

The operator panel

Introduction

The operator panel helps you to carry out print jobs, copy jobs and scan jobs. This section describes the main components of the operator panel.

IMPORTANT You can clean the screen of the operator panel with a 50% mix of water and isopropyl alcohol (K2). Use a lint-free cloth. Always put the cleaner onto the cloth and not directly on the screen.

Illustration

1

10

2

3

4

5 7 8

9

6

[6] The operator panel

The components of the operator panel

The components of the operator panel

Component Function

1 Sleep mode key Depending on whether the printer is currently ac- tive or in the sleep mode: Put the machine into the sleep mode, or Wake up the machine from the sleep mode. Shut down the printer and controller.

2 Stop key Stop the printer. After a set, or As soon as possible

3 Paper tray key Get immediate and always access to the [ Trays ] section on the operator panel to do the following, for example: Check the content of all paper trays. Load a new media type into a paper tray. Change the media type which is available in one

of the paper trays. 4

The operator panel

28 Chapter 2 - Main parts

Component Function

4 USB port Use the USB port to: Connect the spectrophotometer and calibrate the

printer and controller. Print a file from an USB drive Scan to a USB drive

5 [Schedule] button Access the [Schedule] view to manage the jobs in the schedule.

6 [Jobs] button Access all functions to print, copy and scan your documents. Manage or change the settings for jobs in the

[Waiting jobs], [Scheduled jobs] and [Printed jobs] lists, or in a [DocBox] (optional).

Carry out copy jobs and scan jobs.

7 [ Trays ] button Access the [ Trays ] view on the operator panel to do the following, for example: Check the content of all paper trays. Load a new media type into a paper tray, or Change the media type which is available in one

of the paper trays.

8 [System] button Access [System] view to do the following, for exam- ple: Check the status of the toner, staples and other

supplies. Read the counters. Start maintenance. Set up the preferred workflows. Change a number of default system settings. Adjust the brightness and contrast of the LCD

panel. View the content of the Media catalog or add

temporary media to the Media catalog. Start maintenance, calibration and media regis-

tration Shut down the printer.

9 Dashboard The dashboard displays information about the sys- tem status such as: Information about the current printing process. Information about operator intervention that is

required soon. Information about errors. Information about the status of the toner reser-

voir and staple cartridges. Continue the job when the status is [On hold]. 4

The operator panel

Chapter 2 - Main parts 29

Component Function

10 Status LED Displays the status of the system. Red

The machine has stopped, for example because a required media type is not available or an error has occurred. Operator attention is required now.

Orange The machine will stop soon, for example because more paper is required. Operator attention is re- quired soon. The orange light illuminates when the machine reaches the warning time. The warning time is a time you can set to determine when the orange light must illuminate. You can set the warning time in the [System] view of the operator panel. By factory default, the warning time is set to 10 minutes. So 10 minutes before operator attention is required, the orange light will illuminate.

Green The machine is busy printing. The machine can print longer than the set warning time. Operator attention is not required.

No color. The machine is idle. There are no jobs scheduled for printing.

The operator panel

30 Chapter 2 - Main parts

The operator attention light

Introduction

The operator attention light on top of the printer helps you to monitor the status of the printer from a distance. The colors of the lights match the printer status that the dashboard displays.

Illustration

[7] The operator attention light

Status colors

The status colors of the operator attention light

Color Description

Red The machine has stopped, for example because a required media type is not available or an error has occurred. Operator attention is required now.

Orange The machine will stop soon, for example because more paper is required. Operator attention is required soon. The orange light illuminates when the machine reaches the warn- ing time. The warning time is a time you can set to determine when the orange light must illuminate. You can set the warning time in the [System] section of the operator panel. By factory default, the warning time is set to 10 minutes. So 10 mi- nutes before operator attention is required, the orange light will il- luminate.

Green The machine is busy printing. The machine can print longer than the set warning time. Operator attention is not required.

All lights off The machine is idle. There are no jobs scheduled for printing.

The operator attention light

Chapter 2 - Main parts 31

Finishing options The following optional finishing options are described in separate manuals. High Capacity Stacker-H1 High Capacity Stacker-G1 High Capacity Stacker-F1 High Capacity Stacker-C1 Booklet Trimmer-D1 Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer-A1 Perfect Binder-B1

The Finisher-AJ1/Saddle Finisher-AJ2/Puncher Unit-BB1/Document Insertion Unit-C1 is described in this manual.

Finishing options

32 Chapter 2 - Main parts

The stacker/stapler, optional inserter and optional integrated punch unit

Introduction

With the Finisher-AJ1 and Saddle Finisher-AJ2 you can stack and staple prints. With the Saddle Finisher-AJ2 you can also saddle stitch booklets. With the optional Puncher Unit-BB1 you can punch holes in your prints.

IMPORTANT You cannot attach the optional Finisher-AJ1 and Saddle Finisher-AJ2 to the machine at the same time.

External view

(I side)

( side)

1

2

32

3

4

5

6 6

77

8

[8] The Saddle Finisher-AJ2 with inserter (left-hand side) and Finisher-AJ1 (right-hand side)

Main parts

Component Function

1 Main power switch Press to the "I" side to turn on the stacker/ stapler.

2 Top cover Open the top cover to clear a paper jam inside the unit.

3 Front cover Open the front cover to replace the staple cartridge, remove jammed paper, or clear a staple jam in the stapler unit and saddle stitcher unit.

4 Booklet tray Saddle Finisher-AJ2 only

Receives saddle stitched booklets.

5 Auxiliary booklet tray Saddle Finisher-AJ2 only

Pull out the auxiliary booklet tray to re- ceive large size booklets.

6 Lower tray Receives finished documents. 4

The stacker/stapler, optional inserter and optional integrated punch unit

Chapter 2 - Main parts 33

Component Function

7 Upper tray Receives finished documents

8 Inserter The inserter is used to feed cover sheets for printed documents and booklets. The inserter is also an option for the Finisher- AJ1.

Internal view

12

[9] The finisher module

Main parts

Component Function

1 Punch waste tray Pull out the punch waste tray to remove punch waste.

2 Staple waste tray Pull out the staple waste tray to discard the staple waste.

Finishing options

IMPORTANT Do not place anything other than output paper in the trays of the finisher, as doing so may

damage the trays. Do not place anything under the trays of the finisher, as doing so may damage the trays.

The stacker/stapler, optional inserter and optional integrated punch unit

34 Chapter 2 - Main parts

NOTE If the finishing is used, the output trays move downward as the stack of paper that is output

increases in quantity and thickness. Once an output tray has reached its stacking limit, subsequent prints are automatically delivered to the next available tray. If all of the available trays have reached their stacking limits, printing stops temporarily. Remove all of the output paper from the trays. The trays move upward and printing resumes.

If the optional Booklet Trimmer-D1 is attached to the Saddle Finisher-AJ2, you cannot output stapled paper to the upper tray.

CAUTION Do not place your hands in the part of the tray where stapling is performed (near the rollers) when a finisher is attached, as this may result in personal injury.

Stapling

IMPORTANT During stapling, the output trays move downward as the stack of paper that is output

increases in quantity and thickness. Once an output tray has reached its stacking limit, or after 100 sets of prints have been output, printing and stapling stop temporarily. Remove all of the stapled prints from the output tray, and printing and stapling resume.

You can corner and double staple A3, B4, A4, A4R, and B5 paper. You can corner and double staple 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR and EXEC paper. You cannot staple vellums, transparencies, or labels. Do not pull copies or prints out of the output area while they are being stapled. Remove the

copies or prints after they are output to one of the output trays.

The stacker/stapler, optional inserter and optional integrated punch unit

Chapter 2 - Main parts 35

NOTE If you want to staple more than 50 sheets (80 g/m / 22 lb bond) of A3, B4, or A4R paper, or

100 sheets (80 g/m / 22 lb bond) of A4 or B5 paper, the copies/prints are only offset but not stapled. In addition, when selecting coated or heavy paper, you may not be able to use stapling even if the number of sheets, including sheet insertions or job separators, is below the set limit of a finisher.

If you want to staple more than 50 sheets (80 g/m / 22 lb bond) of 11" x 17", LGL or LTRR paper, or 100 sheets (80 g/m / 22 lb bond) of LTR or EXEC paper, the copies/prints are only offset but not stapled. In addition, when selecting coated or heavy paper, you may not be able to use stapling even if the number of sheets, including sheet insertions or job separators, is below the set limit of a finisher.

If the machine stops while stapling because almost all of the staples have been used the staple cartridge must be replaced.

Saddle stitching (booklets)

IMPORTANT Saddle stitching (booklets) is available only if the Saddle Finisher-AJ2 is attached. The maximum number of sheets that can be saddle stitched differs depending on the paper

weight and type. - When using plain paper (80 g/m / 22 lb bond), 25 sheets of paper (100 pages) can be saddle stitched at once. - When using coated paper (80 g/m / 22 lb bond), 15 sheets of paper (60 pages) can be saddle stitched at once.

The paper sizes that can be saddle stitched are: 330.2 mm x 482.6 mm, 320 mm x 450 mm (SRA3), 304.8 mm x 457.2 mm, A3, B4, A4R, and irregular size (210 mm x 279.4 mm to 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm). The paper sizes that can be saddle stitched are: 13" x 19", 12.60" x 17.72", 12" x 18", 11" x 17", LGL, LTRR, and irregular size (8 1/4" x 11" to 13" x 19 13/64").

The accuracy of folds created with saddle stitching may vary, depending on the paper type and the number of sheets.

Saddle pressing

Saddle press enables you to compress a saddle stitched booklet spine.

1 1

[10] Cross section (1)

IMPORTANT Saddle press is automatically used when you select booklet.

NOTE To make sure that saddle pressing is effective, you must saddle stitch more than nine sheets of paper (including one cover sheet).

Punching

The stacker/stapler, optional inserter and optional integrated punch unit

36 Chapter 2 - Main parts

IMPORTANT Punching is available only if the Puncher Unit-BB1 or Professional Puncher-B1 is attached. Only the following paper size can be hole punched:

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, or B5R / 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, or EXEC If only the optional Puncher Unit-BB1 is attached, the machine automatically selects how

many holes to punch depending on the selected paper size. - Two holes in case of LGL and LTRR - Three holes in case of 11" x 17", LTR and EXEC

Holes cannot be punched in paper heavier than 201 g/m / 54 lb bond, vellums, transparencies, labels, or prepunched paper.

Paper that is fed from the optional Document Insertion Unit-C1 cannot be hole punched.

NOTE The distance between the punch holes is shown in the illustration below.

4 1/4" (108 mm)

4 1/4" (108 mm)

2 3/4"

(70 mm)

[11] Puncher Unit-BB1 (3 holes, 2 holes)

Folding without stitching Folding folds multiple sheets in 2-folds.

5

4

3

2

1

1

[12] Originals at the left-hand side, copies at the right-hand side.The paper is saddle folded with a maximum of 5 sheets.

IMPORTANT Saddle folding is available only if the Saddle Finisher-AJ2 is attached. The paper is saddle folded with a maximum of 5 sheets (80 g/m), and then output. The sizes of paper that can be used with saddle folding are:

- 330.2 mm x 482.6 mm, 320 mm x 450 mm (SRA3), 304.8 mm x 457.2 mm, A3, B4, A4R, and irregular size paper (210 mm x 279.4 mm to 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm). - 13" x 19", 12.60" x 17.72", 12" x 18" , 11" x 17", LGL, LTRT and irregular size paper (8 1/4" x 11" to 13" x 19 13/64").

NOTE The following are paper sizes that can be output to the output trays of the machine. However, some paper sizes may not be output, depending on the set functions.

Input options

Paper size Upper tray Lower tray Booklet tray

A3

4

The stacker/stapler, optional inserter and optional integrated punch unit

Chapter 2 - Main parts 37

Paper size Upper tray Lower tray Booklet tray

A4 -

A4R

A5R - -

Custom size 139.7 mm x 182 mm to 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm

1) 2)

1) Only the custom size (182 mm x 182 mm to 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm) can be output.

2) Only the custom size (210 mm x 279.4 mm to 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm) can be output.

Input options

Paper size Upper tray Lower tray Booklet tray

11" x 17"

LGL -

LTR

LTRR - -

EXEC -

Custom size 139.7 mm x 182 mm to 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm

1) 2)

1) Only the custom size (7 1/8" x 7 1/8" to 13" x 19 13/64" (182 mm x 182 mm to 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm)) can be output.

2) Only the custom size (8 1/4" x 11" to 13" x 19 13/64" (210 mm x 279.4 mm to 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm)) can be output.

NOTE The Booklet Tray can only be used when the Saddle Finisher-AJ2 is attached.

The stacker/stapler, optional inserter and optional integrated punch unit

38 Chapter 2 - Main parts

Optional accessories

[13] Staple-N1: a case that holds staples for stapling

[14] Staple-P1: a case that holds staples for saddle stitching

The stacker/stapler, optional inserter and optional integrated punch unit

Chapter 2 - Main parts 39

The puncher

Introduction

The Professional Puncher Integration Unit-C1 reverses the paper punched by the Professional Puncher-B1.

The following items are not applicable to the JP model. Professional Puncher-B1 Professional Puncher Integration Unit-C1

IMPORTANT Always keep the main power switch of the Professional Puncher-B1 inside the front cover turned to the "I" side. In this case, the main power switch of the Professional Puncher-B1 works with the main power switch of the Professional Puncher Integration Unit-C1 automatically.

[15] Power switch of Professional Puncher-B1

IMPORTANT If the main power switch of the Professional Puncher-B1is turned to the "O" side, turn it to the "I" side before turning ON the main power switch of the Professional Puncher Integration Unit-C1.

Illustration

( I side)

( side)

a

b

[16] Professional Puncher Integration Unit-C1

Component Function

1 Front cover Open this cover to clear a paper jam.

2 Main power switch Press to the "I" side to turn ON the Profes- sional Puncher Integration Unit-C1.

The puncher

40 Chapter 2 - Main parts

Chapter 3 Power information

The power buttons and power modes

The power buttons

The printer has the following switches and buttons to control the power supply.

Button Name Description

Power switch The power switch is located on top of the fusing unit of the printer. The power switch connects and disconnects the printer to and from the main power.

Sleep button The Sleep button is located at the right-hand side of the operator panel. Using the Sleep button puts the printer into sleep mode or wakes the printer up from the sleep mode. When you press the Sleep button, the operator panel will be turned off too. The PRISMAsync controller remains on. The Sleep button allows you to switch between the Ready mode and the Sleep mode. This is only possible when the Power switch is in the 'O' position and the start-up phase is completed.

The power modes

You can find the energy saving settings in the Settings Editor under [Preferences] -> [System settings] -> [Energy save modes].

The power modes

Power mode Operator panel Description

Off Off The printer and the controller are completely off. There is no power consumption. The printer cannot receive or print any job.

Ready On The printer is ready to print jobs.

Low power mode Off The low power mode is an energy save mode. To use the low power mode, the [Low power mode tim- er enabled] setting in the Settings Editor must be set to [Yes]. When this setting is disabled, the printer skips the low power mode and goes into the sleep mode or deep sleep mode after the time set for these modes. When the printer has been idle for the time defined in the [Low power mode timer] setting, the printer goes in- to low power mode automatically. Possible values: 5 - 30 minutes. Factory default: 20 minutes. The printer wakes up when a job arrives in the list of [Scheduled jobs] or when you touch the operator panel (either the screen or any button). 4

The power buttons and power modes

42 Chapter 3 - Power information

Power mode Operator panel Description

Sleep mode Off Once the printer has been idle for the time defined in the [Sleep mode timer] setting in the Settings Editor, the printer goes into sleep mode automatically. Compared to the low power mode, the printer uses less energy. Possible values: 31 - 240 minutes. Factory default: 40 minutes. The printer wakes up when: You press the Sleep button on the operator panel, or A wake-up timer expires, or A job arrives in the list of [Scheduled jobs], provided

that the [Automatic wake-up enabled] setting in the Settings Editor is set to [Yes].

Press the Sleep button at the right-hand side of the op- erator panel to put the printer into the sleep mode man- ually. The printer goes into the sleep mode after all jobs are finished.

The power buttons and power modes

Chapter 3 - Power information 43

Turn on the system

Introduction

You are advised to turn on the system in the following order. 1. The optional equipment 2. The printer 3. The controller

1

[17] The location of the on/off button (1) of the controller

Turn on the system

Procedure

1. Turn on the optional equipment. 2. Put the main power switch on top of the main unit in the 'I' position. 3. Use one of the following options to turn on the controller.

Press the Sleep button at the right-hand side of the operator panel if the system was shut down from the operator panel.

Press the on/off button of the controller. The controller needs some time to start up.

Turn on the system

44 Chapter 3 - Power information

Turn off the system

Introduction

IMPORTANT Leave the main power switch on top of the main unit in the 'I' position. When you shut down, the power switch will automatically switch to the 'O' position.

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Shut down system]. The operator panel displays the message [ Are you sure you want to shut down?].

2. Press [Yes]. A message indicates when the shut down will begin. The shut down can take a maximum of 60 minutes.

IMPORTANT Using the [Shut down now] option can damage the printer. Use the [Shut down now] option only to turn the printer off and on within 10 minutes.

When the shut down is complete, the operator panel will be off. 3. Turn off the optional equipment.

Turn off the system

Chapter 3 - Power information 45

Restart the system

Introduction

You can restart the system via the Settings Editor (under [Support] -> [Troubleshooting]) or via the printer operator panel.

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Shut down system]. The operator panel displays the message [ Are you sure you want to shut down?].

2. Press [Restart].

Restart the system

46 Chapter 3 - Power information

Chapter 4 Operating concept

Operating concept

Introduction

To maximize efficient and productive printing, the operating concept of the system, is based on the following principles. Document preparation / job submission and production printing are clearly separated steps in

the workflow. Media definition is done by choosing from a media catalog instead of selecting trays. Operation is intuitive and convenient at all workflow steps. The workflow is entirely integrated because all components work together seamlessly.

Illustration

[18] The components of the complete system

Operating concept

48 Chapter 4 - Operating concept

Components overview

Component Main task

1 Settings Editor Define initial and default system settings Set default system, print, and workflow settings Define default color management settings like color

pre-sets Maintain the media catalog Set scan settings Manage transactional printing workflow settings Control support settings, such as licenses, counters,

and logging Configure connectivity, security, and accounting set-

tings

2 Printer driver Available through any ap- plication, for example, Adobe Acrobat, and Mi- crosoft Word.

Document preparation and job submission Document preparation for production printing Define settings per print job Send print jobs to the printer

3 PRISMAprepare Optional software

Document preparation and job submission Document preparation with full preview for produc-

tion printing Define settings per page for complex print jobs Send print jobs to the printer Send print jobs to the PostScript printers in the net-

work

4 PRISMAaccess Optional software

Workflow management for production environments Easy integration in PDF workflow Job submission via web Acceptance and preparation of incoming jobs Link to PRISMAprepare Link to all production printers Link to PRISMAarchive or your local reprint archive

5 PRISMAsync controller Process print jobs Rip print jobs

6 Remote Monitor Monitor production printing remotely Monitor remotely when operator intervention is nee-

ded 4

Operating concept

Chapter 4 - Operating concept 49

Component Main task

7 Operator panel Manage production printing from the [Schedule] view Monitor your print and copy jobs Load and assign media to the media trays

Manage jobs from the [Jobs] view Schedule print and copy jobs Change job properties if required Define and handle copy jobs Define and handle scan jobs

Manage media from the [Trays] view Change the media that is currently assigned to a pa-

per tray Assign the media to the paper tray

Manage the system from the [System] view Calibrate the system Perform maintenance tasks Set default workflow and printer settings View the media catalog, add temporary media and

perform media registration

8 imagePRESS C7011VPS / C7010VPS Series

Production printing Finishing

Operating concept

50 Chapter 4 - Operating concept

Access the Settings Editor

Introduction

The Settings Editor is a Web application and therefore accessible using an Internet browser. The Settings Editor allows you to manage settings or display information in the following areas. [Media] [Color] [Preferences] [Workflow] [Transaction printing] (optional) [Configuration] [Support]

You can also use the search field at the upper right-hand corner of the Settings Editor to access a setting. Be aware that not all tabs are searched.

Before you begin

Make sure you have the following information. The IP address or hostname of the controller. The key operator password to change all settings except for the settings in the [Configuration]

tab. The system administrator password to change all settings including the settings in the

[Configuration] tab.

Procedure

1. Open the Internet browser. 2. At the address bar, enter the protocol and printer name or IP address:

http:// https:// The Settings Editor appears.

Result

You can now use the Settings Editor to make changes in the above listed areas.

Access the Settings Editor

Chapter 4 - Operating concept 51

For more information, read the short Help and tool tips in the Settings Editor.

Access the Settings Editor

52 Chapter 4 - Operating concept

Maintain the [Media catalog]

Introduction

The [Media catalog] is a list of media with pre-defined characteristics including the [Media family]. You can maintain the media catalog with the Settings Editor. You can also add media from the control panel. Add media to the media catalog on page 104 (See )

Before you begin

Make sure you have the following information. Key operator or system administrator password

Procedure

1. From the navigation bar, select the [Media] tab. 2. From the [Media] tab, select [Media].

The [Media catalog] window appears.

[19] The [Media catalog] window

3. From the toolbar, select the required option to maintain the [Media catalog].

NOTE When you add, change or import new media, make sure that you enter the correct values for the following options. [Weight] [Media family] [Surface type]

The correct values are required for optimal print quality.

Maintain the [Media catalog]

Chapter 4 - Operating concept 53

[20] The [Add new media] window

Maintain the [Media catalog]

54 Chapter 4 - Operating concept

Maintain the [Media families]

Introduction

A media family is a set of media with the same output profile (one per halftone) and calibration. By default, the controller provides the media families coated and uncoated. These two media families ensure a high print quality for a wide range of media. An expert can create a new media family for a specific group of media. A media family has one output profile for the following halftones. [Normal] [Fine] [Error diffusion]

IMPORTANT You do not need to create a media family per media size or per media weight.

You must create a new media family for all cases where you need a new output profile: When, after calibration, the default output profiles of the default media families do not achieve

the required print quality. For example when you use media with a glossy pearl surface. Be aware that it is very difficult to create new output profiles that will increase the print quality. The default output profiles in the default media families are the result of months of precise measurements with specific knowledge of the printer and controller.

When you use device link profiles. Device link profiles are assigned to a media family.

For all applications that require a new output profile.

Before you begin

Make sure you have the following information. Key operator password

Procedure

1. From the navigation bar, select the [Media] tab. 2. From the [Media] tab, select [Media family].

The [Media families] window appears.

[21] The [Media families] window

3. From the toolbar, select the required option to maintain the [Media families].

Maintain the [Media families]

Chapter 4 - Operating concept 55

[22] The [Add media family] window

Maintain the [Media families]

56 Chapter 4 - Operating concept

Maintain colors settings with the Settings Editor

Maintain the [Color presets]

Introduction

A color pre-set is a collection of color and quality settings that matches a specific document type, workflow or color application. The color pre-sets enable users to select the correct settings easily without in-depth knowledge about color management.

The controller provides the following color pre-sets to start printing immediately. [Office documents (default)] to print Microsoft Office documents.

Microsoft Office documents use the RGB color space. [Photographic content (default)] to print documents from photo editing or layout applications.

These documents use the CMYK color space.

A color expert can create more color pre-sets. The color pre-sets appear in the printer driver and in PRISMAprepare (optional software).

Procedure

1. From the navigation bar, select the [Color] tab. 2. From the [Color] tab, select [Color presets].

The [Color presets] window appears.

[23] The [Color presets] window

3. From the toolbar, select the required option to maintain the [Color presets].

Maintain colors settings with the Settings Editor

Chapter 4 - Operating concept 57

[24] The [Add color preset] window

Maintain the [Color presets]

58 Chapter 4 - Operating concept

Maintain the [Input profiles]

Introduction

An input profile defines a reference color workspace for the color data of the objects in the document. An input profile is used to define colors in a device independent way.

Procedure

1. From the navigation bar, select the [Color] tab. 2. From the [Color] tab, select [Input profiles].

The [Input profiles] window appears.

[25] The [Input profiles] window

3. From the toolbar, select the required option to maintain the input profiles.

Maintain the [Input profiles]

Chapter 4 - Operating concept 59

Maintain the [Output profiles]

Introduction

An output profile defines a reference color workspace for the color data of the objects in the document. An output profile is used to define colors in a device independent way.

Procedure

1. From the navigation bar, select the [Color] tab. 2. From the [Color] tab, select [Output profiles].

The [Output profiles] window appears.

[26] The [Output profiles] window

3. From the toolbar, select the required option to maintain the output profiles.

Maintain the [Output profiles]

60 Chapter 4 - Operating concept

Exchange the [Spot color libraries] (optional)

Introduction

The Settings Editor allows you import and export spot color libraries.

Procedure

1. From the navigation bar, select the [Color] tab. 2. From the [Color] tab, select [Spot color libraries].

The [Spot color libraries] window appears.

[27] The [Spot color libraries] window

3. From the toolbar, select the required option to exchange the spot color libraries.

Exchange the [Spot color libraries] (optional)

Chapter 4 - Operating concept 61

Maintain the [Spot colors]

Introduction

Spot colors are used to standardize colors to make sure that colors match regardless of the equipment used to produce the color.

Procedure

1. From the navigation bar, select the [Color] tab. 2. From the [Color] tab, select [Spot colors].

The [Spot colors] window appears.

[28] The [Spot colors] window

3. From the toolbar, select the required option to maintain the spot colors.

Maintain the [Spot colors]

62 Chapter 4 - Operating concept

Maintain the [Color mappings] (optional)

Introduction

Color mappings are used to map a color or a small range of colors in the input file to a fixed spot color in a spot color library. With color mapping you ensure for example that a company color or logo color is always exactly the same color. Color mappings are available at the printer driver and the automated workflows.

However, you can also use color mappings to indicate layers in the input file that you want to leave out for printing. For example for the following types of layers. Layers with cutting or folding marks. Layers that indicate a foil that must be applied after printing. Layers that indicate a gold print.

You can leave out layers for printing if you map the specific colors on these layers to a spot color with the value [None].

NOTE You can copy a color mapping from one color mapping group to another color mapping group.

Procedure

1. From the navigation bar, select the [Color] tab. 2. From the [Color] tab, select [Color mappings].

The [Color mappings] window appears.

[29] The [Color mappings] window

3. From the toolbar, select the required option to maintain the color mappings.

Maintain the [Color mappings] (optional)

Chapter 4 - Operating concept 63

[30] The [Add color mapping] option

Maintain the [Color mappings] (optional)

64 Chapter 4 - Operating concept

Maintain the [Color & information bars] (optional)

Introduction

Color and information bars are used to control the print process. Use a color bar to check, for example, ink density, dot gain, and contrast. You can import and export color bars. With the information bar you can print the settings you use for a print job. Both the color and information bars are available at the printer driver, PRISMAprepare, the operator panel and the automated workflows.

Procedure

1. From the navigation bar, select the [Color] tab. 2. From the [Color] tab, select [Color & information bars].

The [Color & information bars] window appears.

[31] The [Color & information bars] window

3. From the toolbar, select the required option to maintain the color and information bars.

[32] The [Add information bar] option

Maintain the [Color & information bars] (optional)

Chapter 4 - Operating concept 65

Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare

Introduction

Oc PRISMAprepare allows you to prepare the print job completely on page level. You can preview the result per page. PRISMAprepare is an optional application.

This procedure describes the most important settings for daily use.

Procedure

1. Prepare the document.

[33] Lay out preparation with PRISMAprepare

2. Use the media catalog to define the media. With PRISMAprepare you can export the media catalog to PRISMAsync controllers of the black & white and color systems.

Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare

66 Chapter 4 - Operating concept

[34] The media catalog in PRISMAprepare

3. Select the required color pre-set or define customized color settings for optimal print quality. Select [Office documents (default)] to print Microsoft Office documents. Microsoft Office

documents use the RGB color space. Select [Photographic content (default)] to print documents from photo editing or layout

applications. These documents use the CMYK color space. 4. Define the required finishing options.

NOTE Please refer to the online help of PRISMAprepare for detailed information.

Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare

Chapter 4 - Operating concept 67

Prepare print jobs with the printer driver The printer driver enables you to prepare the complete print job. The printer driver is available in all applications for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems. You can use the printer driver to submit documents from applications, such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Acrobat. The printer driver provides the following features: Access to the media catalog, to select the best media for the job. Color preset selection, for easy-to-use and fast color management. Many settings for the layout and finishing. Templates for the print job settings you use more often. Secure print jobs with a PIN. Labels, to organize jobs in a DocBox or the print queue. You can also use labels to print via an

automated workflow. Default print ticket creation, to print via hotfolders. Preview pane, to show the results of the settings.

You can submit jobs to the following locations on PRISMAsync: a DocBox, the list of waiting jobs or the list of scheduled jobs.

This generic procedure describes how to define a print job.

The online help of the printer driver provides detailed information on the available functions. Download the printer drivers from the Settings Editor.

[35] The media catalog in the printer driver

Prepare print jobs with the printer driver

68 Chapter 4 - Operating concept

1 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

[36] The setting parts of the printer driver

Before you begin

Check if there is a connection from the printer driver to the print system (6).

Procedure

1. Check the document size, orientation and binding edge that come from the application (1 and 2). 2. Check the presets (3). 3. Change the settings for one or more presets, if required (4). 4. Define the job production settings (7). 5. Check the results in the preview pane (2). 6. Save the settings in a template, if required (5). 7. Click [OK] (8).

Prepare print jobs with the printer driver

Chapter 4 - Operating concept 69

Manage production printing

Introduction

The operating panel of the printer enables you to manage production printing. You can manage all print jobs from the [Schedule] tab. The Remote Monitor enables you to monitor the system status from a distance via an internet browser.

Procedure

1. Press the [Schedule] button at the lower left of the operator panel to access the [Schedule] view.

[37] The [Schedule] view

Manage production printing

70 Chapter 4 - Operating concept

Monitor operator intervention remotely (optional)

Procedure

1. Open the Internet Browser. 2. At the address bar, enter 'http://printername/remoteinfo' or 'https://printername/remoteinfo'.

The Remote Monitor displays a fixed time line of 30 minutes.

[38] The remote monitor

Monitor operator intervention remotely (optional)

Chapter 4 - Operating concept 71

Monitor operator intervention remotely (optional)

72 Chapter 4 - Operating concept

Chapter 5 Operator panel views

The dashboard

Introduction

The dashboard is the upper part of the operator panel. The dashboard is always visible, irrespective of the current view. The dashboard shows the following. The status of the system. The status of the supplies. The status of the finishers. The current process. Instructions for the operator. The [Resume] button after you stopped the printer.

Illustration

The following illustration shows the dashboard while the machine is busy. The vertical status bar is green. No action is required.

1 2 3 4

[39] The dashboard - No action is required

The following illustration shows the dashboard while the machine is busy. The vertical status bar is orange. Next to the status bar, the dashboard displays a message that indicates which action is required soon.

1 2 3 4

[40] The dashboard - Action is required soon

NOTE The operator panel can only display one message at a time. When there are more messages, the operator panel displays the first required or most important message. To see all messages, select the first message.

The parts of the dashboard

Number Function

1 Display the status of the machine, for example Initializing..., Printing... or Printing will stop.... Each status message can have a sub-message with additional information. 4

The dashboard

74 Chapter 5 - Operator panel views

Number Function

2 Display the file name of the current job (for document printing) or cur- rent stream (for stream printing). Furthermore, the progress of the cur- rent job is displayed. For document printing, the counter can display the following informa- tion. Set X of Y Sheet X of Y or Sheet X.

X represents the current status of the print job. Y represents the total number of sets or sheets of a print job. When the sorting method for a job is set to By set and a set contains at least 40 pages, then the dashboard displays the set count (Set X of Y). When the sorting method for a job is set to By page, or when you print stream jobs, then the dashboard only displays a sheet count.

3 Display the action that you must do now or soon. The colors of the ver- tical status bar at the left-hand side match the colors of the LED on the operator panel and the operator attention light. When the color is or- ange or red, a message indicates the required action. Orange means that action is required soon. How long before an up- coming action the operator panel starts to display the message de- pends on the defined warning time. Red means that action is required now.

4 Displays a status action when you must do something now or soon re- garding the following items. Printer calibration Finishers. Staple cartridges. Toner reservoir.

The dashboard

Chapter 5 - Operator panel views 75

The [Schedule] view

Introduction

The [Schedule] is your daily planning board for print jobs. The [Schedule] helps you to keep the machine running.

This section shows and describes the main parts of the [Schedule].

NOTE The descriptions of the colors of the bars and the indication of the required amount of sheets are only valid for document printing. For streaming jobs , all the bars remain grey until the paper trays are empty or the output locations are full. Then the machine stops and the bars become red. Furthermore, the media toolbar does not indicate the required amount of sheets.

The [Schedule] view

[41] The [Schedule] view

The [Schedule] view

76 Chapter 5 - Operator panel views

The [Jobs] view

Introduction

The [Jobs] view enables you to access all functions to print, copy and scan your documents.

From the left side of the [Jobs] view, you can access the following sections. The [Queues] section.

The [Queues] section enables you to manage print jobs in the list of [Scheduled jobs] and [Waiting jobs].

The [Printed jobs] section The [Printed jobs] section enables you to manage print jobs in the list of [Printed jobs].

The [Copy/Scan] section. The [Copy/Scan] section enables you to manage copy and scan jobs using copy templates and scan profiles.

The [Jobs] view

[42] The scheduled jobs and waiting jobs in the jobs view

The job icons may show one or more of the following status icons.

Icon Description

The printer is downloading the document via the network (spool- ing)

The printer converts the document into a printable bitmap (rip- ping)

4

The [Jobs] view

Chapter 5 - Operator panel views 77

Icon Description

The printer is printing

The job is ready for printing

The printer converts and prints simultaneously (ripping and print- ing)

The job contains an operator note

Indicates a streaming job

Indicates a proof print

The job settings are overruled by the PRISMAsync controller set- tings because of conflicting settings. Check the job properties.

Indicates an RIP error

The [Jobs] view

78 Chapter 5 - Operator panel views

The [Trays] view

Introduction

The [Trays] view has the following functions. Display the current content and filling level of the paper trays Change the media that is currently assigned to a paper tray Assign media to a paper tray Unassign media from a paper tray. Register the media.

Illustration

[43] Example of a configuration with two paper modules

Related information

Load the media using the Trays view on page 102

The [Trays] view

Chapter 5 - Operator panel views 79

The [System] view

Introduction

The system view enables you to access all functions to maintain and set up the system.

From the left side of the [System] view, you can access the following sections. The [Printer] section.

Enables you to check the toner levels and the status of the waste boxes and staples of finishing equipment.

The [Maintenance] section. Enables you to read the counters and start the maintenance actions.

The [Setup] section. Enables you to set up your personal workflow, operator panel behavior, and advanced system settings.

The [Media] section. Enables you to view the content of the [Media catalog] or add temporary media to the [Media catalog].

The [Color adjustment] section. Gives access to the calibration procedures.

The [System] view

Related information

Introduction to the Maintenance section on page 350 Introduction to the Setup section on page 82

The [System] view

80 Chapter 5 - Operator panel views

Chapter 6 Adapt printer settings to your needs

Introduction to the [Setup] section

Introduction

The [System] view gives access to system information, the system setup and media information.

This section gives an overview of the [Setup] section in the [System] view.

Introduction to the [Setup] section

The items of the [Setup] section

The workflow section at the top of the operator panel displays the main settings of the current workflow profile

The operator panel section displays the following buttons. [Workflow profile]

Select a workflow profile or manually define the settings that match your needs. [Language]

Change the language of the operator panel. [Warning time]

Define the moment when the system warns you about an action that is required soon, for example 10 minutes in advance. The warning is displayed in the dashboard and indicated through the operator attention light.

[Job name truncation] Define the way the system shortens the job name when the job name is too long to display fully.

[Operator panel settings] Adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen of the operator panel.

[Shut down system]

Introduction to the [Setup] section

82 Chapter 6 - Adapt printer settings to your needs

Shut down the printer and the controller in a controlled way.

The advanced section displays the following buttons. [Local key operator settings]

Get direct access to a number of important key operator settings in the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller. You can also access the local key operator settings form the startup screen,

Introduction to the [Setup] section

Chapter 6 - Adapt printer settings to your needs 83

Work with the workflow profiles

Introduction

The machine is used in different printing environments. Each environment requires other settings to optimize the workflow or to meet your personal workflow preferences. The machine contains a number of default workflow profiles to help you optimize your workflow. The default workflow profiles are combinations of frequently used settings for print jobs ([Receive], [Print] and [Output]). However, the workflow profiles cannot cover all the possible workflows you may need. Therefore, you can also define the settings individually (custom workflow).

This section makes recommendations about when to use which workflow profile. Furthermore, this section describes the settings and the effects of the settings.

NOTE The [Workflow profile] button in the [Setup] section of the [System] view displays the name of the selected workflow profile. When you customized the settings of a workflow profile, the button displays the text [Custom].

The use of the default workflow profiles

The following table makes recommendations about when to use which default workflow profile.

When to use which workflow

Profile When to use

[ Standard] You need a productive workflow but you still want to have sufficient control over the jobs.

[ Job by job] You want to start the jobs one by one. Each time a job has been prin- ted, the machine goes on hold. Always touch [Resume] in the dash- board to start the next job.

[ Check and print] You want to check the quality and layout of each first set of a job be- fore the remaining sets will be printed.

[ Manual planning] The jobs are sent to the machine in a random order. You can manually define the most productive order in which the machine will print the jobs.

[ Unattended] You want to continue printing while you are absent, for example after working hours. Then the machine will print the scheduled jobs, provi- ded that all the required media, supplies and output locations are avail- able.

The default settings for [Receive]

The default [Receive] settings

Workflow profile [Receive] settings

[Destination of print job] [Destination of copy job]

[Standard] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs]

[Job by job] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs]

[Check and print] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs]

[Manual planning] [Waiting jobs] [Waiting jobs] 4

Work with the workflow profiles

84 Chapter 6 - Adapt printer settings to your needs

Workflow profile [Receive] settings

[Destination of print job] [Destination of copy job]

[Unattended] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs]

The default settings for [Print]

The default [Print] settings

Workflow profile [Print] settings

[Confirm start of job] [Check first set]

[ Standard] [ Off] [ As in job]

[ Job by job] [On] [ As in job]

[ Check and print] [ Off] [On]

[ Manual planning] [ Off] [ As in job]

[ Unattended] [ Off] [ Off]

The default settings for [Output]

The default [Output] settings

Workflow profile [Output] settings

[Offset stacking]

[ Standard] [ Sets (as in job)]

[ Job by job] [ Sets (as in job)]

[ Check and print] [ Sets (as in job)]

[ Manual planning] [ Sets (as in job)]

[ Unattended] [ Banners]

Values and effects of the settings

The following table describes the effects of the various values of the settings.

Values and effects of the settings

Setting Values Effect

[Destination of print job]

[Scheduled jobs] The jobs are immediately sent to the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The machine will print the jobs in the ripped order. You can do the following to rearrange the order in which the jobs will be printed. Move jobs to the list of [Waiting jobs] or Use [To top] to move a job to the top of the list of

[Scheduled jobs].

[Waiting jobs] You can manually define the order in which the jobs will be printed.

[As in job] The submitted jobs go to the destination that is defined in the job ticket or in the copy job. 4

Work with the workflow profiles

Chapter 6 - Adapt printer settings to your needs 85

Setting Values Effect

[Destination of copy job]

[Scheduled jobs] The jobs are immediately sent to the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The machine will print the jobs in the ripped order. You can do the following to rearrange the order in which the jobs will be printed. Move jobs to the list of [Waiting jobs] or Use [To top] to move a job to the top of the list of

[Scheduled jobs].

[Waiting jobs] You can manually define the order in which the jobs will be printed.

[DocBox] The copy jobs go directly to the [DocBox]. When you have more than 1 [DocBox] on your system, you can se- lect the [DocBox] to which the jobs will be sent.

[Destination of DocBox job]

[Scheduled jobs] The jobs are immediately sent to the list of [Scheduled jobs].

[Waiting jobs] The jobs are sent to the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can manually define the order in which the jobs will be prin- ted.

[Confirm start of job]

[On] The machine always stops before the next scheduled job. You must press the Release key to start each job.

[Off] The machine prints the scheduled jobs one after the oth- er. The machine does not stop before the next scheduled job, unless there is a reason to stop. For example when a media is not available.

[On conflict] Ask for a confirmation if a conflict occurs. For example when the punch setting is set in the driver and the printer has no puncher.

[Check first set] [On] The machine goes on hold after the first set of a job is printed. You can check the quality and layout of the first set before the machine prints the remaining sets.

[Off] The machine will print the whole job without stopping after the first set.

[As in job] The machine will print the jobs as indicated in the job ticket. 4

Work with the workflow profiles

86 Chapter 6 - Adapt printer settings to your needs

Setting Values Effect

[Offset stacking] [Jobs] Each printed job that is delivered to an output location is stacked on top of the previous printed job with an offset. This helps you to identify the various jobs.

[Sets (always)] Each printed set that is delivered to an output location is stacked on top of the previous set with an offset. This helps you to identify the various sets.

[Sets (as in job)] Each printed set is delivered to the output location as de- fined in the job ticket or copy job. Therefore, the sets can be stacked in one straight line or with an offset.

[Banners] Each banner page of a job is delivered to the output lo- cation with an offset. This helps you to identify the sepa- rate jobs. The jobs themselves are stacked in one straight line.

[Off] All the printed jobs or sets are stacked in one straight line. There is no offset between the jobs or sets.

Work with the workflow profiles

Chapter 6 - Adapt printer settings to your needs 87

Change the warning time

Introduction

When operator interaction is required now or soon, the dashboard and the operator attention light can warn you. This is a trigger that action is required now or soon, for example load a required media type or empty an output location. You can define how long in advance the warning message is displayed.

By factory default, the function [Warning in advance] is enabled and set to 10 minutes. Then the dashboard starts to display the warning 10 minutes before an action becomes inevitable. If you do not respond to the warning message, the printer will stop. Depending on the urgency of the warning message, the vertical bar in the dashboard and the operator attention light are orange or red.

NOTE The operator attention light is linked to the status of the machine. For example, when the

dashboard displays an orange warning, the orange light of the operator attention light also lights up.

You can only change the warning time when the [Warning in advance] function is enabled.

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Warning time]. 2. Touch the - or + button to decrease or increase the warning time in steps of 1 minute. You can set

a time from 1 - 60 minutes. 3. Press [OK].

Change the warning time

88 Chapter 6 - Adapt printer settings to your needs

Disable the warning time

Introduction

When operator interaction is required now or soon, the dashboard and the operator attention light warn you. However, you can disable this warning function.

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Warning time] (under [Operator panel]). When the box for [Warning in advance] has a check mark and states [On], the function is enabled.

2. Touch the [Warning in advance] button. The check mark disappears. The status [On] changes into [Off].

3. Press [OK].

Related information

The dashboard on page 74 The operator attention light on page 31

Disable the warning time

Chapter 6 - Adapt printer settings to your needs 89

Truncate the job name

Introduction

In the [Jobs] view, the operator panel displays all jobs with their job names. If a job name is too long, the systems truncates the job name. To enable you to identify your jobs in the lists more easily, you can define how the system truncates the job names. This allows you to keep the identifying part of the job name. You can choose to truncate the job name at the beginning or at the end of the name.

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Job name truncation] (under [Operator panel]). 2. For [ Truncate job name at], select [Beginning] or [End]. 3. Touch the - or + button to indicate the number of characters before truncation. 4. Press [OK].

Truncate the job name

90 Chapter 6 - Adapt printer settings to your needs

Adjust the brightness and contrast of the operator panel

Introduction

You can adjust the brightness and contrast of your monitor to improve the readability of the operator panel. The required brightness and contrast settings can depend on the lighting in your room, for example.

Setting Description

[ Auto adjust] The screen of the operator panel will automatically set the correct ratio of brightness and contrast.

[ Brightness] You can increase or decrease the brightness from level 20 to 100 in steps of 1. The factory default value is 80. Higher values will in- crease the brightness.

[ Contrast] You can increase or decrease the contrast from level 10 to 100 in steps of 1. The factory default value is 50. Higher values will in- crease the contrast.

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Operator panel settings]. 2. Touch [ Auto adjust] to optimize the brightness and contrast of the screen automatically. 3. Touch [OK] when the brightness and contrast are OK, or continue with the steps below when

these settings are not yet OK. 4. Touch '-' to decrease or '+' to increase the [ Brightness]. 5. Touch '-' to decrease or '+' to increase the [ Contrast]. 6. Press [OK].

Adjust the brightness and contrast of the operator panel

Chapter 6 - Adapt printer settings to your needs 91

Access Settings Editor settings via the operator panel

Introduction

NOTE The information contained in this section is primarily intended for key operators and system administrators.

The Settings Editor application on the PRISMAsync controller is a web based application that allows key operators and system administrators to adapt the system completely to the situation in an organization and production environment. The Settings Editor allows key operators and system administrators to manage settings with regard to network configuration, system preferences, job preferences and media, for example.

For convenience reasons, a subset of frequently used settings is accessible through the operator panel.

NOTE You need the key operator PIN or the system administrator PIN to make changes in this section. This PIN is the same as used when accessing the Settings Editor application on the PRISMAsync controller.

Settings available through the operator panel

Group of settings Available settings Short description

[About] [Serial number] (read-only)

[Version of printer software] (read-on- ly)

The [About] section allows you to look up the serial number and software version of the printer. You can also upgrade the printer soft- ware through this section. Follow the instructions on the operator panel when you upgrade the software.

[Software licenses] [Upload license] When you have a new license to activate a new feature on the printer, you can upload the license through this section. After uploading the license, the feature becomes active. Follow the instructions on the operator panel when you upgrade the software.

[Logging] [Save the data- dump file]

[Save the trace file] [Print the configura-

tion report]

When an error occurs, the help desk of your printer supplier can ask you to create and send a datadump file. The datadump file is a .zip file that contains detailed technical information about your system. Furthermore, the system can store trace log files in .zip files. You can save both .zip files to a USB location. The configuration report contains information about the configuration of your printing sys- tem, for example information about the sys- tem configuration, controller configuration or network settings. You can print the configura- tion report for backup purposes, for example. Follow the instructions on the operator panel when you save a file or print a report. 4

Access Settings Editor settings via the operator panel

92 Chapter 6 - Adapt printer settings to your needs

Group of settings Available settings Short description

[Connectivity] [MAC address] (read-only)

[Host name] [Link speed and

connection type] [DHCP enabled] [TCP/IP address] [Subnet mask] [Default gateway] [Primary DNS suf-

fix] DNS settings WINS settings IPv6 settings [Test the TCP/IP

connection]

The [Connectivity] section contains the main settings to integrate the printer into a network. After you have adapted the network settings, you can test the connection from here. Follow the instructions on the operator panel when you adapt the network settings.

[System settings] [Date and time] [System of meas-

urement] [Time zone]

The [System settings] section contains settings to change the date and time of the system, or the system of measurement used. When you change the system of measurement, all corre- sponding values on the system will be changed. For example, when you change [Met- ric] into [Imperial], all values will be displayed in inches.

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Local key operator settings] (below [Advanced]). 2. Touch the button of the group that contains the setting you want to change or view. 3. Touch the required setting. 4. Look up the required information or make the required changes. 5. Press [OK].

Access Settings Editor settings via the operator panel

Chapter 6 - Adapt printer settings to your needs 93

Access Settings Editor settings via the operator panel

94 Chapter 6 - Adapt printer settings to your needs

Chapter 7 Media handling

Introduction to the [Schedule] view

Introduction

The [Schedule] is your daily planning board for print jobs. The [Schedule] helps you to keep the machine running.

This section shows and describes the main parts of the [Schedule].

NOTE The descriptions of the colors of the bars and the indication of the required amount of sheets are only valid for document printing. For streaming jobs , all the bars remain grey until the paper trays are empty or the output locations are full. Then the machine stops and the bars become red. Furthermore, the media toolbar does not indicate the required amount of sheets.

The [Schedule] view

3 51

2

4

[44] The [Schedule] view

1. The jobs pane

The jobs pane shows the jobs on a timeline. The width of the job corresponds to the (remaining) print time. A vertical line separates the jobs. The vertical line moves to the left as the printing of a job progresses.

An icon and the job name represent a job. The icon indicates the state of the job, for example printing .

Furthermore, the icon indicates the stop moments of the machine. For example, when the setting [Confirm start of job] in the workflow profiles (see list of references below) is set to [On] or when you use the [Stop after job] function.

Introduction to the [Schedule] view

96 Chapter 7 - Media handling

2. The [Required media] pane

The [Required media] pane displays the media that are required for each scheduled job. For each required media, the media properties are displayed (see list of references below). The bars show the availability of the media. The bars can have the following colors.

The colors of the bars

Color of the bar Description

Green The required media is available.

Orange The media is required in the future, but not available then. For example because the paper trays do not contain sufficient sheets of the required media.

Yellow The system cannot determine the exact number of sheets that is availa- ble in the paper trays.

Red The media is required now, but not available. The job can only start when you load the required media.

When you print small jobs, the bars for these jobs may not be completely visible. To prevent that you do not see the status of these small jobs, the operator panel can show the following images.

NOTE When you set the zoom control (5) to a shorter time-scale, in most cases the operator panel will display bars for these small jobs.

The possible display of small jobs

Image Description

Green. The required media is available.

Orange. The media is required in the future, but not available then. For example because the paper trays do not contain sufficient sheets of the required media.

Red. The media is required now, but not available. The job can only start when you load the required media.

3. The media toolbar

The media toolbar displays the following information for the media that is selected in the [Required media] pane. Furthermore, the media type toolbar contains the [Load] button to load and assign the required media.

4. The output locations pane

The output locations pane displays the output locations that are required for the scheduled jobs. The bars show the availability of the output locations. The bars can have the following colors.

The colors of the bars

Color of the bar Description

Green The output location is required and available.

Orange The output location is required in the future, but not available then. For example, because the output location will be full soon. 4

Introduction to the [Schedule] view

Chapter 7 - Media handling 97

Color of the bar Description

Red The output location is required now, but not available. For example, be- cause the output location is full.

Gray The output location is required, but availability is unknown.

5. The Zoom Control

The zoom control enables you to adjust the time scale visible in the [Schedule]. When you touch the zoom button, a drop-down list appears. Then you can select the desired time scale (five minutes - eight hours).

Introduction to the [Schedule] view

98 Chapter 7 - Media handling

Load the media using the [Schedule] view

Introduction

This section describes how to load the media into a paper tray.

When you load the media via the [Load] button in the [Schedule], the media is automatically assigned to the correct tray.

When you load and assign the media via the [Assign] button in the [Trays] view, you must assign the loaded media to the corresponding paper tray manually.

IMPORTANT Make sure you load the media at the right moment as indicated on the operator panel.

When to do

The [Schedule] displays a red bar next to a required media. The red bar indicates that a scheduled job now requires a media that is not available in the paper trays.

The [Schedule] displays an orange bar next to a required media. The orange bar indicates that a scheduled job requires media which is either not available in the paper trays or which is available, but not in sufficient quantity to finish the job.

The current job requires more of the same media than is currently loaded in the paper trays. You can add more of the required media into another paper tray.

You already want to load and assign media that are required for the next job (work ahead).

Procedure

1. Press [Schedule]. 2. At [Required media], select the media you want to load. 3. Press [Load].

The operator panel indicates how much media to load for the scheduled jobs. 4. Touch the tray where you want to load the media.

You can select more than one tray. 5. Touch [OK] to confirm. 6. Load the media as described in one of the following references.

Load the media into the paper tray on page 107 Load the media into the bulk media module (optional) on page 117

Result

NOTE The printer continues printing automatically after closing the paper tray. To load media in a grayed-out paper tray, you can open the paper tray and load the media.

Load the media using the [Schedule] view

Chapter 7 - Media handling 99

Description of the [Trays] view

Introduction

The [Trays] view has the following functions. Display the current content and filling level of the paper trays Change the media that is currently assigned to a paper tray Assign media to a paper tray when you already loaded the media Unassign media from a paper tray.

This section describes the items of the [Trays] view.

NOTE The trays view also opens when you press the paper tray key on the operator panel.

Illustration

1

2 3 4 5 5

[45] Example of a configuration with two paper modules

The items of the [Trays] view

Description of the [Trays] view

Num ber

Item Function

1 Content of the paper trays Indicate the current content and filling level of the paper trays. The [Trays] view displays the parameters of the media that are currently in the paper trays. The parame- ters are a combination of icons and texts.

2 [Assign] button Assign media from the media catalog to the paper tray. 4

Description of the [Trays] view

100 Chapter 7 - Media handling

Num ber

Item Function

3 [Unassign] button Unassign media from the paper tray.

4 [Optimize] button Gives access to the media optimization options.

5 Arrow buttons When your configuration contains more paper modules or an inserter than the [ Trays ] view can display in 1 screen, you can press the arrow buttons to change the part of the machine displayed.

The paper tray information

The [Trays] view displays the following textual information for each paper tray. The media name, for example 'Normal paper' The media size, for example A4 or Letter The media weight, for example, 80 g/m or 20 lb bond The media color The special characteristics of the media, for example [cyclic] or [punched]. In brackets,

additional information is given about these media, for example the cycle count or the number of holes for punched media.

The [Trays] view displays the following icons for each paper tray.

The meaning of the icons

Icon Description

The paper tray is empty

NOTE Each line indicates the presence of about 100 sheets

The paper tray is too full. Please remove sheets from the stack

The plate inside the paper tray is down

The paper tray is open

or

or

The paper tray contains media that are fed over the long edge (LEF) or short edge (SEF) . The small icons indicate A4/Letter or A4/Letter- like media. The large icons indicate A3/Ledger or A3/Ledger-like media. When you defined a color for a media, the icon can have that color

The paper tray is in use for one or more scheduled jobs

The paper tray contains tab sheets

The paper tray contains tab sheets that must be processed as inserts

The paper tray contains inserts

The paper tray contains media that are fed over the long edge (LEF)

The paper tray contains media that are fed over the short edge (SEF)

Description of the [Trays] view

Chapter 7 - Media handling 101

Load the media using the [ Trays ] view

Introduction

This section describes how to load the media into a paper tray.

When you load the media via the [Load] button in the [Schedule], the paper tray is automatically assigned to the correct media.

When you load and assign the media via the [Assign] button in the [ Trays ] view, you must assign the paper tray to the loaded media manually.

When to do

The [Schedule] displays a red bar next to a required media. The red bar indicates that a scheduled job now requires a media that is not available in the paper trays.

The [Schedule] displays an orange bar next to a required media. The orange bar indicates that a scheduled job requires media which is either not available in the paper trays or which is available, but not in sufficient quantity to finish the job.

The current job requires more of the same media than is currently loaded in the paper trays. You can add more of the required media into another paper tray.

You already want to load and assign media that are required for the next job (work ahead).

Procedure

1. Touch [ Trays ]. 2. Select the tray where you want to load the media. 3. Load the media as described in one of the following references.

Load the media into the paper tray on page 107 Load the media into the bulk media module (optional) on page 117

4. Touch [Assign]. The [Assign media] window opens with media names. The previous media in the selected paper tray is highlighted. The list displays all the media in the media catalog. When the list is empty, the media catalog does not contain media that match the position of the paper guides.

5. Select the media you loaded and touch [OK] to assign the media to the selected tray.

Result

NOTE To load media in a grayed-out paper tray, you can open the paper tray and load the media. You can use [Unassign] for example to prevent unnecessary printing on expensive media. You cannot use [Unassign] if the paper tray is in use. If the image on the media loaded is incorrectly aligned, it is best to perform media

registration. Refer to Perform a media registration on page 156.

Load the media using the [ Trays ] view

102 Chapter 7 - Media handling

Introduction to the media handling

Introduction

The machine supports a wide range of media, including tabs and inserts.

This section describes the following: Media handling in general The [Media catalog] Temporary media.

General introduction to the media handling

All the print jobs require media that you can assign to the paper trays via the operator panel. The print jobs can require media that are included in the [Media catalog]. However, the print jobs can also require media that are not included in the [Media catalog]. These media become temporary media on the system.

What is the media catalog

The media catalog is a list of predefined media and media attributes which you can define on the control panel if enabled or in the Settings Editor.

The operator panel, the printer drivers and other applications all display the same list of predefined media. The operator panel and the printer driver automatically retrieve and display the latest version of the media catalog.

What are temporary media

You can also use many other media that are not included in the [Media catalog]. These media become temporary media. You can look up the currently used temporary media in the [Media] section of the [System] view. Furthermore, you can assign the temporary media to a paper tray.

The temporary media remain available on the system until: No more waiting jobs need this media type No more scheduled jobs need this media type No more printed jobs need this media type This media type is no longer available in the paper trays.

When you plan to use these media more often, you can add these temporary media to the [Media catalog].

Introduction to the media handling

Chapter 7 - Media handling 103

Add media to the media catalog The print system uses a central media catalog from which you can select media for jobs. Correctly defined media attributes are important in order to ensure high print quality.

When enabled in the Settings Editor, you can add new media to the media catalog via the control panel. You can also define whether you want media family calibration warnings and warnings on missing media attributes on the control panel.

It is also possible to import another media from the media library.

IMPORTANT When you use the Settings Editor to import a media catalog from another PRISMAsync controller with a software version lower than 4.1, you must at least check if the following media attributes are correctly defined: Media family Surface type

[46] Media management via the control panel

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Media]. 2. Use one of the following methods to add new media.

Copy attributes from an existing media to the new media: select the media and touch [Copy]. Start with defining all attributes for the new media: touch [New]. Import a media: touch [New] ->[Import from media library].

3. Fill out the media attributes.

Add media to the media catalog

104 Chapter 7 - Media handling

NOTE For optimal print quality, you must define the correct values for the following media attributes: Size Weight Surface type The media family that corresponds to the surface type

Only create a new media family for specific media that differs significantly from the media in the available media families. Maintain the Media families on page 55 (See )

4. Touch [OK].

Add media to the media catalog

Chapter 7 - Media handling 105

Add temporary media to the media catalog You can print on media that are not part of the media catalog. In the printer driver and PRISMAprepare you specify that the job uses temporary media and define that temporary media. You can add this temporary media to the media catalog in the System view of the control panel. This is useful if you are using the temporary media more often.

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Media]. 2. Select one or more temporary media. 3. Touch the drop-down icon ( ). 4. Select [To catalog] from the drop-down menu. 5. Fill out the media attributes. 6. Touch [OK].

Add temporary media to the media catalog

106 Chapter 7 - Media handling

Handle media

Load the media into the paper tray

Introduction

This section describes how to load the media into a paper tray.

When you load the media via the [Load] button in the [Schedule], the media is automatically assigned to the correct tray.

When you load and assign the media via the [Assign] button in the [ Trays ] view, you must assign the loaded media to the corresponding paper tray manually.

CAUTION The lifter inside the paper trays rises and descends automatically. When loading paper, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

IMPORTANT Do not lift up the lifter inside the paper trays while the main power is ON, as this may result in a malfunction or damage to the machine. If you need to lift up the lifter, for example, if you drop objects, turn OFF the main power with the paper trays open. See Turn off the system on page 45.

NOTE The following paper sizes can be loaded into right/left paper trays. 330.2 mm x 482.6 mm, 320 mm x 450 mm (SRA3), 304.8 mm x 457.2 mm, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,

B5R, and irregular sizes (182 mm x 182 mm to 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm) 13" x 19", 12.60" x 17.72", 12" x 18", 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, EXEC, and irregular size (7 1/8"

x 7 1/8" to 13" x 19 13/64")

CAUTION When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.

Handle media

Chapter 7 - Media handling 107

IMPORTANT Never place paper or any other items in the empty part of the deck next to the paper stack.

Doing so may cause paper jams. A paper blower is attached inside of the paper tray. Do not insert paper clips or other foreign

objects into the blower port. A screen prompting you to load paper also appears if the selected paper tray is not fully

inserted into the machine. Make sure that the paper tray is properly in place. You can load nonstandard paper if both of the sides are between 182 mm and 487.7 mm in

length, and between 182 mm and 330.2 mm in width. You cannot load nonstandard paper if either one of the sides is shorter than 182 mm and longer than 487.7 mm in length, or longer than 330.2 mm in width.

You can load nonstandard paper if both of the sides are between 7 1/8" and 19 13/64" in length, and between 7 1/8" and 13" in width. You cannot load nonstandard paper if either one of the sides is shorter than 7 1/8" and longer than 19 13/64" in length, or longer than 13" in width

Do not load the following types of paper into the paper trays. Doing so may cause a paper jam. - Severely curled or wrinkled paper - Thin straw paper - Heavy paper (more than 325 g/m / 86 lb bond) - Thin paper (less than 60 g/m / 16 lb bond) - Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not print on the reverse side of this paper either.)

Fan the stack of paper well before loading it, and align the edges of the paper stack on a flat surface.

NOTE When changing the paper to load into the paper tray from plain paper to coated paper, you may wait a moment because temperature control of the warm air which fans a paper is required.

When to do

The [Schedule] displays a red bar next to a required media. The red bar indicates that a scheduled job now requires a media that is not available in the paper trays.

The [Schedule] displays an orange bar next to a required media. The orange bar indicates that a scheduled job requires media which is either not available in the paper trays or which is available, but not in sufficient quantity to finish the job.

The current job requires more of the same media than is currently loaded in the paper trays. You can add more of the required media into another paper tray.

You already want to load and assign media that are required for the next job (work ahead).

Procedure

1. Press the button on the paper tray in which you want to load the paper.

Load the media into the paper tray

108 Chapter 7 - Media handling

IMPORTANT If the printer is in the sleep mode, you may not be able to open the paper tray even if you press the open button. In this case, press the Sleep button at the operator panel to reactivate the machine, and then press the open button.

2. Grip the handle, and pull out the paper tray until it stops. The inside lifter automatically descends to the paper loading position.

3. Open the package of paper, and remove the paper stack.

Before loading paper, always fan the sheets several times, and align the edges to facilitate feeding.

CAUTION When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.

IMPORTANT Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package, and store it in a dry place, away from direct sunlight.

Load the media into the paper tray

Chapter 7 - Media handling 109

NOTE Before loading paper, always fan the sheets several times, and align the edges to facilitate feeding. Also, you should always fan paper that has just been removed from a newly opened paper package.

4. Make sure that the inside lifter has lowered before loading paper, and lift the paper holder plate of the rear guide.

5. Load the paper stack into the paper tray. When loading paper into the paper tray for the first time, set the size change plate to match the paper size being loaded. See reference below. When loading paper into the paper tray, make sure that the paper size setting is the same size of the paper that is being loaded.

IMPORTANT Do not subject the paper holder plate to shock when loading paper into the paper tray, as this may result in a malfunction or damage to the machine.

Load the media into the paper tray

110 Chapter 7 - Media handling

IMPORTANT Do not load paper into the paper tray that has been previously printed onto, as this may result

in a malfunction or damage to the copier. Always use the special feeder to feed paper when you want to print onto the back of a sheet of paper that already has something printed on its front side (2nd side of 2-Sided print).

Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use. Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark at the

back of the paper tray.

NOTE Each paper tray holds approximately 1,000 sheets of paper (80 g/m / 22 lb bond). If there are instructions on the package of paper about which side of the paper to load, follow

those instructions. When the paper is loaded into the paper tray, the side facing down is the one printed on. If problems occur, such as poor print quality or paper jams, try turning the paper stack over,

and reload it. However, you cannot turn the texture paper and 1-Sided Coated paper over. Change the new paper.

6. Lower the paper holder plate.

7. Gently push the paper tray back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position. The inside lifter automatically rises, and prepares the paper tray for printing.

CAUTION When closing the paper tray, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

IMPORTANT You will not be able to make copies or print if you load paper that exceeds the loading limit, or if the paper tray is not completely pushed into the machine. Always check that the paper trays are in place, and that the paper does not exceed the loading limit.

Load the media into the paper tray

Chapter 7 - Media handling 111

NOTE If paper runs out during copying or printing, load a new paper stack, and follow the instructions on the touch panel display. The machine automatically restarts, and produces the remaining copies or prints.

Load the media into the paper tray

112 Chapter 7 - Media handling

Adjust the paper tray to hold a different media size

Introduction

Before you can load media with a different media size, you must adjust the paper tray.

NOTE If the printer is in the sleep mode, you may not be able to open the paper tray even if you press the open button. In this case, press the Sleep button on the operator panel to reactivate the machine, and then press the open button.

Procedure

1. Press the button on the paper tray that you want to adjust, and pull out the paper tray until it stops. When the inside lifter automatically descends to the paper loading position, lift the paper holder plate and remove all of the remaining paper.

IMPORTANT If the printer is in the sleep mode, you may not be able to open the paper tray even if you press the open button. In this case, press the Sleep button on the operator panel to reactivate the machine, and then press the open button.

2. Unlock the lever of the size change plate.

Adjust the paper tray to hold a different media size

Chapter 7 - Media handling 113

3. Load the desired paper to approximately 10 mm / 3/8" in height. Slide the outer size change plate and inner size change plate to align them with the desired paper size.

IMPORTANT Do not subject the paper holder plate to shock when loading paper into the paper tray, as this may result in a malfunction or damage to the machine.

IMPORTANT Adjust the guides correctly to avoid causing a paper jam, dirty prints, or make the inside of the machine dirty.

4. Lock the lever of the size change plate and fix it.

5. Squeeze the lever on the outer size change plate below. Without releasing the lever, slide the rear guide to align it with the desired paper size.

Adjust the paper tray to hold a different media size

114 Chapter 7 - Media handling

6. Load all remaining paper whose size you want to change into the paper tray.

CAUTION When loading paper into the paper tray, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.

IMPORTANT Do not load paper into the paper tray that has been previously printed onto, as this may result

in a malfunction or damage to the copier. Always use the special feeder to feed paper when you want to print onto the back of a sheet of paper that already has something printed on its front side (2nd side of 2-Sided print).

Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out before loading it into the paper tray.

Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark on the inside of the paper tray.

Never place paper or any other items in the empty part of the paper tray next to the paper stack. Doing so may cause paper jams.

NOTE If there are instructions on the package of paper about which side of the paper to load, follow

those instructions. When paper is loaded into the paper tray, the side facing down is the one printed on. If problems occur, such as poor print quality or paper jams, try turning the paper stack over,

and reload it. However, you cannot turn the texture paper and 1-Sided Coated paper over. Change the new paper.

When loading paper, make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed 20 mm / 13/16". If the height of the paper stack exceeds 20 mm / 13/16", the edges of the paper stack may become curled or creased, and poor print quality may result.

7. Lower the paper holder plate.

8. Change the paper tray's size plate to match the new paper size.

Adjust the paper tray to hold a different media size

Chapter 7 - Media handling 115

9. Gently push the paper tray back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position. The inside lifter automatically rises, and prepares the paper tray for printing.

CAUTION When closing the paper tray, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

Adjust the paper tray to hold a different media size

116 Chapter 7 - Media handling

Load the media into the bulk media module (optional)

Introduction

This section describes how to load the media into the bulk media module.

When you load the media via the [Load] button in the [Schedule], the media is automatically assigned to the correct tray.

When you load and assign the media via the [Assign] button in the [Trays] view, you must assign the loaded media to the corresponding paper tray manually.

IMPORTANT If the printer is in the sleep mode, you may not be able to open the paper tray even if you press the open button. In this case, press the Sleep button of the operator panel to reactivate the machine, and then press the open button.

NOTE The following paper sizes can be loaded into the paper tray: 330.2 mm x 482.6 mm, 320 mm x 450 mm (SRA3), 304.8 mm x 457.2 mm, A3, B4, A4, A4R, and

B5 13" x 19", 12.60" x 17.72", 12" x 18", 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR

CAUTION When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.

IMPORTANT Never place paper or any other items in the empty part of the deck next to the paper stack.

Doing so may cause paper jams. A paper blower is attached inside of the paper tray. Do not insert paper clips or other foreign

objects into the blower port. Paper jams may occur if you load paper into the paper tray in a low humidity environment. If

paper jams occur, follow the instructions on the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. In addition, make sure that the loaded paper is not curled. Paper curls must be straightened out prior to loading.

A screen prompting you to load paper also appears if the selected paper tray is not fully inserted into the machine. Make sure that the paper tray is properly in place.

Do not load the following types of paper into the paper trays. Doing so may cause a paper jam. - Severely curled or wrinkled paper - Thin straw paper - Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not print on the reverse side of this paper either.) - Tab paper

Fan the stack of paper well before loading it, and align the edges of the paper stack on a flat surface.

The paper tray can only accommodate paper from 64 to 300 g/m / 18 lb bond to 110 lb bond in weight.

Load the media into the bulk media module (optional)

Chapter 7 - Media handling 117

NOTE If a message prompting you to load paper appears during printing, the remaining prints are

automatically made after you load the correct paper. If you select another paper source, the remaining prints are made after you press [OK].

When changing the paper to load into the paper tray from plain paper to coated paper, you may wait a moment because temperature control of the warm air which fans a paper is required.

When to do

The [Schedule] displays a red bar next to a required media. The red bar indicates that a scheduled job now requires a media that is not available in the paper trays.

The [Schedule] displays an orange bar next to a required media. The orange bar indicates that a scheduled job requires media which is either not available in the paper trays or which is available, but not in sufficient quantity to finish the job.

The current job requires more of the same media than is currently loaded in the paper trays. You can add more of the required media into another paper tray.

You already want to load and assign media that are required for the next job (work ahead).

Procedure

1. Press the open button to open the paper tray.

NOTE Hot air that is blown by the fan may warm the inner size change plate of the paper tray.

The inside lifter automatically descends to the paper loading position.

2. Open a package of paper, and remove the paper stack.

CAUTION When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.

Load the media into the bulk media module (optional)

118 Chapter 7 - Media handling

IMPORTANT Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package, and store it in a dry place, away from direct sunlight.

NOTE Before loading paper, always fan the sheets several times, and align the edges to facilitate feeding. Also, you should always fan paper that has just been removed from a newly opened paper package.

3. Lift the feeding support roller. Use of the paper tray with the feeding support roller detached, may cause paper jams.

IMPORTANT When loading paper, be sure to first lift the feeding support roller. If you load paper without

raising the feeding support roller, it may become detached, and paper may not be fed properly.

Use of the paper tray with the feeding support roller detached, may cause paper jams.

4. Load the paper stack into the paper tray. Make sure that the inside lifter has lowered before loading paper, even out the edges of the paper stack, and stack the paper neatly against the inner paper guide.

Load the media into the bulk media module (optional)

Chapter 7 - Media handling 119

IMPORTANT Do not load paper into the paper tray that has been previously printed onto, as this may result

in a malfunction or damage to the copier. Always use the special feeder to feed paper when you want to print onto the back of a sheet of paper that already has something copied on its front side (2nd side of 2- Sided print).

Use of the paper tray with the feeding support roller detached, may cause paper jams. Make sure that the size change plate is properly aligned with the marks of the desired paper

size. If the size change plate is not properly aligned, the paper tray may become damaged. Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out before loading it into the

paper tray. Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark on the

inside of the paper tray.

NOTE The paper trays hold approximately 3,500 sheets of paper (80 g/m / 22 lb bond). Only load the following sizes:

- 330.2 mm x 482.6 mm, 320 mm x 450 mm (SRA3), 304.8 mm x 457.2 mm, A3, B4, A4, A4R, and B5 paper into the paper tray. Other than A4 paper cannot be loaded horizontally. - 13" x 19", 12.60" x 17.72", 12" x 18", 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR paper into the paper deck. Only LTR paper can be loaded horizontally into the paper deck.

For more information on the size change plate, see Adjust the media size for the bulk media module (optional) on page 122

Hot air that is blown by the fan may warm the inner size change plate of the paper tray. If there are instructions on the package of paper about which side of the paper to load, follow

those instructions. When paper is loaded in the paper tray, the side facing up is the one printed on. If problems occur, such as poor print quality or paper jams, try turning the paper stack over,

and reload it. However, you cannot turn the texture paper and 1-sided coated paper over. Change the new paper.

5. Lower the feeding support roller.

6. Close the paper tray. The inside lifter automatically rises, and prepares the paper tray for printing.

Load the media into the bulk media module (optional)

120 Chapter 7 - Media handling

CAUTION When returning the paper tray to its original position, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

Load the media into the bulk media module (optional)

Chapter 7 - Media handling 121

Adjust the media size for the bulk media module (optional)

Introduction

This section explains how to change the paper size for the optional bulk media module.

IMPORTANT Never place paper or any other items in the empty part of the paper tray next to the paper stack. Doing so may cause paper jams.

Procedure

1. Press the open button to open the paper tray. The inside lifter automatically descends to the paper loading position.

IMPORTANT If the printer is in the sleep mode, you may not be able to open the paper tray even if you press the open button. In this case, press the Sleep button of the operator panel to reactivate the machine, and then press the open button.

2. Remove all of the loaded paper, the paper size sheet, and deck base plate.

3. Loosen the blue screw on the rear edge retainer using a coin or something similar.

4. Remove the rear edge retainer.

Adjust the media size for the bulk media module (optional)

122 Chapter 7 - Media handling

5. Remove the two blue screws on the outer size change plate using a coin or something similar.

IMPORTANT Do not loosen or remove any screw other than the two blue screws on the outer size change plate.

6. Lift up the outer size change plate.

7. Align the outer size change plate with the marks for the desired paper size that you want to load.

A4 RLGL/LTR R

B5/B4

A4/A3

12 / 5 8 17 / 11

16

320mm (SRA3)

450mm

330mm 13 19

483mm

11 17/LTR

305mm 12 18

457mm

Adjust the media size for the bulk media module (optional)

Chapter 7 - Media handling 123

IMPORTANT Make sure to align the size change plate properly with the marks for the desired paper size.

There are two marks for paper size at the top of the paper tray. Align the size change plate with the desired marks.

Make sure that the size change plate is properly aligned with the marks for the desired paper size. If the size change plate is not properly aligned, the paper tray may become damaged.

8. Fix the outer size change plate with the two blue screws using a coin or something similar, while slightly holding its center front portion and pressing it towards you. Fasten the left blue screw before fastening the right blue screw.

IMPORTANT If you fasten the blue screw without pressing the outer size change plate towards you, the plate may be fixed at an angle. If you use the paper tray with a tilted outer size change plate, paper may be fed as slanted, poor print quality may result, and paper jams may occur. Therefore, make sure to fasten the blue screw while pressing the outer size change plate towards you.

9. Align the rear edge retainer with the marks for the desired paper size.

A4

LTR

B5

IMPORTANT If the rear edge retainer is not aligned properly, paper may become jammed, the quality of the image may be degraded, or the inside of the main unit may become dirty. Be sure to load paper with the rear edge retainer properly aligned with the paper size marks on the top and base of the paper tray.

10. Fix the rear edge retainer with the blue screw using a coin or something similar.

Adjust the media size for the bulk media module (optional)

124 Chapter 7 - Media handling

IMPORTANT There are two screw holes for fastening the rear edge retainer. Make sure that the rear edge retainer is fastened properly, aligned with the marks for the desired paper size, to prevent it from being installed at an angle.

11. Remove the two blue screws on the inner size change plate using a coin or something similar.

12. Lift up the inner size change plate.

NOTE Hot air that is blown by the fan may warm the size change plate.

13. Align the inner size change plate with the marks for the desired paper size.

Adjust the media size for the bulk media module (optional)

Chapter 7 - Media handling 125

A3 A4

125/8 1711/16

11 17/LTR

12 18

320mm 450mm

305mm 457mm

13 19 330mm 483mm

(SRA3)

B4 B5

IMPORTANT Make sure to align the size change plate properly with the marks for the desired paper size.

There are two marks for paper size at the top of the paper tray. Align the size change plate with the desired marks.

Make sure that the size change plate is properly aligned with the marks for the desired paper size. If the size change plate is not properly aligned, the paper tray may become damaged.

14. Fix the inner size change plate with the two blue screws using a coin or something similar, while slightly holding its center front portion, and pressing it away from you.

IMPORTANT If you fasten the blue screw without pressing the inner size change plate away from you, the plate may be fixed at an angle. If you use the paper tray with a tilted inner size change plate, paper may be fed as slanted, poor print quality may result, and paper jams may occur. Therefore, make sure to fasten the blue screw while pressing the inner size change plate away from you.

15. Place the paper size sheet that matches the new paper size into the paper tray.

1

When not using the deck base plate, move the paper tray away from the main unit and hang the deck base plate on the hook that is on the left side of the paper tray.

Adjust the media size for the bulk media module (optional)

126 Chapter 7 - Media handling

IMPORTANT If you do not set the deck base plate (1), the edge of the paper may fall and paper jam may

occur. Be sure to set the deck base plate. Never place the deck base plate in the empty part of the paper tray. Doing so may lead to a

malfunction of the printer.

16. Set the size sheet matching the size of the paper that you want to load.

2

IMPORTANT If you place the paper directly on the lifter without setting the deck base plate, the loaded

paper may hang over the lifter, and paper jams may occur. Never place the deck base plate in the empty part of the paper tray. Doing so may lead to a

malfunction of the printer. Load the size sheet and make sure to set the size change plate and rear edge retainer properly

before loading paper into the paper tray. If the size change plate and rear edge retainer are not properly set, the paper tray may become damaged.

17. Load the paper stack into the paper tray, and then lower the feeding support roller.

Adjust the media size for the bulk media module (optional)

Chapter 7 - Media handling 127

CAUTION When loading paper into the paper tray, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.

IMPORTANT To load paper larger than B4, you have to first close the paper tray to raise the inside lifter,

then open the paper tray, and load the paper. If you load paper larger than B4 when the inside lifter is at its lowest position, the paper may not be loaded properly, and paper jams may occur.

Never place paper or any other items in the empty part of the paper tray. Doing so may lead to a malfunction of the copier.

NOTE When loading paper, make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed 20 mm / 13/16". If the height of the paper stack exceeds 20 mm / 13/16", the edges of the paper stack may become curled or creased, and poor print quality may result.

18. Place a magnet label indicating the new paper size on the paper tray.

19. Close the paper tray. The inside lifter automatically rises, and prepares the paper tray for printing.

CAUTION When closing the paper tray, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

Adjust the media size for the bulk media module (optional)

128 Chapter 7 - Media handling

Adjust the outer size change plate of the bulk paper module (optional)

Introduction

When using special types of paper, such as coated paper, the paper size may be slightly different from standard paper sizes, and this may cause problems. Adjusting the width between the size change plates can solve the following problems due to the paper size. If the paper size is larger than a standard paper size:

Paper jams may occur if the space between the size change plates and the paper is too narrow. Make the space between the size change plates and the paper wider.

If the paper size is smaller than a standard paper size: The entire printed area may be shifted vertically to the top or bottom, or may be slanted if the space between the size change plates and the paper is too wide. In this case, make the space between the size change plates and the paper narrower.

Illustration

1

234

[47] The direction of the paper transport (1) and the position of the image: slanted (2), shifted (3) and normal (4)

Procedure

1. Press the open button to open the paper tray.

2. Load a stack of paper into the paper tray, so that the height of the paper stack does not exceed 10 mm / 3/8".

Adjust the outer size change plate of the bulk paper module (optional)

Chapter 7 - Media handling 129

If you are using A4 paper, load a second stack of paper on the side of the first paper stack, so that the outer size change plate is not tilted.

IMPORTANT If you have loaded a second stack of paper for fine adjustment, make sure to remove it after adjusting the outer size change plate. Leaving the second stack of paper in the paper tray may lead to a paper tray malfunction.

3. Close the paper tray. Wait until the open button stops flashing.

4. Continue on the operator panel. Touch [System] -> [Maintenance]. Touch [Start maintenance]. Touch [Adjust paper tray plates]. Touch [Start] .

Wait until an information window pops up.

IMPORTANT Do NOT touch [OK] yet. Continue with the next step of this procedure.

5. Press the open button to open the paper tray.

Adjust the outer size change plate of the bulk paper module (optional)

130 Chapter 7 - Media handling

6. Remove the blue screw on the rear edge retainer (1) using a coin or something similar.

1

IMPORTANT Do not loosen or remove the blue screw on the outer size change plate.

7. Remove the rear edge retainer, then remove the spacer that is stored in the back of the rear edge retainer.

8. Loosen the two black adjustment screws on the outer size change plate using a coin or something similar.

9. Insert the spacer (horizontally) into the space between the paper and the outer size change plate.

Adjust the outer size change plate of the bulk paper module (optional)

Chapter 7 - Media handling 131

10. Fasten the black adjustment screw on the left using a coin or something similar while slightly pressing the outer size change plate against the paper stack.

11. Similarly, fasten the black adjustment screw on the right using a coin or something similar while slightly pressing the outer size change plate against the paper stack.

Make sure that the two black adjustment screws are fastened securely. 12. Remove the second stack of paper, such as A4 paper if you have loaded next to the first stack of

paper.

Adjust the outer size change plate of the bulk paper module (optional)

132 Chapter 7 - Media handling

IMPORTANT If you have loaded a second stack of paper for fine adjustment, make sure to remove it after adjusting the outer size change plate. Leaving the second stack of paper in the paper tray may lead to a paper tray malfunction.

13. Remove the spacer, and store it in the back of the rear edge retainer.

14. Align the rear edge retainer with the marks of the desired paper size.

15. When you have finished aligning the rear edge retainer with the marks for the desired paper size, fasten the rear edge retainer to the outer size change plate with the blue screw using a coin or something similar.

16. Make sure that the inside lifter has lowered, and load the remaining paper into the paper tray.

Adjust the outer size change plate of the bulk paper module (optional)

Chapter 7 - Media handling 133

NOTE When loading paper, make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed 20 mm / 13/16". If the height of the paper stack exceeds 20 mm / 13/16", the edges of the paper stack may become curled or creased, and poor print quality may result.

17. Close the paper tray.

CAUTION When returning the paper tray to its original position, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

18. At the operator panel, touch [OK] to close the information window. 19. Touch [Finish].

Adjust the outer size change plate of the bulk paper module (optional)

134 Chapter 7 - Media handling

Load the media into the special feeder (optional)

Introduction

You can use the special feeder to feed media manually.

IMPORTANT Note the following points when using the special feeder:

- Paper Quantity: one to approximately 100 sheets (80 g/m / 22 lb bond, stack approximately 11 mm / 3/8" high) - Paper Sizes: 330.2 mm x 482.6 mm, 320 mm x 450 mm (SRA3), 304.8 mm x 457.2 mm, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, and Irregular Size (139.7 mm x 182 mm to 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm) - Paper Sizes: 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, STMT, LTRR, EXEC, EXECR, STMTR and Irregular Size (5 31/64" x 7 1/8" to 13" x 19 13/64") - Paper Weight: 64 to 256 g/m / 18 lb bond to 68 lb bond - Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use, to allow the paper to feed smoothly through the special feeder (allowable curl amount: less than 10 mm / 3/8" for normal paper, less than 5 mm / 1/5" for heavy paper). There are some types of paper stock which may meet the above specifications, but cannot be fed into the special feeder.

Do not load different size/type paper at the same time. Feed coated paper one sheet at a time. Loading several sheets together may cause paper

jams. Depending on the type of heavy paper you want to load, if you load multiple sheets of heavy

paper into the special feeder, a paper jam may occur. In this case, load only one sheet of heavy paper at a time.

If you are making two-sided prints, the printed paper may crease depending on the moisture absorption condition of the paper, and if you copy the two pages as two one-sided documents.

When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the Fixing Station may become dirty and require a service repair, or the paper could jam.

NOTE Standard Size

You can select standard inch paper, or A or B series paper. Customer size

You can load nonstandard paper sizes: Metric units: 139.7 mm x 182 mm to 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm. Imperial units: 5 31/64" x 7 1/8" to 13" x 19 13/64" If you are using STMT paper, load the paper horizontally.

Procedure

1. Open the special feeder.

Load the media into the special feeder (optional)

Chapter 7 - Media handling 135

2. Adjust the slide guides (1) to match the size of the paper.

1

If you are feeding large size paper, pull out the auxiliary tray (2).

2

3. Load the paper into the special feeder. Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark.

Straighten out curled paper prior to use, as shown below. Curled paper may cause a paper jam.

Load the media into the special feeder (optional)

136 Chapter 7 - Media handling

To copy/print on the back side of preprinted paper, load the preprinted paper face up into the special feeder, as shown in the illustration below.

1

[48] The feeding direction (1)

IMPORTANT When loading paper into the special feeder, align the paper stack neatly between the slide guides. If the paper is not loaded correctly, a paper jam may occur.

NOTE If there are instructions on the paper package about which side of the paper to load, follow

those instructions. When the paper is loaded into the special feeder, the side facing up is the one printed on. If problems, such as poor print quality or paper jams occur, try turning the paper stack over

and reload it.

Load the media into the special feeder (optional)

Chapter 7 - Media handling 137

Load tabs via the tab feeder (optional)

Introduction

Before you install the tab feeder, check the paper size of the tab feeder.

IMPORTANT You cannot use A4 tab paper whose tab width is 13.5 mm / 35/64"or less, measured from the edge.

13.5 mm

IMPORTANT Make sure that you fan the sheets of tab paper well before placing them.

You can only load A4 or Letter tab paper to the tab feeder. Before you install the tab feeder you must check the paper size of the tab feeder. If required, change the paper size of the tab feeder. See Adjust the media size of the tab feeder (optional) on page 144

NOTE The following types of tab paper are available.

4

3

2

1

1

2

3

4

1 2

Right order tab (1) Reverse order tab (2)

How to load the tab paper depends on the situation. 1. You want to print on the tab paper. 2. You want to print on the tab paper and insert the tab as a chapter page. 3. You want to insert a printed tab as a chapter page.

The following tables show how to load the tab per situation and output destination.

Load tabs via the tab feeder (optional)

138 Chapter 7 - Media handling

Situation 1: you want to print on the tab paper

Destination How to load tab paper Result

[Stacker/stapler]

Reverse order tab, face down, and tabs to the left.

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

Reverse (1)

[Stacker]

Right order tab, face down, and tabs to the left.

1

2

3

4

Situation 2: you want to print on the tab paper and insert the tab as a chapter page

Destination How to load tab paper Result

[Stacker/stapler]

Reverse order tab, face down, and tabs to the left.

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

[Stacker]

Right order tab, face down, and tabs to the left.

4

3

2

1

Situation 3: you want to insert a printed tab as a chapter page.

Destination How to load tab paper Result

[Stacker/stapler]

Reverse order tab, face down, and tabs to the left.

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

Load tabs via the tab feeder (optional)

Chapter 7 - Media handling 139

Destination How to load tab paper Result

[Stacker]

Right order tab, face down, and tabs to the left.

4

3

2

1

[Stacker]

Right order tab, face up and upside down, and tabs to the left.

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

IMPORTANT If the printer is in the sleep mode, you may not be able to open the paper tray even if you press the open button. In this case, press the Sleep button of the operator panel to reactivate the machine, and then press the open button.

Procedure

1. Press and release the button on the paper tray in which you want to load tab paper, and pull out the paper tray until it stops. When the inside lifter automatically descends to the paper loading position, lift the paper holder plate, and remove all of the remaining paper.

2. Squeeze the lever on the rear guide as shown below, and slide the rear guide to the left as far as it will go.

Load tabs via the tab feeder (optional)

140 Chapter 7 - Media handling

3. Unlock the lever of the size change plate.

4. Slide the outer size change plate and the inner size change plate to the left as far as they will go.

5. Embed the location fix frame, located on the back side of the tab feeder, to the hole of the lifter.

IMPORTANT Embed the location fix frame in the hole of the lifter properly to prevent a paper jam or the paper tray from being damaged. Check that the tab feeder is installed properly from its hole on the top.

6. Load approximately 10 sheets of tab paper while lifting up the tab of the paper holder.

Load tabs via the tab feeder (optional)

Chapter 7 - Media handling 141

7. Adjust the outer size change plate and the inner size change plate to align completely with the tab feeder.

8. Lock the lever of the size change plate and fix it.

9. Load all remaining tab paper while lifting up the tab of the paper holder.

IMPORTANT Hold the tab paper by hand to avoid lifting the paper holder after loading the tab paper.

Load tabs via the tab feeder (optional)

142 Chapter 7 - Media handling

IMPORTANT Keep the rear guide on the left of the paper tray. Do not approach the rear guide to the tab

feeder. If the tab paper is curled, image blurring may occur. In this case, straighten out the curled

paper, and reload it. Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark at the

back of the paper tray.

10. Gently push the paper tray back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position.

CAUTION When returning the paper tray to its original position, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

IMPORTANT Never place paper or any other items in the open part of the paper tray next to the paper stack. Doing so may cause a paper jam or damage the paper tray.

Load tabs via the tab feeder (optional)

Chapter 7 - Media handling 143

Adjust the media size of the tab feeder (optional)

Procedure

1. Place the tab feeder on the stable stand.

IMPORTANT If the printer is in the sleep mode, you may not be able to open the paper tray even if you press the open button. In this case, press the Sleep button of the operator panel to reactivate the machine, and then press the open button.

2. Hold the tab feeder in its upright position, as shown below.

3. Loosen the two blue paper size change screws.

4. Align the mark with A4, as shown below.

Adjust the media size of the tab feeder (optional)

144 Chapter 7 - Media handling

IMPORTANT Do not touch the Paper Size Change Unit except for the case that you adjust the mark. If you hold the Paper Size Change Unit to lift the tab feeding attachment, the screws become loose, and a paper jam may occur.

5. Fix the paper holder with the two blue paper size change screws.

IMPORTANT When fastening the screws, be sure to confirm that the screws are tightened properly in the oxbow groove.

Adjust the media size of the tab feeder (optional)

Chapter 7 - Media handling 145

Load the required media into the selected tray.

Introduction

The inserter is needed to load inserts and covers for booklets. The following table shows the effect of the cover position, original position and the staple settings on the output.

Cover and original position Staple set tings

Output

Inserter Automatic Document Feeder

Glass plate

ABC

*1

ABC ABC

[1 staple] - [Top left]

[2 staples] - [Left edge]

ABC ABC

A4, B5

A B

C

*2

A B

C

A B C

[1 staple] - [Bottom left]

[2 staples] - [Left edge]

ABC ABC

A3, B4

A B

C

A B C

[1 staple] - [Top right]

[2 staples] - [Right edge]

A B

C

*1

A B

C

A B C

[1 staple] - [Top left]

[2 staples] - [Left edge]

A4, B5

ABC ABC

A B

C

A B C

[1 staple] - [Top right]

[2 staples] - [Right edge]

ABC

*2

ABC ABC

[1 staple] - [Top left]

[2 staples] - [Left edge]

ABC ABC

A3, B4

ABC ABC

[1 staple] - [Top right]

[2 staples] - [Right edge] A4, B5

ABC ABC

4

Load the required media into the selected tray.

146 Chapter 7 - Media handling

Cover and original position Staple set tings

Output

Inserter Automatic Document Feeder

Glass plate

A B

C

*2

A B

C

A B C

[1 staple] - [Top left]

A3, B4

ABC

A B

C

A B C

[1 staple] - [Bottom right]

A B

C

*1

A B

C

A B C

[1 staple] - [Top left]

A4, B5

ABC

A B

C

A B C

[1 staple] - [Bottom right]

ABC ABC

[1 staple] - [Top right]

[2 staples] - [Right edge]

A3, B4

ABC ABC

*1

ABC ABC

[Saddle stitch- ing]

ABC

*1 Paper can be loaded into both the upper and lower trays. Load the paper facing the same side for both the upper and lower trays.

*2 Paper can be loaded only into the lower tray.

Procedure

1. Adjust the slide guides to fit the paper size.

Load the required media into the selected tray.

Chapter 7 - Media handling 147

[49] Upper tray

[50] Lower tray

2. Open a package of paper, and remove the paper stack.

CAUTION When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.

IMPORTANT Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package, and store it in a dry place, away from direct sunlight

NOTE Before loading paper, always fan the sheets several times, and align the edges to facilitate feeding.

Load the required media into the selected tray.

148 Chapter 7 - Media handling

3. Load the paper stack face up into the inserter.

A B

C

[51] Face up in the upper tray

IMPORTANT Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark at the back of the paper supply tray.

NOTE Only load paper for use as a cover. You cannot make copies or prints on paper that is loaded in the inserter. Supported media sizes for the upper tray:

- A4, A4R, B5, B5R, or irregular size 182 mm x 182 mm to 297 mm x 330.2 mm - LTR, LTRR, EXEC or irregular size 7 1/8" x 7 1/8" to 11 11/16 " x 13"

Supported media sizes for the lower tray: - 330.2 mm x 482.6 mm, 320 mm x 450 mm (SRA3), 304.8 mm x 457.2 mm, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R or irregular size 182 mm x 182 mm to 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm - 13" x 19", 12.60" x 17.72", 12" x 18", 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, EXEC or irregular size 7 1/8" x 7 1/8" to 13" x 19 13/64"

A maximum of 200 sheets of paper (80 g/m / 22 lb bond) can be loaded in the upper tray of the inserter.

A maximum of 200 sheets of paper (80 g/m / 22 lb bond) can be loaded in the lower tray of the inserter.

Load the required media into the selected tray.

Chapter 7 - Media handling 149

[52] Face up in the lower tray, face down for saddle stitching

NOTE When loading paper into the lower tray, pulling up the upper tray makes it easier to access the lower tray.

1

IMPORTANT Make sure that the media size in your job is the same as the media loaded in the inserter. When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper, be sure to correctly set the

paper type. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing assembly may become dirty and require a service repair, or the paper could jam.

Load the required media into the selected tray.

150 Chapter 7 - Media handling

Check the status of the punch waste box

Introduction

You can check the status of the punch waste box in the [System] view.

Procedure

1. On the operator panel, touch the button for the [System] view. 2. Press [Printer].

The status of the punch waste box displays at the right-hand side of the operator panel.

Related information

The dashboard on page 74 The main unit on page 19

Check the status of the punch waste box

Chapter 7 - Media handling 151

Removing the punch waste

Introduction

This section describes how to remove the punch waste

IMPORTANT Take care when handling the optional equipment that is attached to the machine. When an optional unit's cover is opened to replace a staple cartridge, discard punch waste, or clear paper or staple jams, prints may still be output if other optional units are operating normally, and are not involved in the paper or staple jam removal procedure

NOTE This procedure is necessary only if the optional Puncher Unit-BB1 is attached to the optional Finisher-AJ1 or Saddle Finisher-AJ2.

Procedure

1. Open the front cover of the finisher.

2. Pull out the punch waste tray.

3. Discard the punch waste into a receptacle.

Removing the punch waste

152 Chapter 7 - Media handling

NOTE Make sure that the punch waste tray is completely emptied.

4. Return the punch waste tray to its original position. Make sure to insert the punch waste tray as far as it can go.

NOTE If the punch waste tray is not securely in place, you cannot make copies or prints in the Hole Punch mode.

5. Close the front cover of the finisher.

CAUTION When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

Removing the punch waste

Chapter 7 - Media handling 153

Handle paper jams When a paper jam occurs, follow the instructions on the operator panel.

IMPORTANT Make sure you follow the instructions precisely in the correct order to avoid unnecessary service calls.

Handle paper jams

154 Chapter 7 - Media handling

Correct curled output media Media can arrive curled in the output tray. This is caused by temperature differences during the print process. You can perform a correction procedure to prevent curled sheets in the output trays. The results of the correction are immediately effective for jobs that use these media.

For media that need a curl correction on the length and width, create two different entrances in the media catalog. The correction procedure changes the media attributes in the media catalog, so that the adjustments are applied to all jobs that use the same media. You can find the correction values in the system adjustment settings of the Settings Editor (Preferences tab).

You can correct curled output media via the Trays view, System view, or via the media used in a job. The procedure below describes the correction via the System view.

Before you begin

Make sure that all media attributes are correct in the media catalog.

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Media]. 2. Select the media from the media catalog. 3. Touch [Optimize] -> [Curl correction]. 4. Define the correction factor with the + and - buttons.

Start with small increments to avoid paper jams.

5. Touch [OK].

Correct curled output media

Chapter 7 - Media handling 155

Perform a media registration The media properties influence the alignment of the images on the printed output. To ensure the alignment is correct, perform a media registration for the media of the media catalog.

You can shift the image manually, or start the registration wizard. The registration wizard includes a registration chart print for analysis.

For new media, use the media registration wizard.

You can perform a media registration via the Trays view, System view, or via the media used in a job. The procedure below describes the media registration via the System view.

The media registration procedure changes the media attributes in the media catalog, so that the adjustments are applied to all jobs that use the media.

[53] The media registration options

Before you begin

Check if the image on the printed output is skewed. Then, first perform a skewed image correction. Correct skewed and rotated images on page 158 (See )

Required tools

Ruler

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Media]. 2. Select the media from the media catalog. 3. Touch [Optimize] -> [Registration]. 4. Make your adjustments manually or start the registration wizard. 5. Follow the instructions of the wizard.

Perform a media registration

156 Chapter 7 - Media handling

6. Close the menu.

Perform a media registration

Chapter 7 - Media handling 157

Correct skewed and rotated images When images on the printed output are skewed or slightly rotated, perform a correction procedure.

You are advised to use media with the maximum supported size for this correction. The correction procedure changes the media attributes in the media catalog, so that the adjustments are applied to all jobs that use the same media.

You can correct skewed and rotated images via the Trays view, System view, or via the media used in a job. The procedure below describes the correction via the System view.

Required tools

Ruler

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Media]. 2. Select the media from the media catalog. 3. Touch [Optimize] -> [Skew correction]. 4. Enter your maintenance PIN. 5. Follow the instructions on the control panel.

Correct skewed and rotated images

158 Chapter 7 - Media handling

Chapter 8 Carry out print jobs

General information

Introduction to the print function

Introduction

Print jobs can be sent from the following locations. The printer driver. PRISMAprepare. From a USB drive. From a hotfolder. Via a printer protocol

Depending on the workflow settings, the print job will appear in one of the following destinations. List of [Waiting jobs] List of [Scheduled jobs]

The list of [Printed jobs] can store jobs temporarily.

The [Schedule] view enables you to plan your daily print jobs.

The [Jobs] view enables you to manage the print jobs in the different queues.

Introduction to the print function

[54] The scheduled jobs and waiting jobs in the jobs view

General information

160 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Description of the print job settings

Introduction

With the [Properties] button you view and partly change the job settings of the jobs in the following queues. [Waiting jobs] [Scheduled jobs]

You cannot change the settings of an active job. [Printed jobs] (view settings only)

You can partly define the following settings for the jobs in the list of [Waiting jobs] and the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The characteristics of the output Generic settings that apply to the whole job.

Illustration

1

2

3

4

5

[55] The job properties

Number Pane Description

1 [Original] The [Original] pane shows the general job settings you can define for the originals

2 [Output] The [Output] pane shows the generic settings you can define for the whole job

3 [Jobs] The [Jobs] pane shows the settings you can define for the job 4

Description of the print job settings

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 161

Number Pane Description

4 Preview The preview displays the settings you defined for the output.

5 Action buttons The action buttons indicate the actions you can car- ry out. With the optional [Page programming] function, you can insert pages and define the media and fin- ishing settings for the page ranges in a job.

Settings for the output

Setting Values Description

[1- or 2-sided] [1-sided]

The output contains an image on 1 side.

[2-sided]

The output contains an image on both sides.

[Binding edge] [Portrait left]

The output has a vertical format (height > width). The binding edge is at the left-hand side. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image is in readable form.

[Portrait top]

The output has a vertical format (height > width). The binding edge of the original is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image on the back side of the sheet is in readable form. This means that every back side of a 2-sided original is upside down compared to the front side.

[Landscape left]

The output has a horizontal format (width > height). The binding edge of the original is at the left-hand side. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the text or im- age is in readable form.

[Landscape top]

The output has a horizontal format (width > height). The binding edge of the original is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image on the back side of the sheet is in readable form. This means that every back side of a 2-sided original is upside down compared to the front side.

[Media]

Names of the media in the media catalog

Here you can view the media for the job. The list displays all the media that are available in the media catalog including the temporary media. The media catalog is a list of media that you can define in the Settings Editor. 4

Description of the print job settings

162 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Setting Values Description

[Cover] [Front]

Here you can indicate that the print job requires a front cov- er. When the setting is enabled the corresponding setting [Media] becomes enabled.

[Media] When the setting [Front] is enabled, you can select a media from the media catalog.

[Print sides] Here you can select the sides of the front cover you want to print on. [Both sides] [Front side] [Back side] [None]

[Back]

Here you can indicate that the print job requires a back cov- er. When the setting is enabled the corresponding setting [Media] becomes enabled.

[Media] When the setting [Back] is enabled, you can select a media from the media catalog.

[Print sides] Here you can select the sides of the back cover you want to print on. [Both sides] [Front side] [Back side] [None]

[Layout] [Normal]

The machine prints the pages with no special layout set- tings.

[Booklet]

The machine prints the pages in booklet order. The pages 1 and 4 are printed on the front side of a sheet. The pages 2 and 3 are printed on the back side of a sheet.

[Same up]

The machine prints the same image multiple times next to each other. By default, the system keeps the size of the origi- nals. When you print A4 originals with the setting [Same up] and [Images per sheet] is 2, the machine will automatically print the job on A3, for example. When you cut the A3 sheets in two, you get 2 identical A4 copies of your document. To de- crease your A4 originals to A5 prints, you can use the zoom function or select another media type.

[Multiple up]

The machine prints multiple consecutive images on 1 side of a sheet, next to each other.

[Images per sheet]

Here you can select the number of images you want to print when you select [Same up] and [Same-up flipped]. 4

Description of the print job settings

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 163

Setting Values Description

[Zoom]

[Fit to page] You can select a media size for the output that differs from the media size of the original. When the [Fit to page] setting is enabled, the system scales the original in such a way that the image fits on the selected media size of the output.

[Percent] Use this setting to change the zoom manually within the range 25% to 400%.

[Align] [Top left]

An image on a sheet may be smaller than the media size of the output, for example because you scaled the image to 70% of its original size. The [Align] setting allows you to in- dicate the position of the image on the sheet. [Top left] moves the image to the upper left corner of the sheet.

[Top center]

[Top center] moves the image to the center at the top of the sheet.

[Top right]

[Top right] moves the image to the upper right corner of the sheet.

[Center left]

[Center left] moves the image to center of the left side of the sheet.

[Center]

[Center] moves the image to the center of the sheet.

[Center right]

[Center right] moves the image to the center of the right side of the sheet.

[Bottom left]

[Bottom left] moves the image to the lower left corner of the sheet.

[Bottom center]

[Bottom center] moves the image to the center of the bottom side of the sheet.

[Bottom right]

[Bottom right] moves the image to the lower right corner of the sheet.

4

Description of the print job settings

164 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Setting Values Description

[Shift]

[Margin shift] Use this setting to increase or decrease the margin. By de- fault, the values of the front side and the back side are inter- locked. This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical. If you want to define a different value for each side, press . The icon changes to the unlocked status. Now you can de- fine the values for the front side and the back side separate- ly.

[Image shift] Use this setting to shift the image horizontally or vertically. By default, the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked. This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical. If you want to define a different value for each side, press . The icon changes to the unlocked status. Now you can de- fine the values for the front side and the back side separate- ly. 4

Description of the print job settings

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 165

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery]

[Output loca- tion]

Select the output location for the print job. Depending on the settings for your print job, the machine automatically sug- gests the preferred output location for your job. However, you can manually overrule this suggestion.

[Sort]

[By page] The output is sorted by page.

[By set] The output is sorted by set.

[Offset stack- ing]

[Each set] Each set that gets to an output location will be shifted on top of the previous set. This setting is only available when in the workflow profile offset stacking is set to [Sets (as in job)].

[Off] All the sets or jobs that get to an output location will be stacked in one straight pile.

[Advanced set- tings] -> [Sheet order]

[Face up] Deliver the prints face up, first sheet on top.

[Face up reverse] Deliver the prints face up, last sheet on top.

[Face down] Deliver the prints face down, first sheet on top.

[Face down reverse] Deliver the prints face down, last sheet on top. 4

Description of the print job settings

166 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery]

[Advanced set- tings] -> [Sheet orientation]

[Header up LEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in portrait position (vertical).

[Header up SEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in land- scape position (horizontal).

[Header down LEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bottom side and in portrait position (vertical).

[Header down SEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bottom side and in landscape position (horizontal).

[Advanced set- tings] -> [Print order]

[Front/back] Default value. The front page on the front, the back page on the back.

[Back/front] Puts the front page on the back and the back page on the front.

[Advanced set- tings] -> [Rota- tion]

[0 degrees] [180 degrees]

Rotates the prints 180 degrees.

[Margin erase]

Margins of a document sometimes contain notes or punch holes, for example. The machine allows you to hide these el- ements on the print. With the + and - buttons of the [Margin erase] setting you can define how much margin of the origi- nal you want to erase. You can enter a value up to 100 mm / 3.94".

[Adjust image]

[Basic mode] In the [Basic mode], you can adjust the calibrated CMYK curves by color. You can adjust the density when you select all colors at once. Furthermore, you can adjust the contrast.

[Advanced mode]

In the [Advanced mode], you can adjust the calibrated CMYK curves by color with three control points. Furthermore, you can clip color ranges in the lower and upper areas of the calibrated CMYK curve. You can achieve background com- pression when you clip colors in the lower area of the cali- brated CMYK curve. 4

Description of the print job settings

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 167

Setting Values Description

[Color/Black & white] [Black and

white]

Here you can view if the job is printed in [Color] or in [Black and white]. If using color, the following options are available for jobs. [Color bar] and [Information bar].

The color and information bars are defined at the Settings Editor. For both bars you can indicate the location and alignment. Be aware that if you select the same location for both the color and information bar, the color bar will cover the information bar.

[Trapping]. With trapping, you can reduce unwanted white gaps be- tween color planes. Note that an edge can appear at loca- tions where the color planes overlap. Define custom trap- ping presets at [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Trap- ping presets editor].

[Color]

[Punching]

[None]

[2 holes]

[3 holes]

[4 holes]

[Die set de- pendent]

Here you can define the amount and location of the punch holes.

Location [Left] [Top] [Right] [Bottom]

[Folding] Here you can define the folding method for the prints. Fur- thermore you can define on what side to print with the [Print method] option: [Print inside] [Print outside]

Check the preview for the result of the selection. 4

Description of the print job settings

168 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Setting Values Description

[Binding] [None]

[1 staple]

[2 staples]

[Saddle stitch- ing]

[Saddle press- ing]

Here you can define the required number of staples. Further- more you can define where you want the staples with the [Location] option. The available locations for the 1 staple option: [Top left] [Top right] [Bottom left] [Bottom right]

The available locations for the 2 staples option: [Left edge] [Top edge] [Bottom edge] [Right edge]

Check the preview for the result of the selection.

[Trimming] [None]

[Trim size]

Trims the long edge, top edge and bottom edge according to the specified values. The minimum trim size is 2 mm / 0.02".

[Finishing size]

Trims the prints to a selected default size, for example A4, A5 etc. You can also define a custom size.

Settings for the whole job

Setting Values Description

[Job type] [Normal] [Variable data]

Use this setting when you want to change the job into a vari- able data job.

[Job name] Displays the job name of the print job. You can change the job name of a print job.

[Number of sets]

Use this setting to define the number of copies. You can en- ter a value from 1 - 65,000. The default value is 1.

[Page range] Displays the pages to print. When [All] is selected, all pages of the job will be printed. When you touch the [Page range] button a keyboard appears. You can define the page range you want to print. 4

Description of the print job settings

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 169

Setting Values Description

[Separator sheets]

[On] When the Separator sheets setting is enabled, a separate sheet will be inserted automatically before each set of a job to create a clear distinction between two sets. Separator sheets are always empty. In the Settings Editor, you can se- lect a media from the Media catalog to be used as separator sheets. There you can also indicate the feed direction of the separator sheets (long-edge feed or short-edge feed).

[Off] No separator sheet will be inserted before each set.

Description of the print job settings

170 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Contradiction handling Be aware that if you change settings you might make contradicting settings. If you make contradicting settings, the preview pane informs you how to solve the contradictions.

The contradicting settings are marked. The system indicates, with a green check mark, which setting you need to change to resolve the contradiction. However, if required, you can change the other marked settings to resolve the contradiction.

Contradiction handling

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 171

Work with variable data in document printing mode Variable data printing is used for direct marketing, advertising, and personalized letters. PRISMAprepare and document authoring tools allow you to build personalized documents. Variable data, for example names and addresses, are merged with fixed elements and saved as multi-record documents. Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare on page 66 (See )

NR. NAME ADDRESS IMAGE

1 Jeff GB 12345 London IMG 12

2 Olaf NO 34567 Oslo IMG 34

3 Mieke NL 56789 Amsterdam IMG 56

4 Gina IT 45678 Rome IMG 78

5 Ulli DE 23456 Berlin IMG 90

[IMG]

[ADDRESS]

[NAME] NO 34567

Oslo

Olaf

IT 45678

Rome

Gina

[56] Creation of personalized documents

PRISMAsync supports several PPML formats and the PDF/VT format for variable data printing (See Specifications on page 384)

Also manually created VDP jobs are supported. When PRISMAsync receives a variable data print job, it distinguishes the record structure. Records are treated as print sets.

Submit variable data jobs to PRISMAsync with an automated workflow or PRISMAprepare. Automated workflows (access through the Settings Editor) on page 205 (See )

[57] Properties of a variable data job

The icon indicates a variable data job in the job list. Print variable data jobs on page 188 (See )

Work with variable data in document printing mode

172 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Manage print jobs

Print an urgent job immediately

Introduction

When a job must be printed urgently, you can give that print job priority over all other print jobs. The [Print now] button allows you to print a job immediately. When you use the [Print now] button, the active print job will be paused as soon as the current set is ready.

To print a job as soon as possible but not immediately, you can use the [To top] function.

Location of the [Print now] button

The [Print now] button is available in [Scheduled jobs] view and the [DocBox] (optional).

NOTE To give priority to a job in the list of [Waiting jobs], you must first touch [Print] to send the job to the list of [Scheduled jobs]. There you can select the job and touch [Print now]. To give priority to a job in the list of [Printed jobs], you must first reprint the job. When the job is in the list of [Scheduled jobs], you can select the job and touch [Print now].

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. 2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs]. 3. Touch the job which you want to print immediately. 4. Press [Print now].

The urgent job appears at the top of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The active print job is paused as soon as the current set is ready and becomes second in the list.

Manage print jobs

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 173

Give priority to a print job

Introduction

When you want to print a job as soon as possible, but not necessarily immediately, you must use the [To top] function. The [To top] function moves the selected job to the second position in the list of [Scheduled jobs], below the active print job . The job will be printed when the active print job is ready.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. 2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs]. 3. Touch the job to which you want to give priority. 4. Press [To top].

Related information

Print an urgent job immediately on page 173

Give priority to a print job

174 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Print a scheduled job later

Introduction

The machine prints the print jobs and copy jobs that are present in the list of [Scheduled jobs] jobs.

However, you can decide to print a job later, for example because: The required media are out of stock, or You first want to make a proof.

Then you must move the job back to the list of [Waiting jobs].

NOTE To select the active print job you must first press the [Stop] button two times to stop the job. However, the printing continues until the buffer is empty. Move the active jobs to the list of [Waiting jobs]. You must touch the [Resume] button to print the other jobs.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. 2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs]. 3. Touch the job(s) you want to print later or use the [Select] button to make a selection.

To undo the multiple selection and only select 1 job, you must touch that job for 2 seconds. 4. Press [Move].

The job is moved to the list of [Waiting jobs].

Print a scheduled job later

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 175

Reprint a job

Introduction

NOTE The following description is only applicable when the setting [Printed jobs] in the Settings Editor is enabled.

Print jobs that have been completed are moved from the list of [Scheduled jobs] list to the list of [Printed jobs]. The [Printed jobs] list helps you to reprint jobs quicker and easier.

What you need to know about the list of Printed jobs

When you want to reprint a job, the selected job is always copied to the list of [Waiting jobs] first.

You cannot change the job settings in the list of [Printed jobs]. This is only possible in the list of [Waiting jobs].

You cannot reprint streaming jobs. The list of [Printed jobs] does not store proof prints, system jobs and jobs that were stopped or

deleted. When you shut down the printer all jobs remain present in the list of [Printed jobs]. The list of [Printed jobs] can only store jobs. To prevent the disk of your system from becoming

full, jobs must be deleted manually or automatically on a regular basis. In the Settings Editor, you can indicate the cleaning period, then the clean-up is carried out at midnight or at the next start-up (in general the next morning).

If E-shredding is enabled, the jobs will be shredded after removal from the list of [Printed jobs].

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Printed jobs]. 2. Touch the job(s) you want to reprint or use the [Select] button to make a selection.

To undo the multiple selection and only select 1 job, you must touch that job for 2 seconds. 3. Press [Copy]. 4. Touch [Queues] -> [Waiting jobs]. 5. Touch the job you want to reprint. 6. Touch [Properties] if you want to change the settings, for example the number of sets. 7. Press [Print].

Reprint a job

176 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Print a job ticket

Introduction

Job tickets are used to transfer settings from an application to the printer. It can be convenient to print a job ticket before printing a job, to get an overview of the main job characteristics.

Job tickets can contain the following information, for example. Job name. Job owner. Job destination. Job settings such as the number of sets. Required media.

Where to find the [Ticket] button

The [Ticket] button is available at the following locations on the operator panel. List of [Printed jobs] if this function is enabled in the Settings Editor. List of [Scheduled jobs]. List of [Waiting jobs]. [DocBox] (in the drop-down list ).

Procedure

1. Press [Jobs]. 2. Go to one of the locations mentioned above. 3. Touch one or more jobs of which you want to print the job ticket. 4. Press [Ticket].

The job is sent to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The job may not be immediately visible in the list of [Scheduled jobs]. You can recognize the job by the prefix @_ in front of the job name.

Print a job ticket

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 177

Make a proof

Introduction

You can make a proof to check whether the quality and the layout of the output meet your expectations. When you use the [Proof] function, the machine prints 1 copy of the job. You can only make a proof for a job in the list of [Waiting jobs] or in the [DocBox] (optional).

When you make a proof, the printed set is not subtracted from the defined total number of sets for a job. For example, if you need 10 sets the printer will still print 10 sets after you made the proof. This is different from the checking of the first set.

Locations of the [Proof] button

The [Proof] button is available at the following locations. List of [Waiting jobs]. [DocBox] (optional).

NOTE To make a proof of a job in the list of [Printed jobs], you must first touch [Copy] to copy the job to the list of [Waiting jobs]. There you can select the job and touch [Proof].

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] > [Queues]. 2. If collapsed, touch to expand the desired list of [Waiting jobs] in the [DocBox]. 3. Touch the job of which you want to print a proof.

NOTE You can select multiple jobs.

4. Press [Proof]. A copy of the job goes to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The original job remains in the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can recognize a proof by the magnifying glass on the job icon .

Related information

Reprint a job on page 176

Make a proof

178 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Stop the printer

Introduction

The printer can be stopped in 2 ways. Manually

Use the Stop button or the [Stop after job] button to stop the printer. Automatically

Define a corresponding setting in the workflow profiles.

Stop the printer manually

Manual stop

Stop after Press the button Description

A set one time The printer stops when the currently printed set of the active print job is completed. It depends on the set size and the moment you press the [Stop] button when the printer will stop. For example, when you have a large set of 1,000 pages and you press the [Stop] button after the first page, the printing will continue for a couple of minutes.

NOTE When you press the [Stop] button one time the dashboard will immediately display a [Resume] button with a vertical, orange bar. However, the printing continues until the current set is completed. You must touch the [Resume] button to resume printing.

A page two times The printer stops when the printer buffer is empty (as soon as possible). The buffer can contain up to 50 pages. Because the printer stops when the buffer is empty, it is possible that the last printed set is not complete.

NOTE When you press the [Stop] button two times the dashboard will immediately dis- play a [Resume] button with a vertical red bar. Move the active jobs to the list of [Waiting jobs]. However, the printing continues until the buffer is empty. You must touch the [Resume] button to print the other jobs.

A job [Stop after job] In [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] you must se- lect the job after which the printer must stop. Then touch the [Stop after job]. A horizontal, red and white stop bar indicates that the stop-after-job function is active. The printer stops when the selected job is completed. You must touch the [Resume] button to resume printing.

NOTE When you print streaming jobs or jobs that consist of 1 large set, you must press two times to stop the printer as soon as possible.

Stop the printer

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 179

Stop the printer automatically

Automatic stop

When Then

The [Check first set] setting in a [Workflow profile] is [On], and

The [Check first set] setting is also enabled in the job.

The printer stops each time the first set of a print job is completed. You can check the first set before you continue the print job.

The [Confirm start of job] setting in a [Work- flow profile] is [On].

The printer stops each time at the start of a new job. You must start each job manually.

Procedure

1. Press one time to stop when the current set is completed. 2. Press two times to stop as soon as possible. 3. To resume printing, press the [Resume] button in the dashboard.

NOTE To stop printing after a job, you must select a job in [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs]. Then you must touch the [Stop after job] button.

Stop the printer

180 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Delete print jobs

Locations from which jobs can be deleted

You can delete jobs from the following locations. List of [Printed jobs] (if this function is enabled in the Settings Editor). List of [Scheduled jobs]. List of [Waiting jobs]. [DocBox] (optional).

NOTE You can only delete the active print job in the list of [Scheduled jobs] when the printer is on hold.

Select the jobs you want to delete

The table below describes your options to select one or more jobs.

Select one or more jobs that you want to delete

What to delete? How to do?

One or more separate jobs Go to the correct location described above, then touch the jobs one by one.

All jobs Go to the correct location, then touch [Select] -> [All].

[ Jobs with available me- dia]

Go to the correct location, then touch [Select] -> [ Jobs with availa- ble media].

[ Jobs with label] Go to the correct location, then touch [Select] -> [ Jobs with label].

[Printed jobs] in the [Doc- Box].

Go to the [DocBox], then touch [Select] -> [Printed jobs].

[New jobs] in the [DocBox]. Go to the [DocBox], then touch [Select] -> [New jobs].

NOTE For the list of [Printed jobs], you can indicate in the Settings Editor that the list must be cleaned automatically at specified times. The factory default is 1 day. Furthermore, in the Settings Editor you can manually clean up the jobs in the lists of [Printed jobs], [Scheduled jobs], [Waiting jobs] and the [DocBox].

Procedure

1. Go to one of the following locations. Touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]

If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs]. Touch [Jobs] -> [Printed jobs]

2. Select the jobs you want to delete. 3. Press [Delete].

A message appears. 4. When you are sure that you want to delete the selected job(s), touch [Yes].

Delete print jobs

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 181

Schedule a waiting job for printing

Introduction

The destination of jobs is determined by the selected workflow profile. When jobs go to the list of [Waiting jobs], you must manually send the jobs to the print queue (list of [Scheduled jobs]). This enables you to keep full control of all jobs that must be printed.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. 2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the desired list of [Waiting jobs]. 3. Touch the job(s) you want to print or use the [Select] button to make a selection.

To undo the multiple selection and only select 1 job, you must touch that job for 2 seconds. 4. Press [Print].

The job is moved to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs].

Related information

Work with the workflow profiles on page 84

Schedule a waiting job for printing

182 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Select more than one job for printing

Introduction

The table below describes the possibilities to select more than one job for printing.

Select more jobs

Options Description

Select two or more jobs manually

Touch the jobs you want to print one by one.

[Select] button - [All] All jobs in the list of [Waiting jobs] are printed. The order in the list of [Waiting jobs] determines the print order. However, in the list of [Scheduled jobs] you can give priority to a job.

[Select] button - [ Jobs with available media]

All jobs for which the required media are currently available in the paper trays, will be printed. This improves the productivity, be- cause you must not change the required media during printing. You may only need to add more of the currently available media types.

[Select] button - [ Jobs with label]

A label is a name or tag that helps you to identify certain jobs on the operator panel. When a job is sent to the printer, the person who submits the job can add a label to that job. The label can be any name that helps to identify certain jobs. The label can be de- fined in the printer driver, in a job ticket or via an automated work- flow. For example, the label Customer XYZ can be added to jobs. Then you can select and print all the jobs for 'Customer XYZ' at once.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. 2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the desired list of [Waiting jobs], or go to a [DocBox]. 3. Touch the jobs you want to print one by one, or make a selection using the [Select] button.

The selected jobs are highlighted. 4. Press [Print].

Select more than one job for printing

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 183

Bundle jobs in the list of [Waiting jobs]

Introduction

The bundle function allows you to combine two or more jobs into one new job. For example, this can be convenient when the participants of a meeting need several documents in a specific order. Often, the required documents are sent from several workplaces to the printer in advance. Normally, this means that you must print the documents first and sort or staple them later. By using the bundle function you can determine the order of the documents before printing and print all documents in the correct order in only 1 print job.

Important information about the bundle function

You can only bundle print jobs that are currently in the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can change a number of settings for the bundled job via the [Properties] window. By default, the number of sets for a bundled job is 1. So before printing, you must first indicate

the required number of sets. When you stop a job after a set, the printing stops after 1 copy of the complete bundle. The jobs in a bundle are accounted separately under the account ID of the original jobs. All the jobs in the bundle must have the same output location. Otherwise, the operator panel

displays a warning message. To continue, you must first split the bundled job, then change the individual job settings and finally bundle the jobs again.

Main actions on the bundle function

The table below describes the main actions you can carry out with regard to the bundle function.

Main bundle functions

Main actions Description

[Bundle] When you touch [Bundle] after selecting 2 or more jobs, a new job is created that contains the original jobs. The new job is added to the bottom of the list of [Waiting jobs]. The original jobs are re- moved from the list. The new job gets a new name that is based on the name of the first job in the bundle.

[Split] When you touch [Split] after selecting a bundled job, the job is split into the original, separate jobs. The bundled job is removed. The separate jobs are added to the bottom of the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can use the [Split] function to correct mismatched set- tings, for example.

Change job settings The [Properties] window gives access to a pane where you can do the following. Change a number of job settings. Change the order of the jobs in the bundle.

[Delete] Delete the job.

[Ticket] Print the job ticket of the job.

[Proof] Print 1 copy of the job first to check if the result meets your ex- pectations.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Waiting jobs].

Bundle jobs in the list of [Waiting jobs]

184 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

2. Touch the jobs you want to combine, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple jobs at once.

3. Press [Bundle]. A [Create bundle] window appears that allows you to make some changes.

4. If necessary, use the [Up] and [Down] buttons to change the job order. 5. If necessary, change the generic job settings, such as [Number of bundles]. 6. Press [OK].

Bundle jobs in the list of [Waiting jobs]

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 185

Print a file from a USB drive

Introduction

You can print documents (*.pdf, *.ps) on a USB drive.

Procedure

1. Insert the USB drive into the USB port at the left-hand side of the operator panel. 2. Touch [Jobs] -> [USB]. 3. Touch to browse through the directories on the USB drive. 4. Touch the file or files you want to print, or touch [Select] to select multiple files. 5. Touch [Print] to send the file to the list of [Scheduled jobs] immediately, or 6. Touch [Save] to save a copy of the file to another location on your printer such as the list of

[Waiting jobs] or a [DocBox]. Then you can edit the file first and print the file from the other location The locations you can select depend on your system configuration.

7. Touch to eject the USB drive. 8. Remove the USB drive from the operator panel when the message [ USB drive has been

successfully ejected.] is displayed.

Print a file from a USB drive

186 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Convert a job to a variable data job If you print a large document that has the structure of a variable data document, you can instruct the print system to handle this job as a variable data job. This can be useful if you only want a proof print or only want to print part of the job. Work with variable data in document printing mode on page 172 (See )

To indicate how the job is composed, you enter either the number of records or the pages per record.

You can also convert jobs to variable data jobs with an automated workflow. Automated workflows (access through the Settings Editor) on page 205 (See )

[58] Indicate the structure of the job

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs]. 2. Go to the location of the job. 3. Select the job you want to convert. 4. Touch [Properties], or double tap the job. 5. Touch [Job type]. 6. Touch [Normal] -> [Variable data]. 7. Define how often the master document occurs in the job at [Number of records] or enter the

number of pages in the master document at [Pages per record]. 8. Touch [OK] to store the new job type. 9. Touch [OK] to start the conversion.

After you finish

After conversion you can make the job settings and print the variable data job. Print variable data jobs on page 188 (See )

Convert a job to a variable data job

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 187

Print variable data jobs When PRISMAsync receives a job with variable data (PDF/VT job), it distinguishes the record structure. (See

Work with variable data in document printing mode on page 172 and Convert a job to a variable data job on page 187)

PRISMAsync treats records as print sets with fixed contents.

[59] A PDF/VT job in the list of scheduled jobs

When the PDF/VT job arrives in the print queue, you can use the following functions:

Procedure

1. Change the settings of the job. Be aware that when you change settings of a PDF/VT job, these settings are applicable to all records of the job. Page programming is not available for PDF/VT jobs.

2. Print a proof of the first record or print a range of records. 3. Print a range of records. 4. Interrupt the print process after a certain record, and resume the print process of the job later.

Print variable data jobs

188 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Send a job to another printer You can send jobs with their settings to another PRISMAsync printer from the following locations: List of scheduled jobs List of waiting jobs A DocBox List of printed jobs

NOTE When one or more settings or finishing options for the job are not available on the selected remote printer, a warning icon is displayed in the job on the remote printer. The job on the remote printer indicates that there are contradictions you must resolve.

NOTE The list of remote printers must be available and configured in the Settings Editor.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs]. 2. Go to the location of the jobs. 3. Select the jobs you want to send to another printer, or use an option from the [Select] menu to

select multiple jobs together. 4. Select [Copy to] from the button bar or from the drop-down menu. 5. Select a printer from the list or use [Other printer] to manually enter a printer name. 6. Touch [OK].

Send a job to another printer

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 189

PRISMAsync Remote Manager (Option) With PRISMAsync Remote Manager you can monitor printers, operate printers remotely and send jobs and ready-to-print documents to the printer queues of all configured printers. You must enable and configure PRISMAsync Remote Manager in the Settings Editor.

Refer to the user manual for the PRISMAsync Remote Manager for the options available when using this product.

PRISMAsync Remote Manager (Option)

190 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Change the job settings before printing

Change the number of sets

Introduction

Follow the procedure below to change the number of sets for a job that is present in the list of [Waiting jobs] or [Scheduled jobs], or in a [DocBox].

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Waiting jobs] or [Scheduled jobs], or select a [DocBox]. 2. Touch the job of which you want to change the number of sets.

NOTE You can only change the settings of the active print job after you stopped the printer (press the [Stop] button two times).

3. Touch [Properties], or touch the job twice to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Number of sets] button. 5. Enter the desired number of sets (between 1 and 65,000).

NOTE Touch the arrow button <- to correct the previous entry or touch [Cancel] to close the numerical keyboard without saving the changes.

6. Press [OK]. 7. Press [OK].

Change the job settings before printing

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 191

Check the first set

Introduction

If you have a large print job and you want to check whether the job is printed correctly, it is advised to check the first set before printing all other sets. When a job is sent to the printer, the submitter can indicate in the job submission application that the first set must be checked. However, the workflow profile that is selected on the operator panel determines how the printer handles these requests.

Depending on the selected workflow profile, the [Check first set] setting can have the following values: [On] [Off] [ As in job]

When you use the [Check first set] function, the printed set is subtracted from the indicated total number of sets for a job. For example, when you need 10 sets, the printer will print the first set and then stop. When you continue the job, the 9 remaining sets are printed. This is different from printing a proof.

Methods to check the first set

You can use 1 of the following methods to indicate that you want to check the first set. Use a workflow profile where [Check first set] is enabled. Then the printer stops after the first

set. Enable the function [Check first set] in the [Properties] window for a specific job only. However,

you can only change the [Check first set] setting there when a workflow profile is selected where the [Check first set] setting is [ As in job].

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Waiting jobs] or [Scheduled jobs], or select a [DocBox]. 2. Touch the job of which you want to check the first set.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

3. Touch [Properties] - or touch the job 2x to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Number of sets] button. 5. Touch [Check first set] when the button states [Off].

The text changes from [Off] to [On]. A check mark indicates that the checking of the first set is enabled.

6. Press [OK]. The Number of sets button will now show a check mark.

7. Press [OK].

Check the first set

192 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Change the use of separator sheets

Introduction

Separator sheets are empty sheets that are automatically inserted before each new set or job to separate two sets or jobs. In the Settings Editor you can define the media that must be used as separator sheets. The use of separator sheets can be enabled via the automated workflows in the Settings Editor. However, you can change this setting trough the operator panel.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Waiting jobs] or [Scheduled jobs], or select a [DocBox]. 2. Touch the job of which you want to change the settings.

NOTE You can only change the settings of the active print job after you stopped the printer (press the [Stop] button two times).

3. Press [Properties]. 4. Touch the [Separator sheets] button to toggle between [On] and [Off]. 5. Press [OK].

Change the use of separator sheets

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 193

Stack the prints with an offset

Introduction

The [Offset stacking] function creates a visible distinction between sets or jobs in an output location. The active workflow profile or the active automated workflow determines the default type of offset stacking. The table below describes the possible types of offset stacking. Furthermore, the table describes when you can change the defined type of offset stacking in the [Properties] window.

Types of offset stacking

Default type of offset stacking

Possible changes in the [Properties] window

[Jobs] No changes possible.

[Sets (always)] You can indicate the number of sets (N sets) after which an offset will be applied, for example 5. Then 5 sets will be delivered in a straight stack. The next 5 sets will also be delivered in a straight stack, but with a shift compared to the previous stack. N must be a value between 1 and 65536 (default = 1).

NOTE When [Sets (always)] is possible, the [Properties] window displays a special button at the upper right-hand side which is otherwise not visible.

[Sets (as in job)] You can set the [Offset stacking] function to: [On] - each set will be shifted compared to the previous set, or [Off] - all sets are delivered in 1 straight stack.

[Banners] No changes possible.

[Off] No changes possible.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Waiting jobs], or select a [DocBox]. 2. Touch the job of which you want to change the type of offset stacking.

NOTE You can only change the settings of the active print job , after you stopped the printer (press the [Stop] button two times).

3. Touch [Properties], or touch the job twice to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Print delivery] button when the default type of offset stacking is [ Sets (as in job)].

NOTE You can only change this setting when the default type of offset stacking is set to [ Sets (as in job)].

5. Make the required changes. 6. Press [OK].

Stack the prints with an offset

194 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Combine jobs

Introduction

The bundle function allows you to combine two or more jobs into one new job. For example, this can be convenient when the participants of a meeting need several documents in a specific order. Often, the required documents are sent from several workplaces to the printer in advance. Normally, this means that you must print the documents first and sort or staple them later. By using the bundle function you can determine the order of the documents before printing and print all documents in the correct order in only 1 print job.

Important information about the bundle function

You can only bundle print jobs that are currently in the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can change a number of settings for the bundled job via the [Properties] window. By default, the number of sets for a bundled job is 1. So before printing, you must first indicate

the required number of sets. When you stop a job after a set, the printing stops after 1 copy of the complete bundle. The jobs in a bundle are accounted separately under the account ID of the original jobs. All the jobs in the bundle must have the same output location. Otherwise, the operator panel

displays a warning message. To continue, you must first split the bundled job, then change the individual job settings and finally bundle the jobs again.

Main actions on the bundle function

The table below describes the main actions you can carry out with regard to the bundle function.

Main bundle functions

Main actions Description

[Bundle] When you touch [Bundle] after selecting 2 or more jobs, a new job is created that contains the original jobs. The new job is added to the bottom of the list of [Waiting jobs]. The original jobs are re- moved from the list. The new job gets a new name that is based on the name of the first job in the bundle.

[Split] When you touch [Split] after selecting a bundled job, the job is split into the original, separate jobs. The bundled job is removed. The separate jobs are added to the bottom of the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can use the [Split] function to correct mismatched set- tings, for example.

Change job settings The [Properties] window gives access to a pane where you can do the following. Change a number of job settings. Change the order of the jobs in the bundle.

[Delete] Delete print jobs.

[Ticket] Print a job ticket.

[Proof] Make a proof.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Waiting jobs]. 2. Touch the jobs you want to combine.

Combine jobs

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 195

NOTE If all jobs you want to combine have the same label, you can also touch [Select] -> [ Jobs with label] to select all the required jobs at once.

3. Press [Bundle]. The operator panel displays an overview of the bundled job.

4. If necessary, use the Up and Down keys to change the job order. 5. Press [OK].

Combine jobs

196 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Change the output settings before printing

Change [2-sided] into [1-sided] and vice versa

Introduction

Jobs for which [1-sided] or [2-sided] printing was defined, will be printed on either 1 side or both sides of a sheet. If required, you can change this setting.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Waiting jobs], or select a [DocBox]. 2. Touch the job of which you want to change the number of sets.

NOTE You can only change the settings of the active print job after you stopped the printer (press the [Stop] button two times).

3. Touch [Properties] - or touch the job 2x to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [1- or 2-sided] button. 5. Touch the desired value. 6. Press [OK]. 7. Press [OK].

Change the output settings before printing

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 197

Change the binding edge

Introduction

The binding edge determines whether the binding position is along the long edge or the short edge of the media. The binding edge is usually set via the printer driver, for example. However, you can view and change the binding edge via the operator panel. The binding edge has a relation with the direction of the margin shift, orientation and staple position.

NOTE When the binding edge is changed for [2-sided] printing, the image orientation is automatically adjusted to get the correct layout. The orientation of the image on the back side of the page will be changed too.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Waiting jobs], or select a [DocBox]. 2. Touch the job you want to change.

NOTE You can only change the settings of the active print job after you stopped the printer (press the [Stop] button two times).

3. Touch [Properties], or touch the job twice to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Binding edge] button. 5. Touch the desired value. 6. Press [OK]. 7. Press [OK].

Change the binding edge

198 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Select a different media for a job

Introduction

If you want to print a job on other media than originally defined for that job, you can select a different media via the operator panel. You can select another media of the same size at the Preview pane. You can select another media with a different size from the [Output] pane.

NOTE The media must be available in the media catalog.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Waiting jobs], or select a [DocBox]. 2. Touch the job you want to change.

NOTE You can only change the settings of the active print job after you stopped the printer (press the [Stop] button two times).

3. Touch [Properties], or touch the job twice to open the [Properties] window. 4. In the preview pane at the right-hand side, touch the media you want to change.

When more than 1 media was defined for a job, the preview pane displays a separate button for each media.

5. From the list, select the new media. 6. Press [OK]. 7. Press [OK].

Select a different media for a job

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 199

Change the settings for covers

Introduction

When front covers or back covers are required, the settings are usually set in the printer driver, for example. However, you can view and change the settings for the covers via the operator panel.

You can change the following settings for both the front cover and the back cover separately. Enable or disable the use of a cover. Select the desired media from the [Media catalog]. Indicate whether the cover must be left empty, or printed 1-sided and/or 2-sided.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Waiting jobs], or select a [DocBox]. 2. Touch the job of which you want to change the cover settings.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

3. Touch [Properties] - or touch the job 2x to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Cover] button. 5. Make the required changes. 6. Press [OK]. 7. Press [OK].

Change the settings for covers

200 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Shift the image roughly to create binding space

Introduction

If you want to create space for staples or punch holes, for example, you can use the [Align] function. The preview in the right-hand pane of the operator panel displays the consequences of your changes.

You can also shift the image or margin more precisely.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Waiting jobs], or select a [DocBox]. 2. Touch the job you want to change.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

3. Touch [Properties], or touch the job twice to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Align] button. 5. Make the required changes. 6. Press [OK]. 7. Press [OK].

Shift the image roughly to create binding space

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 201

Shift the image precisely to create binding space or correct the layout

Introduction

If you want to create space for staples or punch holes, for example, you can use the [Align] function. However, when the [Align] function is not precise enough, you can use the [Margin shift] and [Image shift] functions. These functions allow you to shift the image more precisely. The preview in the right-hand pane of the operator panel displays the consequences of your changes. If you shift the margin too much, you may loose part of the image.

The [Shift] function has 2 options. [Margin shift] allows you to increase or decrease the margin to create more binding space, for

example. With [Margin shift], you can shift an image relative to the binding edge. [Image shift] has basically the same function. However, [Image shift] also allows you to move

the image vertically. This gives you more freedom in moving the image exactly to the desired position.

NOTE By default, the values of the front side and the back side are linked. To define different values for each side, touch . The changes you make are valid for the whole document, not only for the current page.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Waiting jobs], or select a [DocBox]. 2. Touch the job you want to change.

NOTE You can only change the settings of the active print job after you stopped the printer (press the [Stop] button two times).

3. Touch [Properties], or touch the job twice to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Shift] button. 5. Make the required changes. 6. Press [OK]. 7. Press [OK].

Shift the image precisely to create binding space or correct the layout

202 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Change the print delivery settings

Introduction

Usually the print delivery settings have been defined in the printer driver.

Overview of the print delivery settings

Setting Description

[Output location] Change the output location for the job. The list shows all the out- put locations that are available for your system. Make sure there is a match between the selected output location and the job requirements. For example, when a job requires sta- ples, you must select an output location that allows stapling.

[Sort] Change the sorting method of the prints. You can select sort [By page] or [By set].

[60] Sort by page

[61] Sort by set

[Offset stacking] Stack the prints with an offset. This setting is only available when the [Offset stacking] setting of the active [Workflow profile] is set to [ Sets (as in job)].

[Advanced settings] Finishing equipment often requires that the printed sheets are de- livered in a certain order. For finishers that are integrated in your printing system, the required settings are adapted automatically. However, sometimes it can be necessary to change a number of settings manually, for example when you want to finish the prints using offline finishers. If required, you can change the [Sheet or- der], [Sheet orientation], [Print order] and [Rotation].

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Waiting jobs], or select a [DocBox]. 2. Touch the job of which you want to change the settings.

NOTE You can only change the settings of the active print job after you stopped the printer (press the [Stop] button two times).

3. Press [Properties]. 4. Touch the [Print delivery]. 5. Make the required changes. 6. Press [OK]. 7. Press [OK].

Change the print delivery settings

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 203

Change the finishing method

Introduction

The required finishing method is usually set in the printer driver. However, you can change the finishing method on the operator panel.

Depending on the configuration of your system you can change the following finishing methods, for example. Number of staples. Number of punch holes. The location of the staples or punch holes.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Waiting jobs], or select a [DocBox]. 2. Touch the job you want to change.

NOTE You can only change the settings of the active print job after you stopped the printer (press the [Stop] button two times).

3. Touch [Properties], or touch the job twice to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Binding] button. 5. Make the required changes. 6. Press [OK]. 7. Press [OK].

Change the finishing method

204 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Automated workflows (access through the Settings Editor)

Introduction to automated workflows

Definition

The Settings Editor enables you to set up separate automated workflows. Automated workflows are print queues that you can program to perform a range of operations. Automated workflows are mostly used for legacy applications where jobs are printed automatically and certain settings must be set automatically. Every automated workflow represents a different virtual printer with its own specific attributes.

The selection of automated workflows is handled when the job is sent over LPR via the name of the automated workflow of the job ticket. Once the job is sent to a specified automated workflow on the printer, you cannot move the job to another workflow. The operator panel does not display the various automated workflows. However, jobs can get a label that you can use as a selection criterion for further processing and production.

The use of automated workflows has for example the following advantages. The print workflow is automated even more, which improves the productivity. The programming of individual jobs is eliminated, which optimizes the job throughput. You can more easily distinguish, prioritize and produce jobs in different automated workflows

with different properties using less operator involvement. You can easily assign legacy applications without job tickets to specific job profiles.

NOTE You can define whether or not the settings of a job ticket overrule the settings of an automated workflow in the Settings Editor.

NOTE When the Settings Editor does not display the correct language, you can change the preferred language in the Internet options of your Internet browser. The desired language must be first in the list of languages.

Attributes

NOTE It is not compulsory to define all the settings. When you put a check mark in front of a setting, that setting and its values become enabled.

Refer to the Settings Editor to get an overview of the settings.

Automated workflows (access through the Settings Editor)

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 205

Add an automated workflow

Introduction

The Settings Editor contains 1 factory default automated workflow. However, it can be beneficial for your productivity to add more automated workflows.

NOTE It is not compulsory to define all the settings. When you put a check mark in front of a setting, that setting and its values become enabled.

Procedure

1. Go to [Workflow] -> [Automated workflows]. 2. Click the [Add] button.

A pop-up window displays the attributes you can specify for the new workflow. 3. Put a check mark in front of the attributes you want to define. 4. Specify or select the values of the attributes. 5. Click [OK].

Add an automated workflow

206 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Edit an automated workflow

Introduction

You can change the attributes of an existing automated workflow.

NOTE It is not compulsory to define all the settings. When you put a check mark in front of a setting, that setting and its values become enabled.

Procedure

1. Go to [Workflow] -> [Automated workflows]. 2. Put a check mark in front of the workflow you want to edit. 3. Click the[Edit] button.

A pop-up window displays the attributes you can specify for your workflow. 4. Change the attributes. 5. Click [OK].

Edit an automated workflow

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 207

Delete an automated workflow

Introduction

When you no longer need a certain automated workflow, you can delete that workflow.

NOTE You cannot delete the factory default automated workflow.

Procedure

1. Go to [Workflow] -> [Automated workflows]. 2. Put a check mark in front of the workflow you want to delete. 3. Click the [Delete] button. 4. Click [OK].

Delete an automated workflow

208 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Restore the factory default workflow

Introduction

You can restore the factory default automated workflow. This has the following consequences. All the automated workflows you added will be removed All the changes in the default workflow will be lost.

Procedure

1. Go to [Workflow] -> [Automated workflows]. 2. Click the [Restore] button.

The factory default automated workflow is restored.

Restore the factory default workflow

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 209

Hotfolders

Introduction to hotfolders

Introduction

Technically, a hotfolder is a mapped network drive on a workstation that is linked to a shared folder on the PRISMAsync controller.

For an operator, a hotfolder is a folder on a workstation where printable files can be dropped for printing.

Hotfolders are primarily aimed at recurring PDF workflows. In these workflows identical PDFs, or other printable files, with identical settings are printed on a regular basis. Hotfolders should not be used in combination with print job tickets.

The job settings for hotfolders

The settings of a hotfolder can be defined by: a hotfolder default ticket in the hotfolder itself, or the automated workflow to which the hotfolder is linked.

It is advisable to use the hotfolder functionality in combination with the hotfolder default ticket.

However, if you want to use the settings of the automated workflow where the hotfolder is linked to, it is advised not to place a hotfolder default ticket in the hotfolder, to prevent mixing up settings. Furthermore, you must make sure that the [Overrule the job ticket] setting in that automated workflow is enabled (tick the checkbox).

Before you can use a hotfolder

To be able to use the hotfolder function, the following steps must be carried out first: In the Settings Editor, the system administrator must activate the hotfolder function. In the Settings Editor, the system administrator must create a hotfolder and link the hotfolder

to an automated workflow. On a workstation, the key operator must create a shared network drive that is linked to the

hotfolder. On the desktop of that workstation, the key operator can create a shortcut to the hotfolder, if

desired.

Hotfolders

210 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Activate the hotfolder function

Introduction

The information in this section is intended for system administrators.

NOTE By factory default, the hotfolder function is disabled. To use the hotfolder function, the system

administrator must activate this function once. For this procedure, the System administrator password is required.

Procedure

1. Open the web browser and enter the host name or IP address of your PRISMAsync controller. 2. Go to the [Workflow] -> [Hotfolders] section. 3. Click [Configure]. 4. Select [SMB Enabled] or [WebDAV Enabled] to activate the hotfolder function. 5. Enter a unique [User name] and [Password].

Make sure that you filled in the user name and password before you continue with the next step. 6. Click [OK] to confirm the activation of the hotfolder function.

A confirmation window opens. 7. Click [OK] to restart the controller now.

Activate the hotfolder function

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 211

Create a hotfolder

Introduction

The information in this section is intended for system administrators.

Before you begin

The hotfolder function must be activated once by the system administrator.

Procedure

1. Open your web browser and enter the host name or IP address of your PRISMAsync controller. 2. Go to the [Workflow] -> [Hotfolders] section. 3. Click [Add]. 4. Give the hotfolder a logical name. 5. Select the workflow folder to which you want to link. 6. Click [OK].

Create a hotfolder

212 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Create a shared network folder on a workstation

Introduction

The information in this section is intended for key operators.

Before creating a shared network folder on a workstation, the following actions must be carried out first: Enable the hotfolder function. Create an automated workflow including a hotfolder.

NOTE This procedure describes the creation of a shared network folder on a workstation with a Microsoft Windows XP operating system. However, depending on the operating system of your workstation, the procedure can be different.

Illustration

[62] Create a shared network drive

Procedure

1. Open Microsoft Explorer. 2. Click Tools -> Map Network Drive... 3. Select a drive letter for the shared network folder. 4. Enter the name of the shared network folder, for example \\12.34.56.78\Booklet, or click the

'Browse' button to navigate to the required location.

NOTE Instead of 12.34.56.78 you must enter the host name or IP address of the PRISMAsync controller. Booklet is the name you gave to the hotfolder when you created the automated workflow.

5. Click 'Finish'. A log in screen will appear.

6. Enter the user name and the password that were defined when the hotfolder function was enabled in the Settings Editor.

7. Click 'OK.' The hotfolder is now ready for use.

8. If desired, you can create a shortcut to the shared network folder on the desktop of the workstation.

Create a shared network folder on a workstation

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 213

Create a hotfolder default ticket ('default_ticket.jdf')

Introduction

Hotfolders are primarily aimed at recurring PDF workflows. In these workflows identical PDFs, or other printable files, with identical settings are printed on a regular basis. A hotfolder default ticket (' default_ticket.jdf') in the hotfolder determines the settings for the print jobs.

NOTE If you want to use the hotfolder default ticket, make sure that the [Overrule the job ticket]

setting of the automated workflow in which the hotfolder was created, is disabled (no check mark in the checkbox). Otherwise, the settings of the automated workflow overrule the settings of the hotfolder default ticket.

This procedure is an example of the procedure on a Microsoft Windows XP operating system. For other operating systems, the procedure can vary.

Procedure

1. Click [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers and Faxes]. 2. Right-click the printer driver of your imagePRESS C7011VPS / C7010VPS Series and select

[Printing preferences...]. 3. Define the required settings. 4. Click the [Save] icon in the Templates bar. 5. Enter a name for the template. 6. Click [OK]. 7. Right-click the template you just created and select 'Save as ticket'. 8. Browse to the shared network folder and click [Save].

The template is saved as a hotfolder default ticket.

Create a hotfolder default ticket ('default_ticket.jdf')

214 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Transaction printing (optional)

Introduction to the [Transaction] section

Introduction

NOTE Transaction printing requires a license. The [System] view on the operator panel displays the [Transaction] section only when transaction printing is licensed.

Transaction printing enables you to print typical transactional documents like invoices, salary slips or other variable data streams. Before you can start transaction jobs, you must first activate the transaction mode via the operator panel. The [Transaction] section contains the settings that you need to use transaction printing. There you can also shift the image in case of a misalignment.

The following information is described below. An overview of the items in the [Transaction] section on the operator panel. The sequence of steps you must perform to print your transaction jobs.

Overview of the [Transaction] section

1

4

32

[63] Overview of the [Transaction] section

Transaction printing (optional)

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 215

The items of the [Transaction] section

Description of the [Transaction] section

Num ber

Item Function

1 Dashboard The dashboard displays the following information for transaction printing. The connection status The IP address of the host that sends the jobs The name of the active transaction job The progress of the active transaction job

2 [Connection] The [Connection] section gives access to the following functions. Turn the transaction printing mode on or off Select the setup for the transaction jobs

You can define setups in the Settings Editor ([Transac- tion printing] -> [Setups]).

Put the printer online or offline. The printer must be online for the host to be able to connect to the printer.

3 [Print protocol] Display the active printer description language (read-on- ly). You can change the active PDL in the Settings Editor ([Transaction printing] -> [Settings] -> [Requested active PDL]). When the requested active PDL is changed, the new PDL becomes effective when you put the printer online.

4 [Image shift] Display and change the active image shift settings, for example when the images on the front and back of a sheet are not aligned correctly.

Sequence of steps to print transaction jobs

NOTE Before you begin, the list of [Scheduled jobs] must be empty.

The following table describes the sequence of steps for transaction printing.

Step Actions on the print er

Actions on the host Remarks

1 Switch the printer in- to the transaction printing mode.

Via the operator panel: [System] -> [Transaction] -> [Transaction print- ing mode] -> [On].

2 Select the active set- up that you need.

Via the operator panel: [System] -> [Transaction] -> [Active trans- action setup], or

Via the Settings Editor: [Trans- action printing] -> [Setups], or

By the host via the data stream (when the printer is online and connected). 4

Introduction to the [Transaction] section

216 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Step Actions on the print er

Actions on the host Remarks

3 Change the active PDL when currently the wrong PDL is ac- tive. This is only pos- sible when you have licenses for more than 1 PDL.

Via the Settings Editor: [Transac- tion printing] -> [Setups] -> [Re- quested active PDL].

4 Load the required media into the paper trays.

Only required when the active set- up has set the tray mode to tray to tray.

5 Put the printer on- line.

Via the operator panel: [System] -> [Transaction] -> [Transaction online] -> [On], or

Via the Settings Editor: [Trans- action printing] -> [Settings] -> [Switch the printer online or off- line].

6 Connect to the printer.

7 Submit the transaction print jobs.

8 Print the transaction print jobs.

You must perform all the regular activities, for example load the media, empty the output locations, add the supplies and solve errors.

9 Put the printer off line when the trans- action print jobs are ready.

Via the operator panel: [System] -> [Transaction] -> [Transaction online] -> [Off], or

Via the Settings Editor: [Trans- action printing] -> [Settings] -> [Switch the printer online or off- line].

10 Switch the printer back to the docu- ment printing mode.

Via the operator panel: [System] -> [Transaction] -> [Transaction printing mode] -> [Off].

Introduction to the [Transaction] section

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 217

Activate transaction printing

Before you begin

Make sure that the list of [Scheduled jobs] is empty.

Procedure

1. On the operator panel, touch [System] -> [Transaction] -> [Transaction printing mode]. The text on the button changes from [Off] to [On].

2. If required, touch [Active transaction setup] and select the desired setup. The attributes of the transaction setup are defined in the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller.

3. Load the required media into the paper trays if the setup selects the tray-to-tray mode. 4. Touch [Transaction online] to put the printer online.

The text on the button changes from [Off] to [On]. 5. On the host or mainframe, connect to the printer and start the job.

NOTE You can also select a setup and put the printer online via the [Transaction printing] section in the Settings Editor.

Activate transaction printing

218 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Deactivate transaction printing

Before you begin

Make sure that the list of [Scheduled jobs] is empty.

Procedure

1. On the operator panel, touch [System] -> [Transaction] -> [Transaction online] to put the printer offline. The text on the button changes from [On] to [Off]. Note that you can only switch the [Transaction online] function to offline when The transaction print jobs are ready. The printer contains no more print data. The printer has stopped because all the jobs are ready, not because an error has occurred.

When you switch [Transaction online] to offline, the connection to the host is disconnected automatically.

2. Press [Transaction printing mode]. The text on the button changes from [On] to [Off].

NOTE You can also put the printer offline via the [Transaction printing] section in the Settings Editor.

Deactivate transaction printing

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 219

Shift the image in the transaction printing mode

Introduction

When a misalignment occurs you can shift the image to correct the problem. You can shift the image on the front side and back side horizontally and vertically. Examples of possible misalignments: A name or address is not placed correctly in the right area. Lines on the front side and back side of a sheet are not aligned correctly.

To keep the shift settings for future use, you must specify the shift settings in the setup via the Settings Editor. Each time that the setup is loaded, the shift settings included in the setup will become the active shift settings.

NOTE Only use the image shift function if you want to shift the image of the whole job. The image shift applies to all the media in all the paper trays.

Procedure

1. On the operator panel, touch [System] -> [Transaction]. 2. Touch the - or + buttons to shift the image on the front side or back side of the sheet.

Shift the image in the transaction printing mode

220 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Transaction setups

Create a new transaction setup

Introduction

For transaction printing, transaction setups are required. Transaction setups contain specific settings for specific transaction jobs. You can create setups in the Settings Editor.

NOTE This section describes how to create a transaction setup from scratch. If you want to create a transaction setup that is very similar to an existing setup, you can also create a copy and make changes afterwards. In this case you must select the setup and click [Copy].

Procedure

1. Go to [Transaction printing] -> [Setups]. 2. Click the [Add] button.

A pop-up window appears. 3. Enter a name and description for the transaction setup, then click [OK]. 4. Check the box next to the setup, then click [Open] to allow changes to the settings of the setup. 5. Depending on the type of setup you created, click [IPDS setup] or [PCL setup].

NOTE PCL is not available for all products. If you only have 1 license, the other PDL is not available.

You can change the settings: By group (click the pencil at the right-hand side of the group settings). By item (click the pencil behind the individual settings).

After you change the settings of a transaction setup, you must load the transaction setup to make the setup changes active.

Transaction setups

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 221

Edit a transaction setup

Procedure

1. Go to [Transaction printing] -> [Setups]. 2. Check the box next to the setup you want to change. 3. If required, click the [Edit] button to change the name or description of the setup, then click [OK]. 4. Click [Open] to allow changes to the setup. 5. Depending on the type of setup you want to change, click [IPDS setup] or [PCL setup].

NOTE PCL is not available for all products. If you only have 1 license, the other PDL is not available.

You can change the settings: By group (click the pencil at the right-hand side of the group settings). By item (click the pencil behind the individual settings).

After you change the settings of a transaction setup, you must load the transaction setup to make the setup changes active.

Edit a transaction setup

222 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Activate a transaction setup

Introduction

After you create a new transaction setup or edited an existing transaction setup, you must activate the transaction setup in the Settings Editor. Otherwise, the changes are not applied.

Procedure

1. In the Settings Editor, click [Transaction printing] -> [Settings] -> [Switch the printer online or offline] to switch the printer offline.

2. Click [Transaction printing] -> [Setups], select the setup and click [Load]. The transaction setup is now activated.

Activate a transaction setup

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 223

Exchange all setups between printers

Introduction

If you have more than one printer, you can exchange the transaction setups between the printers, provided that the printer type and software version are identical. You can then use identical transaction setups on two or more printers.

Procedure

1. In the Settings Editor, click [Transaction printing] -> [Setups]. 2. Click [Export]. 3. Save the file. 4. To import the setups, click [Import]. 5. Browse to the location where the setup file is stored. 6. Choose either [Replace] or [Merge].

NOTE After you imported the setup file you must open and load the transaction setup you want to use.

Exchange all setups between printers

224 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

IPDS

Media information

Introduction

The media catalog: Contains a list of predefined media and their attributes. Is an essential part of the system behavior of the imagePRESS C7011VPS / C7010VPS Series. Helps you to print your jobs more easily while using the correct media.

Media information

Make sure that the [Tray selection mechanism] setting in the Settings Editor is set to [Tray to media].

This is the preferred setting. The printer is a media-based machine. The tray-to-media method supports this behavior.

For [IPDS tray to media for tray 1] assign the media catalogue item from the list. The list displays all the media in the media catalog. The system copies the media attributes from the selected media to the transaction setup.

When you assign A3/Tabloid-like media or want to use short-edge feed for other media, change the feed direction to [Short-edge feed (SEF)].

NOTE The Settings Editor displays only the media for which the media name is consistent with the IPDS media name definitions. Valid characters for an IPDS media name are: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, blank.

IPDS

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 225

Output recovery in case of an error

Introduction

The imagePRESS C7011VPS / C7010VPS Series is equipped with an efficient, reliable output recovery in case of an error. By factory default, the output recovery is set to [Normal]. After the error is solved, the job continues at the page where the error occurred automatically.

However, some printing environments require that multiple copies must be avoided. For example, in transactions involving the printing of valuable documents such as cheques. In such an environment, the [Output recovery] setting of your IPDS setup must be set to [Suppressed].

When the output recovery is suppressed, the printer will not automatically recover output. All pending pages in the printer will be deleted and the stack will be ejected. The host system and the operator are responsible for the recovery. The operator must restart the job manually on the correct page.

The tables below describe what happens when either the normal output recovery or the suppressed output recovery is selected.

Normal output recovery in IPDS

Job Job progress states Normal output recov ery

End up in the output location after error re covery

Sheets printed suc- cessfully.

Are stacked at one of the output locations.

Sheets are in output location

Sheets copied to con- troller memory (in- cluding error pages).

Remain in controller memory.

Once the error is re- solved, the printer re- starts by printing the first page in the con- troller memory. 4

Output recovery in case of an error

226 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Job Job progress states Normal output recov ery

End up in the output location after error re covery

Sheets jammed in the machine.

The operator panel displays instructions on how to solve the paper jam. The opera- tor has to remove these the jammed sheets manually.

These sheets stay in the memory of the controller. Once the printer resumes print- ing, these pages will be printed again.

Sheets in host memo- ry.

Remain in host mem- ory.

These sheets stay in the host memory. When the printer starts printing, these pages will be copied and sent to the con- troller.

Suppressed output recovery in IPDS

Pages that are copied to the memory of the controller are deleted from the system. The operator must send these missing pages as a new transaction print job to the printer.

Job Job progress states Suppressed output re covery

End up in the output location after error re covery

Sheets printed suc- cessfully

Are stacked at one of the output locations.

Sheets are in output location 4

Output recovery in case of an error

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 227

Job Job progress states Suppressed output re covery

End up in the output location after error re covery

Sheets copied to con- troller memory (in- cluding error pages).

Are deleted complete- ly.

These sheets are not delivered to the out- put location.

Sheets jammed in the machine.

The operator panel displays instructions on how to solve the paper jam. The opera- tor has to remove these the jammed sheets manually.

These sheets are not delivered to the out- put location.

Sheets in host memo- ry.

Remain in host mem- ory.

Once the error is re- solved, the printer re- starts by printing the first page in the host memory.

Output recovery in case of an error

228 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

PCL

Media Messages (PCL)

Introduction

The media catalog: Contains a list of predefined media and their attributes. Is an essential part of the system behavior of the imagePRESS C7011VPS / C7010VPS Series. Helps you to print your jobs more easily while using the correct media.

Response to Media Messages

For transaction printing, the content of the paper trays (in terms of media from the media catalog) is translated into a format that the controller understands. However, the controller receives only a limited amount of information (name or size of the media). This can lead to miscommunication where the controller misses a media requirement. Then the controller will ask for the required media via a message on the control panel. This [Media message] indicates the name or size of the missing media.

Your response to the [Media message] depends on the mode in which the printer works, either: The tray-to-tray mode, or The tray-to-media mode.

PCL

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 229

Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Media Mode (PCL)

Procedure

1. A message on the control panel indicates that a media is missing. Select one of the following actions as a response to the message. Press [ Assign media ].

Continue with step 2 when you select this option. Press [Continue]. Press [ Cancel stream ].

The print job is stopped. You can now solve the problem. You will most likely be able to solve the problem on the server.

NOTE The following steps apply only when you chose to assign a media.

2. From the list of media, select the media that must be used as the media the controller is asking for, and touch [OK]. If you do not select media from the media catalog with the requested size or name, the printer will select a media with the default size.

3. Select one of the 16 memory locations of the logical-tray table to be used for the required media. Note that the media that was previously allocated to that memory position in the setup will be overwritten. Then that media will no longer be available to the transaction stream. Now you can assign other media or continue the print job.

Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Media Mode (PCL)

230 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Tray Mode (PCL)

Procedure

1. A message on the control panel indicates that a media is missing. Select one of the following actions as a response to the message. Press [ Assign media ].

Continue with step two when you select this option. Press [Continue]. Press [ Cancel stream ].

The print job is stopped. You can now solve the problem. You will most likely be able to solve the problem on the server.

NOTE The following steps two and three apply only when you chose to assign a media.

2. From the list of media, select the media that will be used as the media the controller is asking for and touch [OK]. The media will now be displayed with the name that is defined in the media catalog. If you do not select media from the media catalog with the requested size or name, the printer will select a media with the default size.

3. Select the paper tray where you want to load the required media and touch [OK]. 4. Load the media. 5. Close the paper tray. 6. Press [OK].

Now you can assign other media or continue the print job.

Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Tray Mode (PCL)

Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs 231

Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Tray Mode (PCL)

232 Chapter 8 - Carry out print jobs

Chapter 9 Carry out copy jobs

General information

Introduction to the copy function

Introduction

The copy function enables you to copy paper originals. You can define the settings of the copy jobs manually or by using templates. Templates contain predefined settings for recurring types of copy jobs.

The copy function contains a number of factory default templates, for example for copying mixed-size originals or combining several sets of originals. Furthermore, you can define customized templates. The factory default templates are directly available when you access the copy function. When you select one of these templates, the system sets the typical settings for the selected type of copy job automatically. Next you can define all other settings for the originals and the output.

The illustration and the table below show the factory default templates you can use to start a copy job.

Illustration

[64] Start a copy job

General information

234 Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs

The factory default templates

Overview of the templates

Template When to use

[Copy job] Copy originals that have the same media size and only require simple settings, for example two-sided or a staple.

[Combined copy job] Combine several sets of originals with the same or mixed media size, and create one single copy job. When you select this template, the possibility to add subsets is al- ready displayed.

[To DocBox]

NOTE [To DocBox]is only visible when your system is equipped with the optional Doc- Box function.

Send the job to the DocBox to get extended possibilities to pro- grammed each page separately. When you select this template, the destination of the copy job is set to the first available DocBox. The destination is always set to this DocBox, even when a different copy job destination has been defined for the active workflow profile. However, you can change the DocBox to which the job must be sent.

[Booklet job] Create booklets from paper originals. When you select this template: The [Layout] setting is set to [Booklet], and The [Media] setting is set to A3/Tabloid, because the system as-

sumes you want to create booklets of A4/LTR originals.

[Last used] Reuse the settings of the previous copy job for your new copy job.

NOTE You cannot use [Last used] when the previous job was a scan job or a combined copy job.

[ Mixed size] Copy a set of originals that consists of different media sizes. The output will also consist of these different media sizes.

Introduction to the copy function

Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs 235

Description of the copy job settings

Introduction

When you make a copy, you can define the following. How the originals look. How the output must look. Generic settings for the whole job.

To improve the productivity, the system defines a number of logical settings for the [Original] and the [Output] automatically. However, you can overrule these automated settings manually. The automated settings have the prefix [Auto].

Illustration

1

2

3

4

5

[65] The settings window for copy jobs

Number Pane Description

1 [Original] The [Original] pane shows the settings you can de- fine for the paper originals

2 [Output] The [Output] pane shows the settings you can de- fine for the job

3 [Job] The [Job] pane shows the generic settings you can define for the whole job

4 Preview The preview displays the settings you defined for the output. 4

Description of the copy job settings

236 Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs

Number Pane Description

5 Action buttons The buttons in this section allow you to select ac- tions, for example, save settings to a template, can- cel a job, or start scanning. With the optional [Page programming] function, you can insert pages and define the media and fin- ishing settings for the page ranges in a job.

Settings for the original

Setting Icons and val ues

Description

[1- or 2-sided]

[Auto]

The automatically set value from the original document.

[1-sided]

Only the front side contains an image or text.

[2-sided]

Both the front side and the back side contain an image or text.

[Original type]

[Portrait left]

The original has a vertical format (height > width). The binding edge is at the left-hand side. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image or text is in readable form.

[Portrait top]

The original has a vertical format (height > width). The binding edge of the original is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Landscape left]

The original has a horizontal format (width > height). The binding edge of the original is at the left-hand side. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text is in readable form.

[Landscape top]

The original has a horizontal format (width > height). The binding edge of the original is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back side of the sheet is in readable form.

4

Description of the copy job settings

Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs 237

Setting Icons and val ues

Description

[Size]

A4, A3, Letter, Ledger, etc. Original on the glass plate: Select a predefined size from the list, or Enter the media format of the original.

When your original has a non-standard size, you can use the - and + but- tons to enter the exact measures. You can enter the measures in steps of 1 mm / 0.01". The text of the[Size] button changes into [Custom].

Originals in the automatic document feeder: The automatic document feeder does not detect the size of the originals au-

tomatically.

[Portrait]

[Landscape]

Original on the glass plate: indicate the orientation of the original. Originals in the automatic document feeder: the orientation of the originals is detected automatically.

[Background]

[Background suppression]

For originals with a vague or yellowish background, you can use [Background suppression] to create copies and scans with a white background.

Settings for the output

Setting Values Description

[1- or 2-sided] [Auto]

The automatically set value from the original document.

[1-sided]

The output contains an image on 1 side.

[2-sided]

The output contains an image on both sides.

4

Description of the copy job settings

238 Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs

Setting Values Description

[Binding edge] [Auto]

The automatically set value from the original document.

[Portrait left]

The output has a vertical format (height > width). The binding edge is at the left-hand side. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image is in readable form.

[Portrait top]

The output has a vertical format (height > width). The binding edge of the original is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image on the back side of the sheet is in readable form. This means that every back side of a 2-sided original is upside down compared to the front side.

[Landscape left]

The output has a horizontal format (width > height). The binding edge of the original is at the left-hand side. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the text or im- age is in readable form.

[Landscape top]

The output has a horizontal format (width > height). The binding edge of the original is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image on the back side of the sheet is in readable form. This means that every back side of a 2-sided original is upside down compared to the front side.

[Media]

Names of the media in the media catalog

Here you can select the media for the job. The list displays all the media that are available in the media catalog includ- ing the temporary media. The media catalog is a list of me- dia that you can define in the Settings Editor. 4

Description of the copy job settings

Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs 239

Setting Values Description

[Cover] [Front]

Here you can indicate that the copy job requires a front cov- er. When the setting is enabled the corresponding setting [Media] becomes enabled.

[Print sides] Here you can select the sides of the front cover you want to print on. [Both sides] [Front side] [Back side] [None]

[Media] When the setting [Front] is enabled, you can select a media from the media catalog.

[Back]

Here you can indicate that the copy job requires a back cov- er. When the setting is enabled the corresponding setting [Media] becomes enabled.

[Media] When the setting [Back] is enabled, you can select a media from the media catalog.

[Print sides] Here you can select the sides of the back cover you want to print on. [Both sides] [Front side] [Back side] [None]

[Layout] [Normal]

The machine prints the pages with no special layout set- tings.

[Booklet]

The machine prints the pages in booklet order. The pages 1 and 4 are printed on the front side of a sheet. The pages 2 and 3 are printed on the back side of a sheet.

[Same up]

The machine prints the same image multiple times next to each other. By default, the system keeps the size of the origi- nals. When you copy A4 originals with the setting [Same up] and [Images per sheet] is 2, the machine will automatically print the job on A3, for example. When you cut the A3 sheets in two, you get 2 identical A4 copies of your document. To de- crease your A4 originals to A5 prints, you can use the zoom function or select another media type.

[Multiple up]

The machine prints multiple consecutive images on 1 side of a sheet, next to each other.

[Images per sheet]

Here you can select the number of images you want to print when you select [Same up] and [Same-up flipped]. 4

Description of the copy job settings

240 Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs

Setting Values Description

[Zoom]

[Fit to page] You can select a media size for the output that differs from the media size of the original. When the [Fit to page] setting is enabled, the system scales the original in such a way that the image fits on the selected media size of the output.

[Percent] Use this setting to change the zoom manually within the range 25% to 400%.

[Align] [Auto]

The automatically set value from the original document.

[Top left]

An image on a sheet may be smaller than the media size of the output, for example because you scaled the image to 70% of its original size. The [Align] setting allows you to in- dicate the position of the image on the sheet. [Top left] moves the image to the upper left corner of the sheet.

[Top center]

[Top center] moves the image to the center at the top of the sheet.

[Top right]

[Top right] moves the image to the upper right corner of the sheet.

[Center left]

[Center left] moves the image to center of the left side of the sheet.

[Center]

[Center] moves the image to the center of the sheet.

[Center right]

[Center right] moves the image to the center of the right side of the sheet.

[Bottom left]

[Bottom left] moves the image to the lower left corner of the sheet.

[Bottom center]

[Bottom center] moves the image to the center of the bottom side of the sheet.

[Bottom right]

[Bottom right] moves the image to the lower right corner of the sheet.

4

Description of the copy job settings

Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs 241

Setting Values Description

[Shift]

[Margin shift] Use this setting to increase or decrease the margin. By de- fault, the values of the front side and the back side are inter- locked. This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical. If you want to define a different value for each side, press . The icon changes to the unlocked status. Now you can de- fine the values for the front side and the back side separate- ly.

[Image shift] Use this setting to shift the image horizontally or vertically. By default, the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked. This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical. If you want to define a different value for each side, press . The icon changes to the unlocked status. Now you can de- fine the values for the front side and the back side separate- ly. 4

Description of the copy job settings

242 Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery]

[Output loca- tion]

Select the output location for the copy job. Depending on the settings for your copy job, the machine automatically suggests the preferred output location for your job. Howev- er, you can manually overrule this suggestion.

[Sort]

[By page] The output is sorted by page.

[By set] The output is sorted by set.

[Offset stack- ing]

[Each set] Each set that gets to an output location will be shifted on top of the previous set. This setting is only available when in the workflow profile offset stacking is set to [Sets (as in job)].

[Off] All the sets or jobs that get to an output location will be stacked in one straight pile.

[Advanced set- tings] -> [Sheet order]

[Auto] The automatically set value from the original document.

[Face up] Deliver the prints face up, first sheet on top.

[Face up reverse] Deliver the prints face up, last sheet on top.

[Face down] Deliver the prints face down, first sheet on top.

[Face down reverse] Deliver the prints face down, last sheet on top. 4

Description of the copy job settings

Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs 243

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery]

[Advanced set- tings] -> [Sheet orientation]

[Auto] The automatically set value from the original document.

[Header up LEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in portrait position (vertical).

[Header up SEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in land- scape position (horizontal).

[Header down LEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bottom side and in portrait position (vertical).

[Header down SEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bottom side and in landscape position (horizontal).

[Advanced set- tings] -> [Print order]

[Front/back] Default value. The front page on the front, the back page on the back.

[Back/front] Puts the front page on the back and the back page on the front.

[Advanced set- tings] -> [Rota- tion]

[0 degrees] [180 degrees]

Rotates the prints 180 degrees.

[Margin erase]

Margins of a document sometimes contain notes or punch holes, for example. The machine allows you to hide these el- ements on the copy. With the + and - buttons of the [Margin erase] setting you can define how much margin of the origi- nal you want to erase. You can enter a value up to 100 mm / 3.94". 4

Description of the copy job settings

244 Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs

Setting Values Description

[Adjust image]

[Brightness] With the [Brightness] setting you can darken (-1 to -3) or lighten (1-3) your print.

[Contrast] With the [Contrast] setting, you can change the differences between dark and light areas on your print. A negative value reduces the difference, a positive value increases the differ- ence.

[Color] With the [Color] setting, you can adjust all colors of the im- age to more closely resemble the colors of the original, copy, or print.

[Color/Black & white] [Black and

white]

Here you can choose to print in color or in black&white.

[Color]

[Binding] [None]

[1 staple]

[2 staples]

[Saddle stitch- ing]

[Saddle press- ing]

Here you can define the required number of staples. Further- more you can define where you want the staples with the [Location] option. The available locations for the 1 staple option: [Top left] [Top right] [Bottom left] [Bottom right]

The available locations for the 2 staples option: [Left edge] [Top edge] [Bottom edge] [Right edge]

Check the preview for the result of the selection.

[Folding] Here you can define the folding method for the prints. Fur- thermore you can define on what side to print with the [Print method] option: [Print inside] [Print outside]

Check the preview for the result of the selection. 4

Description of the copy job settings

Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs 245

Setting Values Description

[Trimming] [None]

[Trim size]

Trims the long edge, top edge and bottom edge according to the specified values. The minimum trim size is 2 mm / 0.02".

[Finishing size]

Trims the prints to a selected default size, for example A4, A5 etc. You can also define a custom size.

[Punching]

[None]

[2 holes]

[3 holes]

[4 holes]

[Die set de- pendent]

Here you can define the amount and location of the punch holes.

Location [Left] [Top] [Right] [Bottom]

Settings for the whole job

Setting Values Description

[Job name] By default, all copy jobs are named 'Copy job' with a se- quence number. To identify your copy job more easily in the list of waiting jobs or scheduled jobs, you can change the name of the copy job. When you touch the [Job name] but- ton a keyboard appears.

[Number of sets]

Use this setting to define the number of copies. You can en- ter a value from 1 - 65,000. The default value is 1. 4

Description of the copy job settings

246 Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs

Setting Values Description

[Destination] [Scheduled jobs]

Add the copy job to the list of [Scheduled jobs] in the [Jobs] view.

[Waiting jobs] Add the copy job to the list or [Waiting jobs] in the [Jobs] view.

[DocBox] Add the copy job to the [DocBox] (if licensed).

[Separator sheets]

[On] [Off]

When the Separator sheets setting is enabled, a separate sheet will be inserted automatically before each set of a job to create a clear distinction between two sets. Separator sheets are always empty. In the Settings Editor, you can se- lect a media from the Media catalog to be used as separator sheets. There you can also indicate the feed direction of the separator sheets (long-edge feed or short-edge feed).

Description of the copy job settings

Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs 247

Feed originals to the ADF (optional)

Introduction

You can use the ADF to feed a stack of originals at once, face up. Feeding originals in the portrait position is referred to as long-edge feed (LEF/vertical). Feeding originals in the landscape position is referred to as short-edge feed (SEF/horizontal).

NOTE If the top edge of the original is not aligned with the back edge of the slide guide, your original

may not be scanned correctly, depending on the copy mode that you have set. Originals of the A4, B5 and LTR sizes can be placed either vertically or horizontally. However,

the scanning speed for horizontally placed originals is somewhat slower than vertically placed originals.

Horizontally placed A4 and B5 originals are referred to as A4R and B5R. Horizontally placed LTR originals are referred to as LTRR A3, B4, 11" x 17" and LGL originals must be placed horizontally. A5 and STMT must be placed

vertically.

You can place the following originals into the ADF: Weight

- One-sided scanning: 50 to 216 g/m / 13 to 57 lb bond - Two-sided scanning: 50 to 216 g/m / 13 to 57 lb bond (A3, B4, A4R, B5R: 50 to 200 g/m / 13 lb bond to 54 lb bond) (11" x 17", LGL, LTRR: 50 to 200 g/m / 13 to 53 lb bond)

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, or A5 (A5 originals cannot be placed horizontally. (A5R))

11"x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT (STMT originals cannot be placed horizontally. (STMTR))

Tray Capacity: up to 100 sheets (80 g/m / 22 lb bond)

IMPORTANT Thin originals may become creased, if used in a high temperature or high humidity

environment. Do not place the following types of originals into the feeder:

- Originals with tears or large binding holes - Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds - Clipped or stapled originals - Carbon backed paper or other originals which may not feed smoothly - Transparencies and other highly transparent originals

If the same original is fed through the feeder repeatedly, the original may fold or become creased, and make feeding impossible. Limit repeated feeding to a maximum of 30 times (this number varies, depending on the type and quality of the original).

If the feeder rollers are dirty from scanning originals written in pencil, perform the feeder cleaning procedure. Clean the automatic document feeder rollers on page 354

Always smooth out any folds in your originals before placing them into the feeder.

Procedure

1. Adjust the slide guides to fit the size of your originals.

Feed originals to the ADF (optional)

248 Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs

2. Place the originals face up into the original supply tray until the original set indicator (1) is lit.

1

IMPORTANT Do not add or remove originals while they are being scanned. When scanning is complete, remove the originals from the original output tray to avoid paper

jams.

NOTE When you are enlarging an A4 or B5 original onto A3 or B4 paper, place the original

horizontally. The scanned originals are output to the original output area in the order they are fed into the

feeder.

Related information

The automatic document feeder - ADF (optional) on page 26

Feed originals to the ADF (optional)

Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs 249

Feed originals to the SADF (optional)

Introduction

You can use the SADF to feed heavy or lightweight originals one by one, face down. Feeding originals in a portrait position is referred to as long edge feed (LEF). Feeding originals in a landscape position is referred to as short edge feed (SEF).

You can place the following originals into the SADF tray: Weight:

- 38 to 216 g/m Size:

- A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, or A5 (A5 originals cannot be placed horizontally. (A5R))

Procedure

1. Open the SADF tray.

2. Adjust the slide guides to fit the size of your original.

3. Place your original one sheet at a time, face down into the SADF tray, sliding it forward gently as far as it will go.

IMPORTANT Make sure to place only one original at a time. If more than one original is placed at a time, a

paper jam may occur. If your original is curled, flatten it out as much as possible before placing it into the SADF tray.

NOTE Once scans are made from the originals, the originals are returned to the original output tray. When you need to make another scan, set the scan mode and place the original in the SADF

tray.

Feed originals to the SADF (optional)

250 Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs

4. When scanning is complete, close the SADF tray.

CAUTION Close the SADF tray gently to avoid catching your hand, as this may result in personal injury.

Feed originals to the SADF (optional)

Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs 251

Put originals on the glass plate

Introduction

You can use the color scanner to copy bound originals (such as books and magazines), heavy or lightweight originals, and transparencies.

You can place an original either vertically or horizontally. Always align the top edge of your original with the back edge of the glass plate (by the arrow in the top left corner).

Procedure

1. Lift the feeder/platen cover.

1

IMPORTANT This machine is equipped with an open/close sensor on the feeder/platen cover (see circled area in the above illustration). When placing originals on the glass plate, lift the feeder/platen cover approximately 300 mm / 11.8" so that the sensor detaches from the feeder/platen cover.

2. Place your originals face down.

3. Gently close the feeder/platen cover.

Put originals on the glass plate

252 Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs

Clean the glass plate

Introduction

Clean the glass plate/original feeding belt/underside of the platen cover by following the procedure below.

IMPORTANT If the glass plate/original feeding belt/underside of the platen cover is dirty, the original may not be scanned clearly, or the size of the original may be detected incorrectly.

NOTE Cleaning the underside of the platen cover is necessary only if the platen cover is attached.

Procedure

1. Clean the glass plate/original feeding belt/underside of the platen cover with a cloth dampened with water or a mild cleaning agent, and wipe them with a soft, dry cloth. Move the original feeding belt manually, and clean the section that is hidden.

CAUTION Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or break the machine.

NOTE If black streaks appear on the printed output when using the feeder, carefully clean the area indicated by the label that is attached to the glass plate.

Clean the glass plate

Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs 253

Copy your documents

Make a copy

Introduction

A basic copy is a copy for which you only define a few settings before you touch Start , such as: 1-sided or 2-sided A staple The number of copies required.

Before you begin

Remove staples or paper clips. Make sure that the originals in the automatic document feeder have the same size. Make sure that the automatic document feeder does not contain more than 100 sheets (80 g/m

or 20 lb bond). Make sure that the originals are not curled.

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the ADF, or place 1 original face down on the glass plate. 2. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Copy job]. 3. If required, define the settings and the required number of copies. 4. Select [Scheduled jobs] in the [Destination] field to start the copy job immediately. 5. Press .

The job is added to the list of [Scheduled jobs].

Copy your documents

254 Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs

Create templates to use for recurring jobs

Introduction

When you regularly carry out identical copy or scan jobs, you can create custom templates for them. The custom templates contain the default settings for these jobs.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. 2. Select an existing copy or scan job template. 3. Make the required settings for the recurring job. 4. Touch [ Save as template] to save the settings to a custom template. 5. Enter the name of the custom template and touch [OK]. 6. Press [Cancel].

The custom template is now available at [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. 7. To edit the template, touch the custom template for 2 seconds.

You can now select the following options. [Rename]. [Move].

Touch a blue line in front of a template to indicate the new location. The location of the [Last used] template is set.

[Delete]

NOTE Touch the [Last used] template for 2 seconds to save the settings of the last job to a template.

Create templates to use for recurring jobs

Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs 255

Combining subsets into one document

Introduction

You can copy or scan several sets of originals to one document or file with subsets. With the optional [Page programming] function, you can add pages, for example, tab sheets, and define the media and finishing settings for each page and subset.

Procedure

1. Place the first subset face up into the ADF. 2. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Combined copy job]. 3. Define the subset settings for both in the [Original] and [Output].

NOTE Some settings that you define for the first subset apply to the whole job, the [Type] and [Resolution] settings, for example. These settings are fixed and are grayed out after scanning the first subset.

4. Press [Scan]. 5. Put the next subset into the automatic document feeder or on the glass plate. 6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for all subsequent subsets.

A number indicates the order in which the subsets have been scanned.

NOTE When you combine 1-sided and 2-sided originals, you can define whether a new subset must continue on a new sheet or on the previous sheet.

7. Touch [Ready] when the last subset is scanned and processed. A full overview of all the scanned subsets appears in the right-hand pane. If required, you can add, insert, delete or edit subsets.

8. If required, use the optional [Page programming] function to insert pages and define the media and finishing settings per page range.

9. Touch [Ready] again to close the [Page programming] function. 10. Press .

Combining subsets into one document

256 Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs

Access other functions during a copy job or scan job

Introduction

When you access the copy function or scan function from the [Copy/Scan] view, the job window opens in full screen mode. Therefore, the buttons that give access to the other system functions are not visible. However, you can access the other functions while you define the settings for your copy job or scan job.

NOTE The machine will remember all the job settings you already defined.

Procedure

1. In the job window, touch [Minimize]. The [Copy/Scan] view appears. The navigation buttons at the bottom of the operator panel become visible and accessible.

2. Carry out the desired actions. 3. Press [Resume job].

Access other functions during a copy job or scan job

Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs 257

The zoom behavior

Introduction

When you carry out a copy job or scan job, you can use the Zoom function to reduce or enlarge an image, for example: Copy an A4 / LTR original on an A3 / 11"x 17" sheet. The system enlarges the image Copy an A3 / 11"x 17" original on an A4 / LTR sheet. The system reduces the image Copy an A4 / LTR original with a small illustration on an A4 / LTR sheet, and at the same time

enlarge the illustration.

By factory default, the zoom function is set to Fit to page. This makes sure that no information is lost. To change the zoom factor manually, touch the - and + buttons of the Zoom function in the job window. If you use non-standard size originals, you must use the glass plate.

The zoom function for originals in the automatic document feeder is different from the zoom function for originals on the glass plate.

Zoom behavior

Original Starting point of the zoom function

Automatic document feeder Center

Glass plate Upper left-hand corner

This section describes the characteristics of the zoom function when you use the automatic document feeder or the glass plate.

NOTE The zoom function works identical for both copy jobs and scan jobs.

Scan from the automatic document feeder and use the zoom function

The following table shows the zoom behavior of the machine when the originals are scanned from the automatic document feeder. The focus is on the centre of the original.

Scan from the automatic document feeder using the zoom function

Illustration Description

The original is placed face up and in readable form into the auto- matic document feeder. The center of the original is a fixed point and is used as the origin of the image.

Result of a scan with a 100% zoom factor.

Result of a scan with a 50% zoom factor.

NOTE The center of the image is fixed. 4

The zoom behavior

258 Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs

Illustration Description

Result of a scan with a 200% zoom factor.

NOTE The center of the image is fixed.

Scan from the glass plate and use the zoom function

The following table shows the zoom behavior of the machine when the originals are scanned from the glass plate. The focus is on the upper right-hand corner of the original (upper left-hand corner of the glass plate).

Scan from the glass plate using the zoom function

Illustration Description

The original is placed face-down and in readable form in the upper left-hand corner on the glass plate. The upper left-hand corner of the glass plate is a fixed point and is used as the origin of the image.

Result on paper of a scan with a 100% zoom factor.

Result on paper of a scan with a 50% zoom factor.

NOTE The upper right-hand corner of the image is fixed.

Result on paper of a scan with a 200% zoom factor.

NOTE The upper right-hand corner of the image is fixed.

The zoom behavior

Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs 259

Rename a copy job

Introduction

When you carry out a new copy job, the system creates an automatic name for the job. The default name 'Copy Job' followed by a sequence number is displayed in the [Job name] field. However, you can rename the copy job into a name of your choice. This name helps you recognize the job in the list of [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or in the [DocBox] (optional).

Procedure

1. In the job window, touch [Job name]. A keyboard appears.

2. Touch 'Backspace' until the current name is deleted. 3. Touch the characters to enter a new name. 4. Press [OK].

Rename a copy job

260 Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs

Copy non-standard size originals

Introduction

You can use the automatic document feeder to copy originals in a simple and quick way. The automatic document feeder supports the following standard media sizes. A5, A5R, A4, A4R, A3, B5, B5R, and B4 LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTL, 13" x 19.2" (330.2 mm x 487.7 mm), 12" x 18" (305 mm x 457 mm), 11"

x 17" (279 mm x 432 mm)

If more than one media fits, the user must select the desired media. The selected media will be the default media.

The glass plate is the location where you usually place originals that the automatic document feeder cannot handle. The glass plate cannot detect the dimensions of your original. When you copy from the glass plate, you must always define the size of your original.

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the ADF, or place 1 original face down on the glass plate. 2. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Copy job]. 3. In the [Original] section, touch [Size]. 4. Use the - and + buttons to enter the correct media size. 5. Press [OK].

The [Size] button displays the defined size. 6. In the [Output] section, touch [Media]. 7. Select a media from the list and touch [OK].

The setting [Zoom] determines how the copy will look. When [Zoom] ->[Fit to page] is enabled, the original will be scaled to fit the media size of the output. When [Zoom] -> [Fit to page] is disabled, you can enter a custom zoom percentage.

Copy non-standard size originals

Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs 261

Scan now and print later (postponed copying)

Introduction

You can scan an original document now and print the document later. This is called postponed copying. To use this function, you must send a copy job to the list of [Waiting jobs] or to the [DocBox].

When to do

Only change the destination to [Waiting jobs] or [DocBox] when the default destination of copy jobs is [Scheduled jobs]. The default destination of copy jobs is defined in the workflow profiles.

Procedure

1. Put the originals face up and in readable form into the automatic document feeder. 2. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Copy job]. 3. Define the settings for your copy job. 4. Touch [Destination] to select [Waiting jobs] or [DocBox]. 5. If required, touch [Job name] to rename the job. This helps you to recognize the job more easily. 6. Touch [Start] .

The job is sent to the selected destination. There you can select and print the job later.

Scan now and print later (postponed copying)

262 Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs

Finish the output

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the ADF, or place 1 original face down on the glass plate. 2. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Copy job]. 3. At the [Binding] setting, select the required number of staples and the location of the staples. 4. At the [Punching] setting, select the required number of holes. 5. At the [Folding] setting, select the folding method. 6. At the [Trimming] setting, define the trim settings 7. If required, define the other settings for the original document and the output. 8. Enter the generic values in the [Job] section. 9. Touch [Start] .

Finish the output

Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs 263

Adjust the image to improve the copy and scan quality

Introduction

The [Adjust image] setting enables you to define the copy and scan quality manually. Depending on the situation, you can describe the original or the copy/scan.

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the ADF, or place 1 original face down on the glass plate. 2. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Copy job]. 3. Press [Adjust image].

A window opens. 4. Determine if you need to describe the original or the copy/scan.

If the original is not okay, describe the original. If the original is okay, but you want a different copy or scan, describe the copy.

5. If required, adjust the following settings. [Brightness] [Contrast] [Color]

6. Press [OK].

Adjust the image to improve the copy and scan quality

264 Chapter 9 - Carry out copy jobs

Chapter 10 Carry out scan jobs

Configure the scan function

Introduction to the scan function

Definition

The scan function enables you to create digital documents from paper originals. You can scan paper originals from the automatic document feeder (ADF) and from the glass plate of the scanner.

Scan Types and Output Locations

NOTE The scan function requires a software license. When you have a license, scan to file, scan to email and scan to USB are available. Scan to DocBox requires an additional software license for the DocBox function.

Scan types and output locations

Scan type Output location

Scan to file FTP server

Scan to email SMTP server. The file is attached to an email message.

Scan to USB USB flash drive

Scan to DocBox PRISMAsync controller

Scan to SMB SMB server

Condition

The customer must have a fully configured FTP and SMTP server available. The settings in the Settings Editor are intended to realize a connection between the printer and the customer's FTP and SMTP servers.

Configuration

To use the scan-to-file and scan-to-email functions, the following items must be configured in the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller. Scan to file ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity]) Scan to email ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity]) LDAP server ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity]), if available. Otherwise, you can use an address

list file (ral.csv) to search for recipients. A scan profiles file (sjt.csv) in which the scan-to-email and scan-to-file templates are defined

([Workflow] -> [Scan profiles]). Scan to SMB ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity])

Configure the scan function

266 Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs

Illustration

[66] The Copy/Scan view on the control panel

Usage

You can use the scan-to-email and scan-to-file templates that are defined in the sjt.csv file through the [Copy/Scan] section on the control panel ([Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. The names of the templates, which are defined in the sjt.csv file, are visible there (in the illustration above PDF Printing 600 dpi, for example). To scan a document, select the required template. Next, the job window opens. There you can change a number of settings for this scan job. However, these changes are only valid for this job. The default settings of the scan template will not change.

The scan-to-USB function is accessible through the USB button in the [Jobs] section on the control panel. The left-hand side of the control panel contains the slot for the USB flash drive.

The scan-to-DocBox function is accessible through the [To DocBox] tile in the [Copy/Scan] section.

Removal of scan jobs

The PRISMAsync controller buffers the scan jobs until the jobs are delivered to the specified output location. You can remove scan jobs from the buffer manually or automatically. Manually via the printer control panel: Touch [Jobs] -> list of [Scan jobs] -> select a scan job ->

touch [Delete]. Manually via the Settings Editor: Access the Settings Editor -> click [Support] ->

[Troubleshooting] -> [Clean the scan job export buffer]. Automatically: The PRISMAsync controller removes a buffered scan job automatically 48 hours

after a scan job has finished.

Introduction to the scan function

Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs 267

Configure the settings for scan to file

Introduction

To use the scan-to-file function, the system administrator must configure the function in the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity]). A scan job will be sent to the FTP server configured.

How to Configure the Settings for Scan to File

The table below describes the settings that the system administrator must configure in the Settings Editor.

Settings for scan to file in the Settings Editor

Setting Description

[Connection test] Click [Connection test] to check if the scan-to-file func- tion is configured correctly.

[Scan to file, scan to email and scan to SMB enabled]

This setting must be set to [Yes] to use the scan func- tion.

[Host name / IP address] The name or IP address of the FTP server that receives the scan jobs.

[Port] The TCP port number of the FTP server. The default val- ue is 21.

[User name] The user name that is used to access the FTP server when sending scan jobs.

[Password] The password that corresponds with the user name.

[Destination directory] The directory on the FTP server to which the scan jobs will be sent.

Configure the settings for scan to file

268 Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs

Configure the settings for scan to email

Introduction

To use the scan-to-email function, the system administrator must configure the function in the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity]). A scan job will be sent as an attachment to the email address defined.

How to Configure the Settings for Scan to Email

The table below describes the settings that the system administrator must configure in the Settings Editor.

Settings for scan to email in the Settings Editor

Setting Description

[Connection test] Click [Connection test] to check if the scan-to-email func- tion is configured correctly.

[Mailserver host name / IP address] The name or IP address of the SMTP server that handles the emails containing the scan jobs.

[Port] The TCP port number of the SMTP server. The default value is 25.

[User name] The user name that is used to access the SMTP server when sending scan jobs.

[Password] The password that corresponds with the user name.

[Sender] The name that will be displayed as the sender of the email that contains the scan job.

[Maximum attachment size] The maximum size allowed for the attached scan job in MB. You can enter a value from 0 - 2147483647 in steps of one. The value '0' means unlimited. The default value is 5 MB.

[Scanning to any email address al- lowed]

When enabled, you can send the scan job to any email address. You must enter the email address on the con- trol panel.

Configure the settings for scan to email

Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs 269

Configure the settings for the LDAP server

Introduction

When the scan-to-email function is enabled, a list of user codes and matching email addresses is required. When a user enters his/her unique code on the printer operator panel, the scan job will be sent to the matching email address.

The list of user codes and matching email addresses can be available at the following places: On an LDAP server, if available If an LDAP server is unavailable, in an address list file (default name: ral.csv), which must be

uploaded to the PRISMAsync controller through the Settings Editor ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity]).

When a user enters the user code, the system will first look for a matching email address in the LDAP database. If the system does not find a matching email address there, or if an LDAP server is unavailable, the system searches the address list file for the matching email address.

Configure the settings for the LDAP server

The table below describes the settings the system administrator must configure in the Settings Editor.

Settings for LDAP in the Settings Editor

Setting Description

[Connection test] Click [Connection test] to check if the connection to the LDAP server works correctly.

[Enabled] This setting must be set to [Yes] to realize a connection between the system and the LDAP server.

[Host name / IP address] The name or IP address of the LDAP server where user information for scan to email can be retrieved.

[Port] The TCP port number of the LDAP server. The default value is 389.

[User name] The user name that is used to access the LDAP server.

[Password] The password that corresponds with the user name.

[Search database] The path to the LDAP directory that contains the user identifiers, for example o=YourOrganization.

[User identification] The type of user identification that must be searched for, for example a telephone number or employee ID.

[Email address attribute] The LDAP attribute that contains the email address of the user, for example 'mail'.

Configure the settings for the LDAP server

270 Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs

Use the address list file (ral.csv)

Introduction

If an LDAP server is not available, you must use a remote address list file (ral.csv) for scan to email. This file must contain the unique user codes and matching email addresses. The PRISMAsync controller stores the address list file. Proceed as follows: 1. Download the file via the Settings Editor ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity], scroll down to the

[LDAP] section -> [Download address list file]). 2. Edit the file in Microsoft Excel, for example. 3. Upload the file via the Settings Editor ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity], scroll down to the

[LDAP] section -> [Upload address list file]).

Syntax of the Address List File

The address list file must contain a header line (mandatory) and at least one line with an email recipient.

A "," or ";" separates the items in a record.

or separates records.

The header record shows the fields that the address list uses (ruid,address,comment).

A profile record contains the unique user codes and matching email addresses. ruid and address are mandatory. comment is optional.

Record items

Record items

Record item Description

ruid A unique user code, for example an employee number or tele- phone number. Maximum 20 digits. Leading zeros are allowed.

address The email address that matches the user code. Maximum 40 characters. Do not use the characters , , "," and ";".

comments Additional information, if required.

NOTE Do not change the header information.

Examples of Correct Profiles

01234,userA@companyX.com 56789,userB@organizationY.com

Use the address list file (ral.csv)

Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs 271

Use the scan profiles file (sjt.csv)

Introduction

When the scan function is licensed, the [Copy/Scan] section on the printer operator panel displays templates that give access to copy and scan functions. The scan templates are factory default templates that you can use to create custom templates from the operator panel. See Create templates to use for recurring jobs on page 255.

You can also create scan templates using a sjt.csv file with custom scan to file and scan to email settings. Proceed as follows: 1. Get an empty sjt.csv file from your printer supplier or copy a sjt.csv from an older

PRISMAsync controller. 2. Edit the file in Microsoft Excel, for example. 3. Upload the file via the Settings Editor ([Workflow] -> [Scan profiles] -> [Upload scan profiles]).

Each scan profile consists of a combination of individual settings for specific scan jobs, either scan to file or scan to email. The display name you define for a scan profile is shown in the [Copy/ Scan] section on the printer operator panel.

Syntax of the scan profiles file

NOTE In the scan profiles file, you can define a maximum of 99 scan profiles.

The scan profiles file must contain a header line (mandatory) and at least 1 line with a scan profile.

A "," or ";" separates the items in a record.

or separates records.

The header record shows the items that the scan profile uses (dispname,format,ilc,prefix,minnr,maxnr,name_nr_title,cfname,subfolder,postfix,OrigOrientation, OrigDuplex,OrigKind,OrigZoom,OrigFormat,DestFormat,DestQual,DestColor).

A profile record contains the unique settings for various scan job types. dispname,format,ilc,prefix,minnr,maxnr,name_nr_title and cfname are mandatory. The other record items are optional.

NOTE When you leave optional items empty, the system defines the settings automatically. However, you can change a number of settings via the printer operator panel.

Record items

Record items

Record item Description

dispname (display name)

The unique name of the scan profile that is displayed in the [Copy/Scan] section on the printer operator panel. Minimum 1 and maximum 40 characters. Do not use , ; . 4

Use the scan profiles file (sjt.csv)

272 Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs

Record item Description

format (file format)

The file format and compression used for the resulting scan file. TIFF G31D_MH

Multi-page TIFF CCITT Group 3 1D modified Huffman compressed images

TIFF G42D_Fax Multi-page TIFF CCITT.T6 Group 4 2D compressed im- ages

TIFF LZW Multi-page TIFF LZW compressed images

SINGLE TIFF G31D_MH Single-page TIFF CCITT Group 3 1D modified Huffman compressed images

SINGLE TIFF G42D_Fax Single-page TIFF CCITT.T6 Group 4 2D compressed images

SINGLE TIFF LZW Single-page TIFF LZW compressed images

PDF G31 D_MH PDF version 1.3 with Group 3 1D modified Huffman compressed images

PDF G42D_Fax PDF version 1.3 with Group 4 2D compressed images.

PDF LZW PDF version 1.3 with LZW compressed images

PDF JPG PDF with JPEG compressed images

JPG JPEG

ilc (Image Logic characteristics)

The best scan result for a specific purpose. 1

600 dpi. Optimized for printing on CopyPress systems 2

300 dpi. Optimized for viewing and archiving 3

600 dpi at 85 lpi. Optimized for printing on Demand- stream and other B&W systems

4 600 dpi at 106 lpi. Optimized for printing on Demand- stream and other B&W systems.

5 200 dpi

6 150 dpi

7 100 dpi

8 75 dpi 4

Use the scan profiles file (sjt.csv)

Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs 273

Record item Description

prefix (file name prefix)

The prefix can specify the application, for example ar- chive or email. The prefix is a fixed part of the file name. When you create a scan-to-email profile, you must use the prefix email. Maximum 8 characters. Use a-z, A-Z, 0-9, _.

minnr (minimum number of digits)

The minimum number of digits a user must enter when the scan profile is selected in the [Copy/Scan] section. The digits entered are stored in the file name. Minimum 0, maximum 20 digits.

maxnr (maximum number of digits)

The maximum number of digits a user must enter when the scan profile is selected in the [Copy/Scan] section. The digits entered are stored in the file name. Minimum 0, maximum 20 digits.

NOTE When minnr and maxnr are both 0, the system will not ask for a user code.

name_nr_title (dialogue title)

The title of the dialogue that appears when the user must enter a code to use the scan profile, as defined in and . The title must explain to the user which number is required. Maximum 40 characters. Do not use , ; .

cfname (file name feedback)

Activate an additional dialogue on the printer operator panel after starting a new scan job to write down the generated file name. The printer operator panel displays the dialogue title that is defined in name_nr_title. y: show the additional dialogue. n: do not show the additional dialogue.

subfolder (subfolder on scan server)

The path to a subfolder on the scan server where the files are stored. Maximum 150 characters. Do not use * ? : < > | .

postfix (file name postfix)

Add a postfix to the file name. For example, when the prefix is 'email', you can add an email address as a post- fix. Maximum 30 characters. Do not use / \ : * ? " < > | . 4

Use the scan profiles file (sjt.csv)

274 Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs

Record item Description

OrigOrientation (orientation of the originals)

The default orientation and binding of the originals on the scanner. portrait book portrait calendar landscape book landscape calendar

[67] portrait book

[68] portrait calendar

[69] landscape book

[70] landscape calendar

NOTE You can overrule this setting on the printer operator panel.

OrigDuplex (number of sides of the originals that will be scanned)

The number of sides of the originals on the scanner that will be scanned. on

The originals are scanned 2-sided off

The originals are scanned 1-sided

NOTE You can overrule this setting on the printer operator panel.

OrigKind (type of originals)

The image type of the originals. photo

The originals contain (mainly) photos or illustrations. text

The originals contain (mainly) text. auto

The system chooses the best settings automatically. mixed

The originals contain a mixture of photos and texts.

NOTE You can overrule this setting on the printer operator panel.

OrigZoom (zoom of the originals)

The percentage by which the originals on the scanner will be increased or decreased. Any value from 25 to 400. When this item remains empty, the value is 100. Then the originals and the output have the same size. 4

Use the scan profiles file (sjt.csv)

Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs 275

Record item Description

NOTE You can overrule this setting on the printer operator panel.

OrigFormat (paper size and feed direction of the originals)

The paper size and feed direction of the originals on the scanner, for example A4 lef. Paper sizes: A5 Statement 5.5x8.5 B5 Letter 8.5x11 A4 Foolscap Folio Legal 8.5x14 B4 A3 US Gov 8x10.5 Tabloid 11x17 Commercial Letter Gov 8.5x10 Legal Gov 8.5x12 Letter 8.25x10 Legal 8.5x13

Feed directions: sef (short-edge feed) lef (long-edge feed).

NOTE You can overrule this setting on the printer operator panel.

DestFormat (paper size of the output)

The paper size of the resulting scan file. Select a paper size from the list described in . You cannot select a feed direction.

NOTE You can overrule this setting on the printer operator panel.

DestQuality (quality of the output)

Define the quality as a percentage. This item is used for file types which support loss compression, JPG for ex- ample. For other file types, it is ignored. Any value from 1 to 100.

NOTE You can overrule this setting on the printer operator panel.

DestColor (type of color of the output)

Define the color mode of the resulting scan file, either color, grayscale or black & white. color grayscale blackAndwhite

NOTE You can overrule this setting on the printer operator panel.

Use the scan profiles file (sjt.csv)

276 Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs

NOTE Do not change the header information.

Examples of Correct Profiles

PDF printing,PDF G31D_MH,2,scanjob,0,0,,n,,,,,,,,,, Scan to email,PDF G31D_MH,1,email,5,5,Enter your employee number.,y,,,,,,,, PRISMAaccess,PDF G31D_MH,1,Scanjob,0,0,,n,ScanLogic,,,,,,,

Use the scan profiles file (sjt.csv)

Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs 277

Scan your documents

Description of the scan job settings

Introduction

When you make a scan, you can define the following. How the original looks. How the resulting file must look. Generic settings for the whole job.

To improve the productivity, the system defines a number of logical settings for the [Original] and the [Output] automatically. However, you can overrule these automated settings manually. The automated settings have the prefix [Auto].

Illustration

1

2

3

4

5

[71] The scan job settings

Section Description

1 [Original] The [Original] section contains the settings to define how the original looks.

2 [File] The [File] section contains the settings to define how the resulting file must look. 4

Scan your documents

278 Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs

Section Description

3 [Job] The [Job] section enables you to define generic proper- ties for the whole job.

4 Preview The preview section shows the result of the settings de- fined for the output.

5 Action buttons The buttons in this section allow you to select actions, for example, save settings to a template, cancel a job, or start scanning. With the optional [Page programming] function, you can insert pages and define the media and finishing settings for the page ranges in a job. The optional [Page pro- gramming] function is available when you scan subsets into one file.

[Original] settings

Name of the setting

Values Description

[1- or 2-sided] [Auto]

The automatically set value.

[1-sided]

Only 1 side of an original contains an image.

[2-sided]

Both sides of an original contain an image.

4

Description of the scan job settings

Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs 279

Name of the setting

Values Description

[Original type] [Auto]

The automatically set value.

[Portrait left]

The original has a vertical format (height > width). The binding edge is at the left-hand side. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image is in readable form.

[Portrait top]

The original has a vertical format (height > width). The binding edge of the original is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image on the back side of the sheet is in readable form.

[Landscape left]

The original has a horizontal format (width > height). The binding edge of the original is at the left-hand side. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the text or im- age is in readable form.

[Landscape top]

The original has a horizontal format (width > height). The binding edge of the original is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image on the back side of the sheet is in readable form.

[Size]

A4, A3, Letter, Ledger, etc.

Original on the glass plate: You must indicate the media format of the original. You can select a predefined size from the list.

When your original has a non-standard size, you can use the - and + buttons to enter the exact measures. You can enter the measures in steps of 1 mm / 0.01". The text of the [Size] button changes into [Custom].

[Portrait]

[Landscape]

You must indicate the orientation of the originals on the glass plate. The automatic document feeder detects the orientation of the originals automatically.

[Background]

[Background suppression]

For originals with a vague or yellowish background, you can use [Background suppression] to create copies and scans with a white background.

Description of the scan job settings

280 Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs

[File] settings

Name of the setting

Values Description

[Type]

[Format]

Select the [PDF] format when you require a format compati- ble with the Acrobat applications. A PDF file is a file with compressed graphics and text. This format matches all print systems and is common in the Internet environment.

Select the [JPEG] format when you require a general format, compatible with a range of graphical applications.

Select the [TIFF Single Page] format when you require single pages in a general format, a single page, compatible with a range of graphical applications.

Select the [TIFF Multi Page] format when you require multi- ple pages in a general format compatible with a range of graphical applications.

[Compression]

Define the compression factor to reduce the file size.

NOTE A higher compression factor results in a scan with lower quality.

[Size]

A5 A4 Etc

Select the media size of the file.

[Resolution] Select a value from the list, from the lowest to highest reso- lution. To give you an indication of what value to choose: Select a low value when you want to generate a very

small file. Select an average value when you want to view or archive

the generated file. Select a high value dpi when you want to print or edit the

generated file. 4

Description of the scan job settings

Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs 281

Name of the setting

Values Description

[Zoom]

[Fit to page] You can select a media size for the file that differs from the media size of the original. When the [Fit to page] setting is enabled, the system scales the original in such a way that the image fits on the selected media size of the file.

[Percent] Use this setting to change the zoom manually within the range 25% to 400%.

[Align] [Auto]

The automatically set value.

[Top left]

An image on a sheet may be smaller than the media size of the file, for example because you scaled the image to 70% of its original size. The [Align] setting allows you to indicate the position of the image on the sheet. [Top left] moves the im- age to the upper left corner of the sheet.

[Top center]

[Top center] moves the image to the center at the top of the sheet.

[Top right]

[Top right] moves the image to the upper right corner of the sheet.

[Center left]

[Center left] moves the image to center of the left side of the sheet.

[Center]

[Center] moves the image to the center of the sheet.

[Center right]

[Center right] moves the image to the center of the right side of the sheet.

[Bottom left]

[Bottom left] moves the image to the lower left corner of the sheet.

[Bottom center]

[Bottom center] moves the image to the center of the bottom side of the sheet.

[Bottom right]

[Bottom right] moves the image to the lower right corner of the sheet.

4

Description of the scan job settings

282 Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs

Name of the setting

Values Description

[Margin erase]

Margins of a document sometimes contain notes or punch holes, for example. The machine allows you to hide these el- ements on the copy. With the + and - buttons of the [Margin erase] setting you can define how much margin of the origi- nal you want to erase. You can enter a value up to 100 mm / 3.94".

[Adjust image]

[Brightness] With the [Brightness] setting you can darken (-1 to -3) or lighten (1-3) your scan.

[Contrast] With the [Contrast] setting you can change the differences in contradictions. For example between dark and light areas on your scan. A negative value reduces the difference, a posi- tive value increases the difference.

[Color] With the [Color] setting, you can adjust all colors of the im- age to more closely resemble the colors of the original, copy, or print.

[Color/Black & white] [Black and

white]

Select this setting to make black & white scans.

[Grayscale]

Select this setting to make gray-scale scans.

[Color]

Select this setting to make color scans.

[Color profile] [sRGB] Select [sRGB] for a smaller color gamut with smaller dif- ferences between consecutive colors. The [sRGB] setting reduces the risk of banding.

[AdobeRGB] Select [AdobeRGB] for a bigger color gamut with bigger differences between consecutive colors. The [AdobeRGB] setting increases the risk of banding.

[Destination] For scan to USB, you can enter the destination of the scan job on the USB drive. You can select either the root of the USB drive, or a new folder called ScansX, whereby X is an incrementing number. The first time you use this option, the folder will be called Scans1.

[Job name] For scan to USB, you can enter a job name. 4

Description of the scan job settings

Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs 283

Name of the setting

Values Description

[Enter the user code.]

This setting applies only to scan-to-email jobs. To use the scan-to-email function, an LDAP server must be configured. The LDAP server contains a mapping of unique user codes and email addresses. When you enter your user code, for example your employee number or telephone number, the LDAP server checks if you are a registered user. If you are a registered user, the system sends the scan job as an attach- ment to the corresponding email address.

NOTE The name of this button depends on the name defined in the scan profile file.

[Account ID] Enter the account ID for the current job. The [Account ID] setting is only available when the accounting function on the PRISMAsync controller is enabled.

Description of the scan job settings

284 Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs

Scan to file

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the ADF, or place 1 original face down on the glass plate. 2. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. 3. Select a scan-to-file profile.

The job window opens. 4. Change the settings for the original and the file. 5. Touch [Start] .

The scanner scans the originals. The system sends the resulting file to the scan server. The file is stored with a predefined name in a designated directory. There is no message on the operator panel to inform you that the file was stored successfully. You can access the status information on the controller.

Scan to file

Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs 285

Scan to email

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the ADF, or place 1 original face down on the glass plate. 2. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. 3. Select a scan-to-email profile. The display names of scan-to-email profiles are defined in the scan

profiles file.

NOTE The system administrator must enable this function by first downloading a scan profiles file from the PRISMAsync controller, adding an email entry with the prefix 'email' in the scan profile and then uploading the changed scan profile to the PRISMAsync controller.

The properties window opens. 4. Define the original settings in the [Original] pane. 5. Define the output settings in the [Output] pane. 6. Touch [Destination] in the [Job] pane to enter the:

Destination Email addresses Subject Account ID

7. Touch [Start] . The scanner scans the originals. The system sends the resulting file to the email address that corresponds with the user ID.

Scan to email

286 Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs

Scan to USB

Procedure

1. Insert a USB drive into the USB port on the left side of the operator panel. 2. Place the originals face up into the ADF, or place 1 original face down on the glass plate. 3. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Scan to USB].

The job window opens. 4. Change the settings for the original and the file. 5. Touch [Job name] to change the default job name.

Use the keyboard to change the name, then touch [OK]. 6. Touch [Destination] to indicate the folder on your USB drive where you want to save the file. 7. If applicable, enter the [Account ID]. 8. Touch [Start] .

The scanner scans the originals. The system sends the resulting file to your USB drive. 9. Touch to eject the USB drive. 10. Remove the USB drive from the operator panel when the message [ USB drive has been

successfully ejected.] is displayed.

Scan to USB

Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs 287

Scan to DocBox

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face down on the glass plate.

2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [To DocBox]. The job window opens.

3. Change the settings for the original and the file. 4. Touch [Job name] to change the default job name.

Use the keyboard to change the name, then touch [OK]. 5. Touch the [Destination] button. 6. From the drop-down menu, touch [DocBox] 7. Touch the [DocBox] button 8. Touch the DocBox to which you want to scan the job. 9. Press [OK]. 10. Press [Start] .

The scanner scans the originals. The system sends the resulting file to the selected DocBox.

Scan to DocBox

288 Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs

Scan to SMB

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face down on the glass plate.

2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Scan to SMB]. The job window opens.

3. Change the settings for the original and the file. 4. Press [Start] .

The scanner scans the originals. The system sends the resulting file to the shared device.

Scan to SMB

Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs 289

Create templates to use for recurring jobs

Introduction

When you regularly carry out identical copy or scan jobs, you can create custom templates for them. The custom templates contain the default settings for these jobs.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. 2. Select an existing copy or scan job template. 3. Make the required settings for the recurring job. 4. Touch [ Save as template] to save the settings to a custom template. 5. Enter the name of the custom template and touch [OK]. 6. Press [Cancel].

The custom template is now available at [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. 7. To edit the template, touch the custom template for 2 seconds.

You can now select the following options. [Rename]. [Move].

Touch a blue line in front of a template to indicate the new location. The location of the [Last used] template is set.

[Delete]

NOTE Touch the [Last used] template for 2 seconds to save the settings of the last job to a template.

Create templates to use for recurring jobs

290 Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs

Combine subsets into one file

Introduction

You can copy or scan several sets of originals to one document or file with subsets. With the optional [Page programming] function, you can add pages, for example, tab sheets, and define the media and finishing settings for each page and subset.

Procedure

1. Place the first subset face up into the ADF or face down on the glass plate. 2. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> Scan profile -> [Subsets] 3. Define the subset settings for both [Original] and [File].

NOTE Some settings that you define for the first subset apply to the whole job, the [Type] and [Resolution] settings, for example. These settings are fixed and are grayed out after scanning the first subset.

4. Press [Scan]. 5. Put the next subset into the automatic document feeder or on the glass plate. 6. Repeat the steps 3 - 5 for all other subsets.

A number indicates the order in which the subsets have been scanned.

NOTE When you combine 1-sided and 2-sided originals, you can define whether a new subset must continue on a new sheet or on the previous sheet.

7. Touch [Ready] when the last subset is scanned and processed. A full overview of all the scanned subsets appears in the right-hand pane. If required, you can add, insert, delete or edit subsets.

8. If required, use the optional [Page programming] function to insert pages and define the media and finishing settings per page range.

9. Touch [Ready] again to close the [Page programming] function. 10. Press .

Combine subsets into one file

Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs 291

Optimize the scan quality

Introduction

The printer can detect photos, rasters and fine lines on the original. This information is processed in such a way that the digital result has a high scan quality. This means that in most cases you do not need to adjust quality settings to get the best result.

Problems and solutions

Overview of possible scan problems and solutions

Description of the problem Solution

All the pages are upside down

You placed the originals in the wrong direction in the ADF or on the glass plate. Make sure the originals are placed correctly and scan the originals again.

Every second page is up- side down

The [Original type] and [Size] settings that you selected do not cor- respond with the orientation of the information on the originals. Select the correct [Original type] and [Size] settings and scan the originals again.

All the pages are posi- tioned sideways

There is more than 1 explanation for this problem. Wrong orientation selected. Original feed direction confused with the orientation of the in-

formation on the original. The application you use does not process the TIFF/PDF file in

the right way.

Select the correct [Original type] and [Size] settings and scan the originals again. If the problem remains, the application you use can be the cause of the problem. Check the results in another ap- plication.

The information on the page is too large or too small

This problem can occur when the size of the original and the selec- ted size of the target scan are not the same. The problem can also be caused by a (manual) change in the zoom factor. Check the size of the [Original] and the [File] on the operator panel and scan the originals again.

The information on the page is too light or too dark

You can change the [Exposure] settings to influence the result.

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the ADF or place 1 original face down on the glass plate. 2. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. 3. Select a scan profile. 4. Define the settings for the [Original] 5. From the [Image type] setting, select the correct type of original ([Photo], [Text] or [Mixed]) 6. Define the settings for the File 7. Select [Exposure]. 8. Select the desired value, to change the settings for the [Light] and [Dark] areas on the scan.

[Light]: When the area must be darker, then select a value of -1 to -3. When an area on the output is light gray but must be white, then select a value of 1 to 3.

Optimize the scan quality

292 Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs

[Dark]: When an area on the output is dark gray but must be black, then select a value of -1 to -3. When the area must be lighter, then select a value of 1 to 3.

9. Press [OK].

Optimize the scan quality

Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs 293

Optimize the scan quality

294 Chapter 10 - Carry out scan jobs

Chapter 11 Use the DocBox (optional)

The DocBox function

Introduction to the DocBox function

Introduction

DocBox is short for Document Box. The DocBox function, which is available through the operator panel, creates a buffer between the preparation of a job, for example page programming, and the printing of the job. The DocBox supports the operator by offering comprehensive means to store, group, edit and reprint documents. These editing options are a subset of the PRISMAprepare job preparation software.

A DocBox can contain the following jobs: Print jobs Scan jobs

NOTE In the Settings Editor, the system administrator can create as many DocBoxes as required, for example a DocBox for each individual customer or department.

Illustration

[72] The starting page for DocBox jobs

When to Use the DocBox

For example: To organize or sort jobs by sender. To carry out advanced job preparation actions.

The DocBox function

296 Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional)

To correct settings when the proof print is not correct, for example change the print quality or layout of a document.

To combine analogue documents with digital documents. To store jobs that must be reprinted regularly, for examples reports or books.

Introduction to the DocBox function

Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional) 297

Create a new DocBox

Illustration

[73] Create a DocBox

Procedure

NOTE Only the System Administrator is allowed to create a new DocBox in the Settings Editor.

1. Open your web browser and enter the host name or IP address of the PRISMAsync controller. 2. Log on to the Settings Editor as System Administrator. 3. Select [Workflow] -> [DocBox]. 4. Click [Add]. 5. Enter a new DocBox name. Identical DocBoxes are not allowed. 6. If you want to secure the new DocBox with a PIN, set [PIN enabled] to [Yes] and enter a PIN to

secure the DocBox. Each time you access this DocBox through the operator panel, you must enter this PIN.

7. Confirm the PIN. 8. Click [OK].

Create a new DocBox

298 Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional)

Handle the jobs in a DocBox

Description of the DocBox job settings

Introduction

When you select a job in a DocBox and touch [Properties], the current settings of the selected job are displayed. Below, the available settings are described.

NOTE Depending on the type of job you want to edit, either a print job or scan job, some settings cannot be changed. When a setting cannot be changed, the setting is greyed out.

Illustration

1

2

3

4

5

[74] The job properties

Number Pane Description

1 [Original] The [Original] pane shows the settings you can set for the paper originals.

2 [Output] The [Output] pane shows the generic settings you can define for the whole job.

3 [Jobs] The [Jobs] pane shows the settings you can set for the job. 4

Handle the jobs in a DocBox

Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional) 299

Number Pane Description

4 Preview The preview displays the settings you defined for the output.

5 Action buttons The action buttons indicate the actions you can car- ry out. With the optional [Page programming] function, you can insert pages and define the media and fin- ishing settings for the page ranges in a job.

Settings for the output

Setting Values Description

[1- or 2-sided] [1-sided]

The output contains an image on 1 side.

[2-sided]

The output contains an image on both sides.

[Binding edge] [Portrait left]

The output has a vertical format (height > width). The binding edge is at the left-hand side. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image is in readable form.

[Portrait top]

The output has a vertical format (height > width). The binding edge of the original is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image on the back side of the sheet is in readable form. This means that every back side of a 2-sided original is upside down compared to the front side.

[Landscape left]

The output has a horizontal format (width > height). The binding edge of the original is at the left-hand side. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the text or im- age is in readable form.

[Landscape top]

The output has a horizontal format (width > height). The binding edge of the original is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image on the back side of the sheet is in readable form. This means that every back side of a 2-sided original is upside down compared to the front side.

[Media]

Names of the media in the media catalog

Here you can view the media for the job. The list displays all the media that are available in the media catalog including the temporary media. The media catalog is a list of media that you can define in the Settings Editor. 4

Description of the DocBox job settings

300 Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional)

Setting Values Description

[Cover] [Front]

Here you can indicate that the print job requires a front cov- er. When the setting is enabled the corresponding setting [Media] becomes enabled.

[Media] When the setting [Front] is enabled, you can select a media from the media catalog.

[Print sides] Here you can select the sides of the front cover you want to print on. [Both sides] [Front side] [Back side] [None]

[Back]

Here you can indicate that the print job requires a back cov- er. When the setting is enabled the corresponding setting [Media] becomes enabled.

[Media] When the setting [Back] is enabled, you can select a media from the media catalog.

[Print sides] Here you can select the sides of the back cover you want to print on. [Both sides] [Front side] [Back side] [None]

[Layout] [Normal]

The machine prints the pages with no special layout set- tings.

[Booklet]

The machine prints the pages in booklet order. The pages 1 and 4 are printed on the front side of a sheet. The pages 2 and 3 are printed on the back side of a sheet.

[Same up]

The machine prints the same image multiple times next to each other. By default, the system keeps the size of the origi- nals. When you print A4 originals with the setting [Same up] and [Images per sheet] is 2, the machine will automatically print the job on A3, for example. When you cut the A3 sheets in two, you get 2 identical A4 copies of your document. To de- crease your A4 originals to A5 prints, you can use the zoom function or select another media type.

[Multiple up]

The machine prints multiple consecutive images on 1 side of a sheet, next to each other.

[Images per sheet]

Here you can select the number of images you want to print when you select [Same up] and [Same-up flipped]. 4

Description of the DocBox job settings

Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional) 301

Setting Values Description

[Zoom]

[Fit to page] You can select a media size for the output that differs from the media size of the original. When the [Fit to page] setting is enabled, the system scales the original in such a way that the image fits on the selected media size of the output.

[Percent] Use this setting to change the zoom manually within the range 25% to 400%.

[Align] [Top left]

An image on a sheet may be smaller than the media size of the output, for example because you scaled the image to 70% of its original size. The [Align] setting allows you to in- dicate the position of the image on the sheet. [Top left] moves the image to the upper left corner of the sheet.

[Top center]

[Top center] moves the image to the center at the top of the sheet.

[Top right]

[Top right] moves the image to the upper right corner of the sheet.

[Center left]

[Center left] moves the image to center of the left side of the sheet.

[Center]

[Center] moves the image to the center of the sheet.

[Center right]

[Center right] moves the image to the center of the right side of the sheet.

[Bottom left]

[Bottom left] moves the image to the lower left corner of the sheet.

[Bottom center]

[Bottom center] moves the image to the center of the bottom side of the sheet.

[Bottom right]

[Bottom right] moves the image to the lower right corner of the sheet.

4

Description of the DocBox job settings

302 Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional)

Setting Values Description

[Shift]

[Margin shift] Use this setting to increase or decrease the margin. By de- fault, the values of the front side and the back side are inter- locked. This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical. If you want to define a different value for each side, press . The icon changes to the unlocked status. Now you can de- fine the values for the front side and the back side separate- ly.

[Image shift] Use this setting to shift the image horizontally or vertically. By default, the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked. This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical. If you want to define a different value for each side, press . The icon changes to the unlocked status. Now you can de- fine the values for the front side and the back side separate- ly. 4

Description of the DocBox job settings

Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional) 303

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery]

[Output loca- tion]

Select the output location for the print job. Depending on the settings for your print job, the machine automatically sug- gests the preferred output location for your job. However, you can manually overrule this suggestion.

[Sort]

[By page] The output is sorted by page.

[By set] The output is sorted by set.

[Offset stack- ing]

[Each set] Each set that gets to an output location will be shifted on top of the previous set. This setting is only available when in the workflow profile offset stacking is set to [Sets (as in job)].

[Off] All the sets or jobs that get to an output location will be stacked in one straight pile.

[Advanced set- tings] -> [Sheet order]

[Face up] Deliver the prints face up, first sheet on top.

[Face up reverse] Deliver the prints face up, last sheet on top.

[Face down] Deliver the prints face down, first sheet on top.

[Face down reverse] Deliver the prints face down, last sheet on top. 4

Description of the DocBox job settings

304 Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional)

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery]

[Advanced set- tings] -> [Sheet orientation]

[Header up LEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in portrait position (vertical).

[Header up SEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in land- scape position (horizontal).

[Header down LEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bottom side and in portrait position (vertical).

[Header down SEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bottom side and in landscape position (horizontal).

[Advanced set- tings] -> [Print order]

[Front/back] Default value. The front page on the front, the back page on the back.

[Back/front] Puts the front page on the back and the back page on the front.

[Advanced set- tings] -> [Rota- tion]

[0 degrees] [180 degrees]

Rotates the prints 180 degrees.

[Margin erase]

Margins of a document sometimes contain notes or punch holes, for example. The machine allows you to hide these el- ements on the print. With the + and - buttons of the [Margin erase] setting you can define how much margin of the origi- nal you want to erase. You can enter a value up to 100 mm / 3.94".

[Adjust image]

[Basic mode] In the [Basic mode], you can adjust the calibrated CMYK curves by color. You can adjust the density when you select all colors at once. Furthermore, you can adjust the contrast.

[Advanced mode]

In the [Advanced mode], you can adjust the calibrated CMYK curves by color with three control points. Furthermore, you can clip color ranges in the lower and upper areas of the calibrated CMYK curve. You can achieve background com- pression when you clip colors in the lower area of the cali- brated CMYK curve. 4

Description of the DocBox job settings

Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional) 305

Setting Values Description

[Color/Black & white] [Black and

white]

Here you can view if the job is printed in [Color] or in [Black and white]. If using color, the following options are available for jobs. [Color bar] and [Information bar].

The color and information bars are defined at the Settings Editor. For both bars you can indicate the location and alignment. Be aware that if you select the same location for both the color and information bar, the color bar will cover the information bar.

[Trapping]. With trapping, you can reduce unwanted white gaps be- tween color planes. Note that an edge can appear at loca- tions where the color planes overlap. Define custom trap- ping presets at [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Trap- ping presets editor].

[Color]

[Punching]

[None]

[2 holes]

[3 holes]

[4 holes]

[Die set de- pendent]

Here you can define the amount and location of the punch holes.

Location [Left] [Top] [Right] [Bottom]

[Folding] Here you can define the folding method for the prints. Fur- thermore you can define on what side to print with the [Print method] option: [Print inside] [Print outside]

Check the preview for the result of the selection. 4

Description of the DocBox job settings

306 Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional)

Setting Values Description

[Binding] [None]

[1 staple]

[2 staples]

[Saddle stitch- ing]

[Saddle press- ing]

Here you can define the required number of staples. Further- more you can define where you want the staples with the [Location] option. The available locations for the 1 staple option: [Top left] [Top right] [Bottom left] [Bottom right]

The available locations for the 2 staples option: [Left edge] [Top edge] [Bottom edge] [Right edge]

Check the preview for the result of the selection.

[Trimming] [None]

[Trim size]

Trims the long edge, top edge and bottom edge according to the specified values. The minimum trim size is 2 mm / 0.02".

[Finishing size]

Trims the prints to a selected default size, for example A4, A5 etc. You can also define a custom size.

Settings for the whole job

Setting Values Description

[Job name] Displays the job name of the print job. You can change the job name of a print job.

[Number of sets]

Use this setting to define the number of copies. You can en- ter a value from 1 - 65,000. The default value is 1.

[Page range] Displays the pages to print. When [All] is selected, all pages of the job will be printed. When you touch the [Page range] button a keyboard appears. You can define the page range you want to print.

[Separator sheets]

[On] When the Separator sheets setting is enabled, a separate sheet will be inserted automatically before each set of a job to create a clear distinction between two sets. Separator sheets are always empty. In the Settings Editor, you can se- lect a media from the Media catalog to be used as separator sheets. There you can also indicate the feed direction of the separator sheets (long-edge feed or short-edge feed).

[Off] No separator sheet will be inserted before each set.

Description of the DocBox job settings

Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional) 307

Edit a job in a DocBox

Introduction

In addition to editing job settings, the optional page programming function allows you to add pages to a job. For example, you can add covers, inserts, and separator sheets. Furthermore, you can use the optional page programming function to set media and finishing settings for each page and subset.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to edit. 3. Touch the job you want to edit. 4. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 5. If required, touch [Page programming] (optional).

Click [Ready] to close the [Page programming] function. 6. Change the required settings. 7. Press [OK].

Edit a job in a DocBox

308 Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional)

Combine jobs in a DocBox (build function)

Introduction

You can combine a job in a DocBox with other jobs from the same DocBox. The system creates a new job from the selected jobs. The icon indicates a built job.

Illustration

[75] The [Create build] window

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the jobs you want to combine. 3. Touch the jobs you want to combine, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple

jobs at once. 4. Touch the [Build] button or select [Build] from the drop-down menu.

A [Create build] window appears that allows you to make some changes. 5. If necessary, use the [Up] and [Down] buttons to change the job order. 6. If necessary, change the generic job settings, such as [Number of sets]. 7. Press [OK].

Combine jobs in a DocBox (build function)

Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional) 309

Split a combined job in the DocBox

Introduction

You can split a combined job in the DocBox into the original separate jobs. Then the system restores the jobs with their original settings and status. You cannot split a combined job in the list of Waiting jobs.

NOTE You can only split a job when the job is not locked. Otherwise, you must unlock the job first.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to split. 3. Touch the job you want to split. 4. Touch the [Split] button, or select [Split] from the drop-down menu.

The DocBox displays the original jobs.

Split a combined job in the DocBox

310 Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional)

Lock a job in a DocBox

Introduction

The DocBox allows you to lock the settings of your jobs. Advantages: Settings cannot be changed accidentally. The job is always printed exactly the same.

Illustration

[76] Select [Lock].

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to lock. 3. Touch one or more jobs that you want to lock, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select

multiple jobs at once. 4. From the drop-down menu, select [Lock].

indicates that the job is locked.

Lock a job in a DocBox

Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional) 311

Unlock a job in a DocBox

Introduction

Unlocking a job can be required if you want to split a locked, combined job into the original jobs, for example.

Illustration

[77] Select [Unlock].

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to unlock. 3. Touch the job that you want to unlock. 4. From the drop-down menu, select [Unlock].

Unlock a job in a DocBox

312 Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional)

Move a job from one DocBox to another

Illustration

[78] Move a DocBox job

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox button that contains the job you want to move. 3. Touch the job you want to move. 4. Touch the [Move] button, or select [Move] from the drop-down menu. 5. Touch the destination. 6. Press [OK].

Move a job from one DocBox to another

Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional) 313

Print the jobs in a DocBox

Print a non-urgent job from the DocBox

Introduction

You can print jobs from the DocBox in two ways: Without urgency

The system sends the print job to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. With urgency (immediately)

The system sends the print job to the top of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The job currently active is put on hold.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to print. 3. Touch the desired job. 4. Touch [Print] to print the non-urgent job.

Print the jobs in a DocBox

314 Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional)

Print an urgent job from the DocBox immediately

Introduction

You can print jobs from the DocBox in two ways: Without urgency

The system sends the print job to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. With urgency (immediately)

The system sends the print job to the top of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The job currently active is put on hold.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to print. 3. Touch the desired job. 4. Touch [Print now] to print the urgent job immediately.

Print an urgent job from the DocBox immediately

Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional) 315

Select and print multiple jobs from the DocBox

Introduction

When you want to print one job in a DocBox, select and print that job. However, you can also select multiple jobs at a time. The table below shows the available options.

Select multiple jobs

Jobs Description

[All] Select all the jobs from the active DocBox.

[ Jobs with available media] These are the jobs for which the required media are cur- rently available in the paper trays.

[ Jobs with label] These are the jobs that have a label. A label is a name that helps you to identify certain jobs on the operator panel, for example the name of a customer. The label can be defined in the printer driver, in a job ticket or via an automated workflow. For example, the label Custom- er XYZ can be added to jobs. Then you can select and print all the jobs for 'Customer XYZ' at once.

[Printed jobs] These are the jobs that have already been printed be- fore.

[New jobs] These are the jobs that have not been printed yet.

Manually Touch the required jobs one by one

Illustration

[79] Select multiple jobs

Select and print multiple jobs from the DocBox

316 Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional)

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the jobs you want to print. 3. Touch the [Select] button. 4. From the drop-down menu, select the required option. 5. Press [Print].

Select and print multiple jobs from the DocBox

Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional) 317

Select and print multiple jobs from the DocBox

318 Chapter 11 - Use the DocBox (optional)

Chapter 12 Accounting

The accounting related settings in the Settings Editor

Description

The table below describes the available accounting related settings in the Settings Editor (navigate to [Configuration] -> [Accounting]).

The accounting related settings

Setting Description

[Save account log files] You can save the account log files to a location on your PC or network to create invoices for customers, for ex- ample.

[Default account ID for streaming jobs]

[Use this setting to define the default account ID that is used when the system processes streaming jobs.]

[Account field separator] This setting allows you to select the character used in the account log files to separate the information. You can select [Use ';' (semi-colon)] or [Use ',' (comma)].

[UTF-8 header enabled] This settings allows you to indicate that the account log files must be encoded in UTF-8.

The accounting related settings in the Settings Editor

320 Chapter 12 - Accounting

Account ID file

Introduction

All account related information, such as account IDs and account names, is stored in an account ID file ('accid.csv'). You can download this file via the Settings Editor to add, edit or delete account information. You can enter a maximum of 2,000 account IDs. Make sure that each account ID is unique.

NOTE The first row of the account ID file contains header information. Do not change or delete this row.

The content of the Account ID File

The account ID file contains 4 columns with the account information. Only the first two columns and are mandatory. Filling in the other columns is optional.

The content of the account ID file

Data field Description

All accounts, starting in row two, must have the ID 4313.

This column contains the IDs (maximum 40 characters) that will be checked for validity when [Verification enabled] is set to [Yes].

NOTE You can only enter 12 digits on the control panel.

This column contains the account name (maximum 40 characters) that corresponds with the account ID in the second column. When you enter an account ID and [Verification enabled] is set to [Yes], the control panel displays the name that corresponds with the account ID. When no name is defined in the account ID file, the control panel displays the account ID.

This column is a free text field (maximum 255 characters) where you can enter additional information about an account, for exam- ple the maximum monthly print volume. This information is not displayed on the control panel.

Account ID file

Chapter 12 - Accounting 321

The account log file

The Name of an Account Log File

An account log file has the following name format:

, for example 012345678920120115.CSV.

Item Description

The serial number of the device. This number is a text string with a maximum length of 10 characters (A-Z, a-z, 0-9). The serial number is provided by the PRISMAsync con- troller at the moment the account log file is created.

The year, month and day the account log file was created.

The file extension, either .CSV (Comma Separated Values) for inactive log files, or .ACL (ACtive Log) for the active log file. For the current day, the file has the extension .ACL. At midnight, the .ACL file is converted into a .CSV file. The PRISMAsync controller can store a maximum of 99 .CSV files + 1 .ACL file. When the limit is reached, the oldest .CSV file is removed. You can retrieve the account log files from the Settings Editor ([Config- uration] -> [Accounting] -> [Save account log files]) and import the files into Microsoft Excel, for example.

Data Records

An account log file consists of data records. The data records contain information about the use of the imagePRESS C7011VPS / C7010VPS Series. For each job, a new data record is added to the current account log file.

The first record of an account log file is the header record. The header record always starts with 4302. Every subsequent data record starts with 4303. These records contain the actual accounting information for each job.

The Fields of an Account Log File

The following table describes the fields of each data record in an account log file.

Field name Specification Description

4303 A number that identifies a data record.

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters

A unique identification for a job or document, which is supplied by the submitter of the job. The document ID is extracted from the print data, for ex- ample the attribute 'documentid' in an OJT. This field keeps the same value when the job is submit- ted multiple times. The field is empty when the at- tribute is not available. 4

The account log file

322 Chapter 12 - Accounting

Field name Specification Description

A number The PRISMAsync controller creates a unique job identification number when: A new print job is received A new copy or scan job is started An existing job is started from the mailbox An existing job is moved from the [Printed jobs]

section to the [Waiting jobs] section

NOTE The term mailbox is understood to in- clude the list of [Waiting jobs] and the [DocBox].

Possible entries: COPY IP AP SYSTEM SCAN SCAN2MBX MBXCOPY

Describes the type of job. COPY: Direct copy job IP: Interactive print job (a job that was printed

from the mailbox). AP: Automatic print job (a job that was directly

printed from the network, not from the mailbox) SYSTEM: A test print that was started in the serv-

ice mode or service copy mode. SCAN: A scan-to-file job. SCAN2MBX: A job that was scanned to the mail-

box. MBXCOPY: A copy job that was printed from the

mailbox.

NOTE The term mailbox is understood to in- clude the list of [Waiting jobs] and the [DocBox].

- -

NOTE When you open the file in Microsoft Excel, the date format changes into the date for- mat that is de- fined in Micro- soft Excel

The date on which the printer started printing the job. Typically, this is the first moment that a job can be interrupted or stopped via the control panel.

4

The account log file

Chapter 12 - Accounting 323

Field name Specification Description

: :

NOTE When you open the file in Microsoft Excel, the time format changes into the time for- mat that is de- fined in Micro- soft Excel

The time on which the printer started printing the job. Typically, this is the first moment that a job can be interrupted or stopped via the control panel.

: : The total time the job is active and actually printing. Hours can exceed 24.

: : The total time the job is active, but waits for an ac- tion by the operator, such as clearing an error or loading the required media. Hours can exceed 24.

- -

The date on which the job was finished or aborted.

: : The time the job was finished or aborted.

Possible entries: Done Abrt Stop

Information about how the job was completed. Done: The job was finished correctly. Abrt: The operator or the PRISMAsync controller

stopped or aborted the job, for example in case of an error.

Stop: The job was stopped by the user and moved to the [Waiting jobs] section. When the job is restarted or continued later, multiple ac- count records will be generated for this job.

A text string with a max- imum length of 255 characters

The user name that is defined for the job, for exam- ple in the attribute 'username' in an OJT.

A text string with a max- imum length of 255 characters

The name of the job for automatic or interactive print jobs and scan jobs, for example in the attrib- ute 'jobname' in an OJT. For scan jobs, the gener- ated file name is used.

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters

The name of a department or user as defined in the [Cost center] field of the [Account] tab of the printer driver or in the attribute 'GroupName' in an OJT. This field is empty when the attribute is not availa- ble

A text string with a max- imum length of 255 characters

Information as defined in the [Custom] field of the [Account] tab of the printer driver or in the attribute 'custom' in an OJT, for example. This field is empty when the attribute is not availa- ble 4

The account log file

324 Chapter 12 - Accounting

Field name Specification Description

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters

The account ID as defined in the [Account ID] field of the [Account] tab of the printer driver, or on the control panel, or in the attribute 'accountid' in an OJT, for example. This field is empty when the attribute is not availa- ble

A text string with a max- imum length of 255 characters

The name of the recipient of the print job. The name is extracted from the print data, for example the attribute 'jobaddressee' in an OJT.

A number The number of scanned A4-like sheets, including custom sized sheets of which at least one dimen- sion is equal to or less than 257 mm / 10.1".

A number The number of scanned A3-like sheets, including custom sized sheets of which all dimensions are larger than 257 mm / 10.1".

A number The number of times that a single staple was used in a job.

NOTE This number does not include the staples from an off-line stapler.

A number The number of times that double staples were used in a job.

NOTE This number does not include the staples from an off-line stapler.

A number The number of finished sets. A set is finished after the last sheet is sent to the output location.

Names of output loca- tions

A descriptive name of the output location. The ex- act names vary per product and depend on the con- figuration of the product.

A number The number of printed A4-like sheets (copy jobs or print jobs) printed in B&W. Inserts will be counted as B&W too.

A number The number of printed A4-like sheets (copy jobs or print jobs) printed in color.

A number The number of printed A3-like sheets (copy jobs or print jobs) printed in B&W. Inserts will be counted as B&W too.

A number The number of printed A3-like sheets (copy jobs or print jobs) printed in color.

Value in milligrams The estimated total usage of black toner for sheets that are printed or copied in B&W.

Value in milligrams The estimated total usage of toner for sheets that are printed or copied in color. 4

The account log file

Chapter 12 - Accounting 325

Field name Specification Description

(1-16)*

A number The number of 1-sided sheets of a certain paper type used in a job.

(1-16)*

A number The number of 2-sided sheets of a certain paper type used in a job.

(1-16)*

A text string with a max- imum length of 255 characters

The media size used for the job. Not every product supports all media sizes.

(1-16)*

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters. Some entries are standardized: PLAIN TRANS COVER MYPAPER COLOR_COPY COATED OTHER

Description of the media types used. PLAIN: normal paper TRANS: transparencies COVER: a special front or back page MYPAPER: a special media type that must be

placed in a paper tray before starting the job, and that must be removed from that paper tray as soon as the job is ready.

COLOR_COPY: color copy paper COATED: coated media OTHER: unspecified media. This is used when

custom strings are not available.

(1-16)*

A number The weight of the media type in grams per m or lb.

(1-16)*

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters

The color of the media used for the job.

(1-16)*

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters

The name of the media used for the job.

(1-16)*

A number If subsequent sheets are not identical (cyclic me- dia), the cycle length indicates after how many sheets the same sequence starts again. For normal media the cycle length is 1. For cyclic media with an unknown cycle length, the cycle length is 0.

(1-16)*

Yes or no ('y' or 'n') A media attribute that indicates whether the bit- maps are printed on this media (y) or not (n). An insert sheet can be 1-sided or 2-sided. The bit- maps corresponding to insert sheets typically are still part of the print job. Selection of insert media enforces that these bitmaps are not printed (again) on the insert media.

(1-16)* Yes or no ('y' or 'n') This is a media attribute that indicates whether the media is tab media. Typically, tab media has a cycle length of 1, but this is not mandatory

(1-16)*

A number The number of punch holes of the prepunched me- dia.

A number The number of punched sheets in a job.

A number The number of folded sheets in a job. 4

The account log file

326 Chapter 12 - Accounting

Field name Specification Description

A number The number of booklets in a job.

A number The number of bound sets in a job.

NOTE * All fields that contain (1-16) will be included 16 times in an account log file. Each number refers to the type of media (1 up to 16) that is used. The media characteristics of the first media type in a job are logged in the fields ending on '1'. The characteristics of the next, different media type are logged in the fields ending with '2' and so on. For example, and both correspond to the second type of media used in a job. If you use less than 16 media types, the remaining fields are empty. If you use more than 16 media types, they are logged as if they were media type 16. The maximum number of media types per job is 16.

The account log file

Chapter 12 - Accounting 327

Save an account log file

Procedure

1. In the Settings Editor, click [Configuration] -> [Accounting]. 2. Click [Save account log files]. 3. Click the link to the required file, then click [Save]. 4. Browse to the location where you want to save the file, then click [Save].

Save an account log file

328 Chapter 12 - Accounting

Enter an account ID into the printer driver

Before you begin

To use the accounting function in the printer driver the [Enable accounting] setting in the [Properties] of the printer driver must be enabled.

In Microsoft Windows XP, for example, you must click Start -> Settings -> Printers and Faxes -> right-click your printer -> [Properties] -> tab that shows the name of your printer, to enable accounting.

NOTE The fixed account ID as defined on the operator panel overrules the account ID that is defined in the printer driver. Therefore, make sure that you cancel the fixed account ID before you print the job from the [Waiting jobs] section on the operator panel.

Procedure

1. In your application, click 'File' -> 'Print'. 2. If more printers are available, select the required printer from the list. 3. Click [Properties]. 4. Click [Account]. 5. Enter the [Account ID]. 6. Optionally, you can enter the name of the [Cost center] and any additional information in the

[Custom] field. 7. Click [OK].

Enter an account ID into the printer driver

Chapter 12 - Accounting 329

Enter an account ID into the printer driver

330 Chapter 12 - Accounting

Chapter 13 Add toner and staples

Toner

Check the status of the toner reservoir and waste toner container

Introduction

You can check the status of the toner reservoirs in the dashboard and in the [System] view. The icons in the following table indicate the status of the toner reservoir.

This section gives an overview of the possible toner statuses. Furthermore, this section describes how to check the status in the [System] view.

The colors of the toner icons

The toner icons

Toner icon Description

A blue toner icon indicates that the toner reservoir is sufficiently filled. Do not add toner.

An orange toner icon indicates that toner reservoir is filled less than 25%. The printer can print another 600 sheets. You must replace the to- ner cartridge as soon as possible.

A red toner icon indicates that the toner reservoir is empty. The print- ing stops. You must replace the toner cartridge to continue the print- ing.

Toner

332 Chapter 13 - Add toner and staples

Illustration

[80] The location of the toner icons (left-side of the main window)

Procedure

1. On the operator panel, touch the button for the [System] view. 2. Press [Printer].

The [Toner] section displays the toner and waste toner icons. The color of the toner icon indicates the current filling level of the toner reservoir.

Related information

The dashboard on page 74 The main unit on page 19

Check the status of the toner reservoir and waste toner container

Chapter 13 - Add toner and staples 333

Replacing the toner cartridge

Introduction

This section describes the procedure for replacing the toner cartridge and waste toner container.

IMPORTANT Make sure you read this section carefully.

A toner cartridge consists of intricate mechanical components. Handling the toner cartridge without due care may lead to damage to the toner cartridge or deterioration in print quality. Be careful of the following points when removing or installing the toner cartridge.

Regarding the corresponding Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge, please refer to the label which is attached to the machine.

WARNING Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as this may cause the toner

remaining inside the cartridge to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire. Do not store toner cartridges in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the toner

to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.

CAUTION Take care not to allow the toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will

dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.

Keep toner and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If these items are ingested, consult a physician immediately.

If toner gets onto your hands or clothing, wash it off immediately with cold water. Do not use warm water as this may set the toner permanently, and you may not be able to remove the toner stains.

IMPORTANT Do not rotate the toner cartridge. Doing so may cause the toner cartridge to leak. Use only toner cartridges intended for use with this machine. Do not replace the toner cartridges until the message prompting you to do so appears. The color of the toner to be replaced is shown on the touch panel display. When you replace

two or more toner cartridges, replace the toner cartridge that you want to supply in order of black, cyan, magenta, and yellow.

If you continue copying or printing in black-and-white after cyan, magenta, or yellow toner runs out, do not remove the depleted toner cartridges from the machine.

Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges. Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge. For more information, see http://www.canon.com/counterfeit

Replacing the toner cartridge

334 Chapter 13 - Add toner and staples

Genuine Supplies

Canon has developed and manufactured Toner, Parts, and Supplies specifically for use in this machine. For optimal print quality and for optimal machine performance and productivity, we recommend that you use Genuine Canon Toner, Parts, and Supplies. Contact your Canon Authorized Dealer or Service Provider for Genuine Canon Supplies.

NOTE The toner cartridge can be replaced even if the machine is in operation. If toner runs out during a print job, the remaining prints are made after you replace the toner

cartridge. If black toner is left, you can continue copying and printing in black and white. However, if a

job is interrupted because cyan, magenta, or yellow toner runs out, copying and printing in black-and-white is only possible for functions other than the function being used for the interrupted job.

Procedure

1. Open the outer toner replacement cover.

IMPORTANT The toner cartridge is attached in order of yellow, magenta, cyan and black from the left.

2. Press the open button of the toner cartridge you want to replace, and then open the inner toner replacement cover.

3. Remove the toner cartridge. Pull the toner cartridge out halfway, and then remove it completely while supporting it and keeping it straight with your other hand from underneath.

Replacing the toner cartridge

Chapter 13 - Add toner and staples 335

WARNING Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as this may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridge to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.

IMPORTANT Do not touch the tip of the toner cartridge or subject it to shock by hitting it. Doing so may cause the toner cartridge to leak.

4. Twist the orange protective cap of the new toner cartridge in the direction of the arrow (counterclockwise) to remove it.

5. Push the new toner cartridge into the machine as far as it will go. Support the new toner cartridge with one hand from underneath, while pushing it into the machine with your other hand.

Replacing the toner cartridge

336 Chapter 13 - Add toner and staples

IMPORTANT When replacing toner cartridges, make sure that the color of the toner cartridge matches the color of the toner supply port. If the color is different, the toner cartridge will not fit into the port.

6. Close the inner toner replacement cover.

7. Close the outer toner replacement cover.

CAUTION When closing the toner replacement cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

8. After replacing toner cartridges, if printed colors are different from the colors printed before you replaced the toner cartridges, perform the [Auto gradation adjustment] procedure.

Replacing the toner cartridge

Chapter 13 - Add toner and staples 337

Replacing the waste toner container

Introduction

This section describes how to replace the waste toner container when this container becomes full. You can print for a while even if you do not replace the waste toner container immediately. (The number of sheets may differ depending on the contents to print.) If you continue to print, an error occurs and you cannot continue printing.

WARNING Do not burn or throw used waste toner containers into open flames. Also, do not store waste toner containers in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the toner to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.

IMPORTANT Contact your supplier for information about the local regulations for disposal of waste toner.

Use the provided cap to cover up the opening of the used waste toner container. Used toner cannot be reused. Do not mix new and used toner together. Use only waste toner containers intended for use with this machine. Do not replace waste toner container until the message prompting you to do so appears.

NOTE Complete instructions on how to replace the waste toner container. If the waste toner container must be replaced during a print job, the remaining prints are

made after the new waste toner container is installed. The waste toner containers can be replaced even if the machine is in operation.

Procedure

1. Pull out the waste toner container tray.

2. Attach the cap of waste toner container.

3. Remove the waste toner container.

Replacing the waste toner container

338 Chapter 13 - Add toner and staples

CAUTION When removing the waste toner container, be careful not to tilt it, as the toner may spill and get onto your hands or clothing. If toner gets onto your hands or clothing, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.

4. Set the new waste toner container.

5. Gently push the waste toner container tray into the until it clicks into place in the closed position.

CAUTION When closing the waste toner container, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

Replacing the waste toner container

Chapter 13 - Add toner and staples 339

Staples

Check the status of the staple cartridges

Introduction

The following output locations contain staple cartridges to staple your jobs. The stacker/stapler The finisher.

When all the staple cartridges are sufficiently filled, the staple icon in the dashboard is blue. When the staple icon in the dashboard is orange or red, one of the staple cartridges is empty or almost empty. You must refill the staple cartridge as soon as possible.

To find out which staple cartridge is empty or almost empty, you must go to the [Printer] section of the [System] view. The icon for the staple cartridge that must be refilled is orange or red.

NOTE Even when the staple icon is blue, you can still go to the [System] view to check the number of staples that has been used since the last refill.

The colors of the staple icon

The colors of the staple icon

Staple icon Description

A blue staple icon indicates that all the staple cartridges contain suffi- cient staples.

An orange staple icon indicates that one of the staple cartridges is al- most empty.

A red staple icon indicates that one of the staple cartridges is empty. The printer stops when a job requires staples from the empty staple cartridge.

Staples

340 Chapter 13 - Add toner and staples

Illustration

[81] The location of the staple icons (right-side of the main window)

Procedure

1. Check the staple icon in the dashboard. 2. When the staple icon is orange or red, go to the [Printer] section of the [System] view to check

which staple cartridge must be refilled.

Check the status of the staple cartridges

Chapter 13 - Add toner and staples 341

Replacing the staple cartridge in the stapler unit

Introduction

This section describes the procedure for replacing the staple cartridge in the optional Finisher- AJ1 or Saddle Finisher-AJ2.

IMPORTANT Take care when handling the optional equipment that is attached to the machine. When an optional unit's cover is opened to replace a staple cartridge, discard punch waste, or clear paper or staple jams, prints may still be output if other optional units are operating normally, and are not involved in the paper or staple jam removal procedure.

NOTE We recommend that you order staple cartridges from your local authorized dealer before your stock runs out.

Procedure

1. Open the front cover of the finisher.

2. Pull out the staple case from the stapler unit, holding it by its green tab.

NOTE When the stapler unit is at the back and it is difficult to pull out the staple case, turn the dial on the bottom left hand side to the left to move the stapler unit.

3. Pull out the staple cartridge.

Replacing the staple cartridge in the stapler unit

342 Chapter 13 - Add toner and staples

4. Insert the new staple cartridge.

IMPORTANT Use only staple cartridges intended for use in this machine.

NOTE Only one staple cartridge can be inserted at a time.

5. Gently push the staple case into the stapler unit, until it is securely in place. Always make sure to insert the staple case as far as it can go.

6. Below the stapler unit is the staple waste tray. Pull out the staple waste tray.

7. Discard the staple waste.

Replacing the staple cartridge in the stapler unit

Chapter 13 - Add toner and staples 343

CAUTION When discarding the staple waste, be careful not to touch the staple waste. Doing so may result in personal injury.

8. Return the staple waste tray to its original position.

9. Close the front cover of the finisher.

CAUTION When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

Replacing the staple cartridge in the stapler unit

344 Chapter 13 - Add toner and staples

Replacing the staple cartridge in the saddle stitcher unit

Introduction

This section describes how to replace the staple cartridge of the saddle stitcher.

IMPORTANT Take care when handling the optional equipment that is attached to the machine. When an

optional unit's cover is opened to replace a staple cartridge, discard punch waste, or clear paper or staple jams, prints may still be output if other optional units are operating normally, and are not involved in the paper or staple jam removal procedure.

If necessary, remove all of the output paper in the booklet tray before replacing the staple cartridge in the saddle stitcher unit.

NOTE This procedure is necessary only if the optional Saddle Finisher-AJ2 is attached. Since both the front and inner staple cartridges need to be replaced when staples run out in

the saddle stitcher unit, we recommend that you order staple cartridges from your local authorized dealer before your stock runs out.

Procedure

1. Open the front cover of the finisher.

2. Pull out the saddle stitcher unit (F-C4).

3. Pull out the staple case, holding it by its tab.

Replacing the staple cartridge in the saddle stitcher unit

Chapter 13 - Add toner and staples 345

4. Open the staple case cover by pressing the area indicated in the illustration. Hold the staple case cover by its left and right sides, and then lift it and slide it off.

5. Lift and pull out the empty staple cartridge. Squeeze the arrow indicated in step 4 (and its twin on the opposite side) to release the empty staple cartridge.

6. Insert the new staple cartridge until it clicks into place.

IMPORTANT When replacing the staple cartridges, replace both the front and back staple cartridges.

7. Close the staple case cover.

Replacing the staple cartridge in the saddle stitcher unit

346 Chapter 13 - Add toner and staples

8. Return the staple case to its original position. When returning the staple case, always make sure that the staple case is inserted until the arrows are aligned as shown in the diagram.

IMPORTANT Follow steps 3 to 8 to replace the other staple cartridge in the saddle stitcher unit.

9. Gently push the saddle stitcher unit (F-C4) back into the machine. Always make sure to push the saddle stitcher unit in as far as it can go.

Replacing the staple cartridge in the saddle stitcher unit

Chapter 13 - Add toner and staples 347

CAUTION When returning the saddle stitcher unit to its original position, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

10. Close the front cover of the finisher.

CAUTION When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

Replacing the staple cartridge in the saddle stitcher unit

348 Chapter 13 - Add toner and staples

Chapter 14 Maintenance and print quality

Maintenance and counters

Introduction to the [Maintenance] section

Introduction

The maintenance section consists of the following two subsections. [Maintenance]. [Counters]

In the maintenance subsection, you can: Access maintenance procedures Enter the service mode Allow remote service (optional)

The counters subsection displays the following counters. [Billing counters]

The [Billing counters] section displays the total number of prints that have been made since the machine was installed. Which counters there are visible depends on the region. You cannot reset the billing counters.

[Day counters] The [Day counters] section displays the number of prints that have been made since the counter was last reset to 0. You can, for example, reset the day counters at the beginning of a working day or before you start a new job for a particular customer.

Maintenance and counters

350 Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality

[Auto color mismatch correction]

Introduction

You can automatically correct color mismatching that occurs in the output. The [Auto color mismatch correction] aligns the position of the four different colors.

NOTE Automatic color mismatch correction cannot be performed during printing.

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Maintenance]. 2. Touch [Start maintenance]. 3. Touch [Auto color mismatch correction] and touch [Start] .

A wizard opens. 4. Touch [Next].

A status message displays. 5. Touch [Finish]. 6. Touch [Stop] to close the [Maintenance tasks] menu.

Result

If the procedure displays an engine error, contact your local service representative.

[Auto color mismatch correction]

Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality 351

Clean the roller (main unit)

Introduction

If dirt or streaks appear on printed output, clean the roller inside of the main unit.

NOTE It takes approximately one minute to clean the roller. Roller cleaning cannot be performed during printing.

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Maintenance]. 2. Touch [Start maintenance]. 3. Touch [Clean the clean roller (main unit)] and touch [Start] .

A wizard opens. 4. Touch [Next]

A status message displays. 5. Touch [Finish]. 6. Touch [Stop] to close the [Maintenance tasks] menu.

Clean the roller (main unit)

352 Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality

Clean the wire

Introduction

If streaks appear on printed output or parts of the printed image are missing, clean the corona assembly wires inside the main unit.

NOTE It takes approximately 35 seconds to clean the wires. Wire cleaning cannot be performed during printing.

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Maintenance]. 2. Touch [Start maintenance]. 3. Touch [Clean the corona wires] and touch [Start] .

A wizard opens. 4. Touch [Next].

A status message displays. 5. Touch [Finish]. 6. Touch [Stop] to close the [Maintenance tasks] menu.

NOTE If the procedure displays an engine error, contact your local service representative.

Clean the wire

Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality 353

Clean the automatic document feeder rollers

Introduction

If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the feeder, clean the rollers of the feeder.

NOTE It takes approximately 20 seconds to clean the feeder. Use clean A4 / LTR paper (60 to 80 g/m / 16 lb bond to 20 lb bond). Feeder roller cleaning cannot be performed during printing.

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Maintenance]. 2. Touch [Start maintenance]. 3. Touch [Clean the rollers of the ADF] and touch [Start] .

A wizard opens. 4. Put 10 sheets of blank paper into the feeder. 5. Touch [Next]

A status message displays. 6. Touch [Finish]. 7. Touch [Stop] to close the [Maintenance tasks] menu.

Clean the automatic document feeder rollers

354 Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality

[Refresh the fixing roller]

Introduction

When paper with a longer width is used after copying or printing 100 or more sheets of paper with a shorter width (for example, when you use A3 paper after A4R paper), luster streak may appear on both edges in the feeding direction. In addition, patches of uneven gloss may appear in the high density areas of the printed heavy paper or coated paper. In this case, the streaks and patches of uneven gloss may be reduced by refreshing the fixing roller and cleaning its surface.

IMPORTANT Refreshing the fixing roller decreases the lifetime of the fixing roller largely.

NOTE Refreshing the fixing roller cannot be performed during printing.

Illustration

A4

A3

1

2

[82] The feeding direction (1) and luster streaks (2)

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Maintenance]. 2. Touch [Start maintenance]. 3. Touch [Refresh the fixing roller] and touch [Start] . 4. Enter the maintenance PIN and touch [OK].

A wizard opens. 5. Touch [Next].

A status message displays. 6. Touch [Finish]. 7. Touch [Stop] to close the [Maintenance tasks] menu.

Result

IMPORTANT If the procedure fails or if you do not get the required result, contact your local service representative.

[Refresh the fixing roller]

Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality 355

Engine maintenance (trained operators)

Introduction

Only operators that are specially trained in engine maintenance are allowed to perform engine maintenance. Before you can perform engine maintenance tasks you have to put the engine into the engine maintenance mode.

IMPORTANT Make sure you are specially trained in engine maintenance for this product to prevent major damage.

Procedure

1. On the operator panel, touch the [System] button. 2. Touch [Maintenance]. 3. Touch [Start maintenance]. 4. Touch [Printer maintenance]. 5. Touch [Start] . 6. Enter the maintenance PIN and touch [OK].

The [Printer maintenance] window opens. 7. Touch [Next] and wait a moment while the engine prepares for maintenance.

NOTE If you are specially trained in engine maintenance, you can now perform maintenance tasks using the Operator's Maintenance Manual.

IMPORTANT Only continue with the next step after you finished maintenance.

8. Touch [Next] to stop the engine maintenance mode. 9. Touch [Finish] to stop the preparation procedure. 10. Touch [Stop].

Engine maintenance (trained operators)

356 Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality

Remote Service

Introduction

NOTE Remote Service requires a license. Remote Service also requires permission to a printer dealer site outside the customer domain, either through a proxy server or IP white list. Contact your local IT specialist to give you the permission.

Remote Service is an application that runs on a printer or a separate server in the customer's network. Remote Service requires a working Internet connection to establish a secure connection between the customer's site and printer dealer. If a proxy server is present, Remote Service must be configured correctly in the Settings Editor.

Remote Service has the following functionality:

Functionality Description

Remote Diagnostics When a customer contacts the printer dealer in the event of a problem, the printer dealer can automatically retrieve service-rela- ted data from the printer for analysis and troubleshooting. With these data, the printer dealer can quickly identify the source of the problem and possibly solve the problem by telephone.

Remote Meter Reading This function counter information needed for billing can be auto- matically sent to the printer dealer on a regular basis. Then the customer does not need to collect the meter readings manually and send these to the printer dealer. The customer can always check the sent data and approve the meter readings.

Remote Assistance With this function, the printer dealer can take over the operator panel of the printer remotely to assist in case of a problem for ex- ample.

Using Remote Service

In the Settings Editor, all settings for the customer's proxy server must be set correctly ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity] -> [Proxy server]).

Via the operator panel, the remote connection must be enabled ([System] -> [Setup] ->[Local key operator settings] -> [Remote connection] -> [Remote connection enabled] -> [Yes]).

Via the operator panel, you can test the remote connection ([System] -> [Setup] ->[Local key operator settings] -> [Remote connection] -> [Test Remote connection]). The test can take up to 30 seconds. When the connection is not OK, a message indicates the reason for the failure.

The dashboard of the operator panel displays a red icon (see figure) when the printer becomes disconnected from the Internet. Make sure the connection is online; otherwise, the printer dealer cannot retrieve data from your printer.

If required, you can change a number of connectivity settings via the operator panel ([System] -> [Setup] ->[Local key operator settings] -> [Connectivity]).

You can verify the communication with the printer dealer by downloading the audit log files via the Settings Editor ([Support] -> [Logging] > [Save the log files of the remote service connection]). The Settings Editor keeps up to 4 audit log files. Each log file can contain maximum 10 Mb of data. When all 4 files are full, the first file is overwritten. You can open the audit log files with any text editing application.

Remote Service

Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality 357

Reset the day counters

Introduction

The [Maintenance] section of the [System] view displays 2 types of counters [Billing counters] [Day counters]

These counters provide information about the number of sheets that have been printed.

This section first describes the 2 counters in the [Maintenance] section and how to reset the day counters.

Procedure

1. On the operator panel, press the [System] button. 2. Press [Maintenance]. 3. Touch the [Reset day counters] button in the [Day counters] section.

A dialog box will ask you to confirm that you really want to reset the day counters. 4. Touch [Yes] to reset the day counters to 0.

Reset the day counters

358 Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality

Find the meter readings (counters)

Introduction

The [Printer] section of the [System] view displays 2 types of counters. The billing counters provide information about the number of sheets that have been printed

since the printer was installed. You cannot reset the billing counters. The day counters provide information about the number of prints since the last reset. You do

not need the day counters for the meter reading. The day counters are only intended for your own convenience.

This section describes how to find the counters.

Procedure

1. On the operator panel, press the [System] button. 2. Press [Maintenance].

You can find the required meter readings at the left-hand side of the screen.

Find the meter readings (counters)

Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality 359

Print the billing counters report

Introduction

You can print a report that contains all figures of the configured billing counters. The language of the billing counters report is the same as the selected language for the system.

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Print billing counters report].

Print the billing counters report

360 Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality

Keep the color quality high

About calibration Calibration is very important in keeping the print quality high for color reproduction. The environment of your print system influences the print quality. A constant temperature and humidity are essential for consistent color output.

PRISMAsync automatically keeps the print quality as high as possible. However, additional calibration is essential to keep the color reproduction level stable for all the media types you use. PRISMAsync offers a structured workflow and feedback mechanism to integrate calibration into your daily work.

There are two methods of calibration: the printer calibration and the media family calibration.

Printer calibration

Printer calibration has two procedures: Shading correction

The shading correction includes precise adjustments of slightly uneven color densities in color planes.

Automatic gradation adjustment The automatic gradation adjustment includes precise adjustments of the gradation, density and color quality of the primary colors.

The printer calibration settings on the control panel show which printer calibration procedures are configured for your print system. The dashboard of the control panel will show the printer calibration indicator when printer calibration is required.

Configuration of printer calibration

IMPORTANT It is strongly advised to configure the shading correction and automatic gradation adjustment for the daily printer calibration.

A test print is used to scan and correct the irregularities automatically.

To find the configuration for shading correction and automatic gradation in the Settings Editor: [Color] -> [Color calibration].

Media family calibration

PRISMAsync provides, as default, the coated and uncoated media families. A media family is a set of media with the same output profile (one per halftone) and calibration values.

Before you start a media family calibration, always perform the printer calibration.

A media family calibration is necessary for the following situations: After the installation of the print system, for the default media families coated and uncoated. When a new media family is created. When your service representative replaces system parts.

IMPORTANT Besides the listed situations it is advised to perform the media family calibration regularly.

Media for calibration

The printer and media family calibration need media.

Keep the color quality high

Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality 361

You can define and see the media for the printer calibration in the Settings Editor.

NOTE To find the media for printer calibration in the Settings Editor: [Preferences] -> [Print job defaults] -> [Calibration media].

Media for the printer calibration Canon CS-814 81.4 g/m Top Colour Zero FSC 100 g/m Mondi Neusiedler 100 g/m International Paper Hammermill 105 g/m

Media for the media family calibration

Make sure you use the same calibration media to represent the media family each time you perform a media family calibration. You can set per media family the default calibration media for media family calibration on the control panel.

Recommended calibration scenario

IMPORTANT You are advised to follow the next calibration scenario to keep the image quality high: Perform the printer calibration daily. Perform the media family calibration regularly.

For more information, see:

Calibrate the printer on page 363

Calibrate the media family on page 365

About calibration

362 Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality

Calibrate the printer It is important that the print system is calibrated daily. The calibration indicator on the dashboard helps to remind you when printer calibration is required. About calibration on page 361 (See )

Printer calibration is required.

As part of the procedure the system will print calibration charts. For an automatic measurement of these charts, an internal sensor must be installed in the printer.

IMPORTANT You are strongly advised to perform the printer calibration daily.

[83] The printer calibration settings

For more information, see:

About calibration on page 361

Calibrate the media family on page 365

Tools

Eye-One spectrophotometer

Before you begin

Media for calibration Prepare calibration media according to the calibration media specifications. Media for

calibration on page 361 (See ) First, print a job of about 100 sheets to ensure that the printer is warmed up.

Calibrate the printer

Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality 363

Procedure

1. Load the calibration media. 2. Connect the Eye-One spectrophotometer to the USB port in the control panel. 3. Touch the calibration indicator on the dashboard or go to [System] -> [Color adjustment]. 4. If required, touch [Printer calibration details] to check which calibration procedures are

configured. 5. Touch [Start printer calibration]. 6. Follow the instructions on the control panel.

NOTE In the exceptional cases where shading correction does not deliver the required color quality, you need to perform the automatic gradation adjustment before the shading correction.

After you finish

When the shading correction produces a "density not within required range" error, perform a correction procedure for this error. Density not within required range message on page 375 (See )

Calibrate the printer

364 Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality

Calibrate the media family Calibrate a media family in the following situations: After the installation of the print system, for the default coated and uncoated media families. When a new media family is created. When a service replaces system parts.

IMPORTANT A media family calibration applies to all media of the media family. You only have to perform

a media family calibration for one media of the media family. This one media is the media that is defined for calibration.

A warning symbol indicates that a media family is not calibrated.

For more information see:

About calibration on page 361

Calibrate the printer on page 363

Tools

Eye-One spectrophotometer.

Before you begin

Make sure you use the same calibration media to represent the media family each time you perform a media family calibration. You can set per media family the default calibration media for media family calibration.

Procedure

1. Calibrate the printer. (See Calibrate the printer on page 363)

Calibrate the media family

Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality 365

IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure.

2. Connect the Eye-One spectrophotometer to the USB port in the control panel. 3. Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Media family calibration]. 4. Select the media family to calibrate. 5. Select the media for calibration, if required.

The system displays the default selected media for calibration. 6. Load the calibration media. 7. Touch [OK]. 8. Follow the instructions on the control panel.

Calibrate the media family

366 Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality

Adjust the color quality

Create a trapping preset

IMPORTANT First, check whether the printer calibration delivers the required color quality before you perform this procedure. About calibration on page 361 (See )

When you notice white edges between color planes, use a trapping preset to correct the connection between the color planes. A trapping preset is a collection of trapping settings for a job or job subset. Use the trapping preset editor to create your own trapping presets.

[84] Trapping preset editor

The trapping preset window provides an interface to create trapping presets. The following groups of settings are available: Trap width: value to specify the overlap for each trap Trap appearance: options to control the shape of the trap joins Images: options how to trap images Trap threshold: values to specify when trapping occurs

Be aware that an edge can appear at locations where color planes overlap each other.

Before you begin

First check if an automatic color mismatch correction solves the problem. Auto color mismatch correction on page 351 (See )

Procedure

1. Calibrate the printer. Calibrate the printer on page 363 (See )

Adjust the color quality

Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality 367

IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure.

2. Press [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Trapping presets editor]: 3. Enter your key operator PIN. 4. Select one of the available trapping presets. 5. Define the trapping settings in the [Trap width], [Trap appearance], [Images] and [Trap

thresholds] panes. 6. Click [Save as] to save the settings and enter a name for the preset. 7. Click [OK].

Create a trapping preset

368 Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality

Perform a manual shading correction

IMPORTANT First, check whether the printer calibration delivers the required color quality before you perform this procedure. About calibration on page 361 (See )

Perform a manual shading correction when you want to correct the color panes manually or the color panes close to the edges of the sheet.

Tools

Eye-One spectrophotometer.

Perform a manual shading correction

[85] Manual shading correction options

1. Calibrate the printer. Calibrate the printer on page 363 (See )

IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure.

2. Load the largest size uncoated media you use, for example SRA3. 3. Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Manual shading correction]. 4. Touch [Print chart] to print the gradation chart. 5. Check each color bar on uneven color densities. 6. Make the corrections on the locations where you see deviations.

The locations are indicated per color with a number from -6 to 6. The initial values are displayed between brackets.

7. Repeat step 3 - 5 until each color bar has a uniform color. 8. Touch [OK].

Perform a manual shading correction

Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality 369

After you finish

In the exceptional case where the manual shading correction does not deliver the required color quality, do the following: 1. Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Manual shading correction]. 2. Touch [Set all to 0]. 3. Perform an automatic shading correction. Calibrate the printer on page 363 (See ) 4. Continue with the manual shading correction.

Perform a manual shading correction

370 Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality

Adjust CMYK curves for a job

IMPORTANT First, check whether the printer calibration delivers the required color quality before you perform this procedure. About calibration on page 361 (See )

In exceptional cases, it is necessary to adjust the calibrated CMYK curves on job level. With the CMYK curves you can adjust control points throughout the tonal range of an image. You can adjust the CMYK curves for a job in the following locations: Lit of scheduled jobs List of waiting jobs A DocBox

IMPORTANT Be aware that a consistent reproduction of colors is difficult when you adjust CMYK curves on job level.

[86] Adjustment in basic mode

Adjust CMYK curves for a job

Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality 371

[87] Adjustment in advanced mode

Procedure

1. Calibrate the printer. Calibrate the printer on page 363 (See )

IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure.

2. Touch [Jobs] and go to the location of the job. 3. Go to the location of the job. 4. Select the job you want to change. 5. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 6. Touch [Adjust image].

The [Basic mode] window opens. 7. Set the density values for the four colors or go to the [Advanced mode]. 8. Open the [Advanced mode].

The window opens with the color Cyan. 1. Define the color clipping range. 2. Select a tonal area you want to adjust. This places a control point on the curve. 3. Use the sliders or + and - buttons on the input and output axes to move the control points of

each tonal area. 4. When ready, select a new color.

9. Save the adjustments as a preset for later use, if required.

Adjust CMYK curves for a job

372 Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality

Adjust CMYK curves for a media family

IMPORTANT First, check whether the printer calibration delivers the required color quality before you perform this procedure. About calibration on page 361 (See )

Sometimes it is necessary to adjust the color density for specific media. You can emphasize colors or other elements for images printed on media that belong to a media family. The adjustment of the CMYK curves applies to all jobs that use media of the media family. With the CMYK curves you can adjust control points throughout the tonal range of an image. The new CMYK curves are added to the media family calibration values.

IMPORTANT Be aware that the CMYK adjustments affect all media of the media family.

[88] Adjustments in basic mode

Adjust CMYK curves for a media family

Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality 373

[89] Adjustments in advanced mode

Procedure

1. Calibrate the printer. Calibrate the printer on page 363 (See )

IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure.

2. Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Edit CMYK curves manually]. 3. Enter your login information. 4. Select the media family. 5. Select the halftone. 6. Touch [Edit].

The [Basic mode] window opens. 7. Set the density values for the four colors or go to the [Advanced mode]. 8. Open the [Advanced mode].

The window opens with the color Cyan. 1. Define the color clipping range. 2. Select a tonal area you want to adjust. This places a control point on the curve. 3. Use the sliders or + and - buttons on the input and output axes to move the control points of

each tonal area. 4. When ready, select a new color.

9. Repeat step 4 - 7 for other halftones, if required. 10. Save the adjustments as a preset for later use, if required.

Adjust CMYK curves for a media family

374 Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality

Density not within required range message

Introduction

In exceptional cases, the [Shading correction] procedure fails with a 'Density not within required range' message. In that case, follow the next procedure.

Procedure

1. At [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Printer calibration details]: 1. Select [Auto gradation adjustment]. 2. Deselect [Shading correction].

2. Touch [Start printer calibration]. 3. Follow the instructions on the operator panel. 4. Select [Automatic (internal sensor)] in the [Calibration method] window. 5. At [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Printer calibration details].

1. Select [Auto gradation adjustment]. 2. Select [Shading correction].

6. Follow the instructions on the operator panel. 7. Select [Automatic (internal sensor)] in the [Calibration method] window.

After you finish

If the [Shading correction] procedure still fails, contact your local service representative.

Density not within required range message

Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality 375

Create output profiles

Create G7 calibration curves with an external tool PRISMAsync supports the use of calibration curves created by an external tool, for example CHROMiX Curve3 . PRISMAsync uses media families to indicate which output profiles and calibration curves must be applied to a media. Hence, the creation of a new media family with the factory default G7 output profiles is part of this procedure.

Before you begin

Enable G7 support in the Settings Editor: [Color] -> [Color calibration]. A file with a chart intended for G7 calibration, for example the P2P25 calibration chart.

Procedure

1. Calibrate the printer. Calibrate the printer on page 363 (See )

IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure.

2. Create a G7 media family in the Settings Editor. Maintain the Media families on page 55 (See ) 1. Open the Settings Editor. 2. Create a new G7 media family. 3. Create a new media for the G7 media family.

3. Print the G7 measurement chart via an automated workflow. Automated workflows (access through the Settings Editor) on page 205 (See ) 1. Create a new automated workflow. 2. Select the media on which the measurement chart will be printed. 3. At [Measurement chart printing] select [G7] to print without color management. 4. Print the G7 measurement chart via the G7 automated workflow.

4. Measure the calibration chart. 1. Measure the chart, for example with an X-Rite device. 2. Calculate the calibration curves with the external tool.

5. Import the calculated G7 calibration curves to the G7 media family in the Settings Editor.

After you finish

You can only disable G7 support in the Settings Editor when all G7 media families are removed.

Create output profiles

376 Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality

Create G7 output profiles with the embedded profiler The creation of G7 output profiles and calibration curves with PRISMAsync is very easy and quick. PRISMAsync uses media families to indicate which output profiles and calibration curves must be applied to a media. Hence, the creation of a new media family with new output profiles and calibration curves are part of this procedure.

[90] The G7 calibration options

Before you begin

Enable G7 support in the Settings Editor: [Color] -> [Color calibration].

Procedure

1. Calibrate the printer. Calibrate the printer on page 363 (See )

IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure.

2. Touch [ Create new media family] when you add new media to the media catalog. (See Add media to the media catalog on page 104)

3. Touch [G7] and [ Calibrate and profile after creation] when you create the new media family. 4. Load the calibration media. 5. Touch [OK]. 6. Follow the instructions on the control panel. 7. Close the menu.

After you finish

You can find the new G7 media family with output profile on the Settings Editor: [Media] -> [Media families].

Create G7 output profiles with the embedded profiler

Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality 377

Create output profiles with the embedded profiler Output profiles (ICC profiles) determine how the system will print color. PRISMAsync uses default media families to indicate which output profiles will be applied to a media.

When the default output profiles do not achieve your color reproduction standards for specific media, you can use the embedded color profiler to create new output profiles. The creation of new output profiles is done via a media family calibration. The embedded color profiler creates and installs an output profile and calibration curve for every halftone. As part of the procedure, you measure the calibration charts printed on the specific media.

[91] Indicate media family calibration options and output profile creation

Procedure

1. Calibrate the printer. Calibrate the printer on page 363 (See )

IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure.

2. Touch [System] -> [Media] -> [New]. 3. Fill out the general media attributes.

NOTE For optimal print quality, you must define the correct values for the following media attributes: Size Weight Surface type

4. Select [ Create new media family]. 5. Touch [OK]. 6. Select [Calibrate media family]. 7. Select [Include output profile creation]. 8. Load at least 12 sheets of the media for which you create the media family.

Create output profiles with the embedded profiler

378 Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality

9. Touch [OK]. 10. Follow the instructions on the control panel. 11. Close the menu.

After you finish

You can find the new media family with output profiles in the Settings Editor: [Media] -> [Media families].

Create output profiles with the embedded profiler

Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality 379

Problem Solving Problems occur due to a print system or a job handling problem.

Below you can find an overview of solutions for problems that can occur.

Problem Solution

Similar colors for text and color panes in the source document are different on the printed out- put.

Perform a media calibration for all halftones. (See Calibrate the media family on page 365)

Similar colors in the source document are different on dif- ferent media.

When the different media are in two media families, calibrate both media families. (See Calibrate the media family on page 365)

CMYK colors are not correctly aligned.

Perform the automatic color mismatch procedure. (See Auto color mismatch correction on page 351)

Printed output has white gaps between color panes.

Perform the automatic color mismatch procedure (See Auto color mismatch correction on page 351) When the automatic color mismatch procedure does not solve the problem, enable the trapping preset setting. You can create new trapping presets. (see Description of the print job settings on page 161 Opera- tion guide - trapping)

An uneven density occurs. 1. Perform the Shading correction procedure. 2. Perform the Auto gradation adjustment procedure.

(See About calibration on page 361)

Gradation problem occurs. 1. Reset the Auto gradation adjustment calibration curves. 2. Perform the Auto gradation adjustment procedure.

(See About calibration on page 361)

Uneven color planes occur. The Shading correction procedure assures consistent, even color planes on the output. (See About calibration on page 361)

Problem Solving

380 Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality

Install system software Your local service representative dealer will inform you when a new version of the system software is available. If Remote Service is enabled, the dashboard will indicate that a new version is ready to download and install.

New system software is available

[92] Software update options

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Local key operator settings]. 2. Enter your key operator PIN. 3. Touch [Software updates]. 4. Touch [Download]. 5. Touch [Install].

NOTE The [Install] button appears when downloading is ready. You cannot use the print system during installation. You can install the new version also at a later moment.

6. Close the menu.

After you finish

To ensure that new software versions are downloaded automatically, touch [Download automatically].

Install system software

Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality 381

Install system software

382 Chapter 14 - Maintenance and print quality

Chapter 15 Specifications

Specifications

Technology

Specification Value

Imaging technology Electrophotography; no fusing oil

Toner V-toner

Resolution 1,200 x 1,200 dpi

Color gradations 256 per color

Color depth 8 bits per color

Maximum imageable area 323 x 482.7 mm / 12.72" x 19"

Features Operator attention light with adjustable warn-ahead functions, Real-time automatic color calibration Dual Fusing technology On-the-fly toner and paper refill Automatic duplexing (up to 325 g/m / 120 lb cover) Active registration

Print speed

Specification imagePRESS C7010VPS / C6010VPS

Value

A4 LTR

60 - 325 g/m 16 lb bond - 120 lb cover

71.6 ppm / 61.7 ppm

A3 11" x 17"

60 - 209 g/m 16 lb bond - 78 lb cover

38.5 ppm / 33 ppm

210 - 325 g/m 79 lb cover - 120 lb cover

36 ppm / 30.8 ppm

SRA3 60 - 209 g/m 16 lb bond - 78 lb cover

36.2 ppm / 31.0 ppm

210 - 325 g/m 79 lb cover - 120 lb cover

33.6 ppm / 28.8 ppm

13" x 19.2" 330.2 x 487.7 mm

60 - 209 g/m 16 lb bond - 78 lb cover

33.6 ppm / 28.8 ppm

210 - 325 g/m 79 lb cover - 120 lb cover

31.3 ppm / 26.8 ppm

Note The Customer Expectation Document provides detailed information on speed per paper size and paper weight, simplex, and duplex.

Specifications

384 Chapter 15 - Specifications

Specification imagePRESS C6010S

Value

A4 LTR

60 - 135 g/m 16 lb bond - 36 lb bond

61.7 ppm

136 - 220 g/m 37 lb bond - 81 lb cover

53.6 ppm

221 - 325 g/m 82 lb cover - 120 lb cover

41.2 ppm

A3 11" x 17"

60 - 135 g/m 16 lb bond - 36 lb bond

33.0 ppm

136 - 150 g/m 37 lb bond - 56 lb bond

30.8 ppm

151 - 220 g/m 60 lb cover - 81 lb cover

26.8 ppm

221 - 256 g/m 82 lb cover - 94 lb cover

23.0 ppm

257 - 325 g/m 95 lb cover - 120 lb cover

20.6 ppm

SRA3 60 - 135 g/m 16 lb bond - 36 lb bond

31.0 ppm

136 - 150 g/m 37 lb bond - 56 lb bond

28.8 ppm

151 - 220 g/m 60 lb cover - 81 lb cover

25.0 ppm

221 - 256 g/m 82 lb cover - 94 lb cover

21.5 ppm

257 - 325 g/m 95 lb cover - 120 lb cover

19.2 ppm

13" x 19.2" 330.2 x 487.7 mm

60 - 135 g/m 16 lb bond - 36 lb bond

28.8 ppm

136 - 150 g/m 37 lb bond - 56 lb bond

26.8 ppm

151 - 220 g/m 60 lb cover - 81 lb cover

23.3 ppm

221 - 256 g/m 82 lb cover - 94 lb cover

20.1 ppm

257 - 325 g/m 95 lb cover - 120 lb cover

17.9 ppm

Note The Customer Expectation Document provides detailed information on speed per paper size and paper weight, simplex, and duplex.

Specifications

Chapter 15 - Specifications 385

PRISMAsync

Specification Value

Description Integrated high-performance PRISMAsync color controller for im- agePRESS C7010VPS series

Operating system Windows 7

Processor Intel Core

Memory 16 GB

Hard disk 3 x 3.5" SATA II, 250 GB, 7200 RPM

Interface Ethernet (10/100/1000 Base-T), TCP/IP (LPR /LPD, 9100 Socket, SMB), Static IP / Auto-IP (DHCP)

Page Description Language Adobe PostScript 3 (3020), PDF 1.7 Extension level 3, PDF/X, Opti- mised PostScript, Optimised PDF, Adobe PDF Print Engine 3.4, PPML/GA level 1 of PPML 1.5, 2.1 and 2.2

Protocols SNMP v1/v2c/v3, Host resources MIB, System group MIB II, Printer MIB, Job Monitor MIB

Security E-shredding, HTTPs, LDAP, SNMP v3, User authentication (per user role: key operator, system administrator, service technician)

Spot color libraries HKS K, HKS K 3000+, HKS N, HKS N 3000+, Pantone Goe (Uncoa- ted / Coated), Pantone + solid (Uncoated / Coated) Pantone + solid 336 new (Uncoated / Coated)

Options X-Rite i1 Basic for calibration X-Rite i1 Process Control (software, i1 spectrophotometer non-UV) X-Rite i1 Process Control Production (software, i1 spectrophotom- eter non-UV, i1 IO scanning table) Remote Viewer license Scanning license E-shredding license Advanced Color Management license: DeviceLink support Color simulation support Named color profile support Color mapping (leave out separations) Color control and information bars

DocBox license Page Programming license Remote Service license Remote Manager license Protection against unauthorised software license PPML for printing license PCL6 Transaction Printing license IPDS Transaction Printing license Asian font sets: Korean, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese

Languages British English, French, Italian, German, Spanish, Dutch, Finnish, Norwegian, Swedish, Danish, Polish, Czech, Hungarian, Portu- guese, American English, Russian, Japanese, Simplified Chinese

Specifications

386 Chapter 15 - Specifications

General

Specification Value

Device memory (SDRAM) 1.5 GB

Operation 15" full color touch screen operating panel

Hard disk 2 x 80 GB (scanning)

Warm-up time 7 minutes

Front-to-back registration tolerance

+ / - 0.5 mm, Active registration, Automatic shrinkage compensa- tion See for details: Note

Dimensions main engine (WxDxH)

2,586 mm x 1,152 mm x 1,750 mm / 101.81" "x 45.35" x 68.90" (including Operator panel and Operator attention light) 2,586 mm x 1,152 mm x 1,330 mm / 101.81" " x 45.35" x 52.36" (without Operator panel and Operator attention light)

Weight main engine 1,200 kg / 2,645.55 lb (with Scanner)

Security Optional E-shredding

Certificates TV/CE, UL, RoHs

Note Tolerance simplex/first side duplex printing: varies up to + 0.5 mm / 0.02" in feed direction and + 0.5 mm / 0,02" in cross-feed di- rection Tolerance second side duplex printing: varies up to + 0.5 mm / 0.02" feed direction and + 0.5 mm / 0.02" in cross-feed direction Front-to-back alignment can vary up to maximum 1 mm / 0.039" in feed direction, 1 mm / 0.039" in cross-feed direction and 1.4 mm / 0.055" diagonally

Environmental

Specification Value

Sound power level Standby mode: 75.7 dB Print mode: 82 dB

Ozone emissions Initial startup: maximum 0.01 parts per million After a short break-in period: maximum 0.035 parts per million

Optimum temperature 20 C - 27 C / 68 F - 80.6 F

Power requirement imagePRESS C7010VPS: 208 V, 60 Hz, 30 A (3-phase) imagePRESS C6010VPS: 208 V, 60 Hz, 30 A (3-phase) imagePRESS C6010S: 208 V, 60 Hz, 30 A

Power consumption imagePRESS C7010VPS: 8,500 W maximum imagePRESS C6010VPS: 8,500 W maximum imagePRESS C6010S: 6,000 W maximum

Relative humidity 30% - 70%

Atmospheric pressure 4,000 m (607.8 hPa) maximum

Specifications

Chapter 15 - Specifications 387

Paper handling

Specification Value

Paper trays Two standard paper trays Options: Left-hand paper module, Right-hand paper module, Bulk paper module, Special feeder

Maximum paper capacity 10,000 sheets from 2 standard paper trays and 6 paper trays of pa- per input modules (80 g/m / 22 lb bond)

Paper weight 60 - 325 g/m / 16 lb bond - 120 lb cover; Coated paper 70 - 325 g/ m / 19 lb bond - 120 lb cover; Special feeder 64 - 256 g/m / 17 lb bond - 94 lb cover

Paper size A4, A4R, A3, SRA3, B5, B5R, B4, Letter, LetterR, Legal, Executive, 11" x 17" (279 mm x 432 mm), 12" x 18" (305 mm x 457 mm), 13" x 19.2" (330.2 mm x 487.7 mm), 4-pane postcard Custom sizes: 139.7 mm x 182 mm - 330 mm x 487.7 mm / 5.5" x 7.17" - 13" x 19.2"

Media Plain paper, Coated paper, Recycled paper, Colored paper, Tex- tured paper, tabs, Prepunched paper, Transparencies, Labels, Postcards, Offset media

Paper feed technology Suction feed (except bulk paper module) Air separation

Features Double-sheet detection Automatic paper tray switching

Standard paper trays

Specification Value

Capacity 2 x 1,000 sheets (80 g/m / 22 lb bond)

Paper weight 60 - 325 g/m / 16 lb bond - 120 lb cover

Paper feed technology Suction feed Air separation

Features Paper level detection (visual) Automatic tray opening Double sheet detection

Paper module (POD Deck-A1)

Specification Value

Description Optional 3-tray paper module; up to 2 paper modules can be in- stalled

Paper trays 2 x 1,000 sheets, 1 x 2,000 sheets (80 g/m / 22 lb bond)

Maximum paper capacity 8000 sheets (2 paper modules) 4

Specifications

388 Chapter 15 - Specifications

Specification Value

Dimensions (WxDxH) Left-hand paper module: 982 mm x 792 mm x 1095 mm / 38.66" x 31.18" x 43.11" Right-hand paper module: 811 mm x 792 mm x 1,095 mm / 32" x 31.18" x 43.11"

Weight 250 kg / 551 lb 480 kg / 1,058 lb for tandem of first and second paper module

Power requirement POD Deck-A1: 200-208 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 6 A Secondary POD Deck-A1: From POD Deck-A1 (200-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 2.8 A)

Power consumption POD Deck-A1 only: 750 W maximum POD Deck-A1 + Secondary POD Deck-A1: 1,380 W maximum

Paper feed technology Suction feed Air separation

Features Paper level detection (visual) Automatic tray opening Escape tray

For automatic shoot out of sheets in case of double-sheet feed- ing

Bulk paper module (Paper Deck-AC1)

Specification Value

Description Optional single-tray paper module

Paper trays 1 x 3,500 sheets (80 g/m / 22 lb bond)

Paper weight 64 - 300 g/m / 17 lb bond - 110 lb cover

Paper size A4, A4R, A3, SRA3, B5, B4, LTR, LTRR, LGL, Ledger, 12" x 18" / 304.8 x 457.2 mm, 13" x 19" / 330.2mm x 482.6 mm No custom sizes supported.

Dimensions (WxDxH) 601 mm x 621 mm x 570 mm / 23.66" x 24.45" x 22.44"

Weight 51 kg / 112 lb

Power consumption From main engine

Paper feed technology Friction feed Air separation

Features Automatic tray opening

Special feeder (Stack Bypass-A1)

Specification Value

Maximum paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m / 22 lb bond)

Paper weight 64 - 256 g/m / 17 lb bond - 95 lb cover 4

Specifications

Chapter 15 - Specifications 389

Specification Value

Paper size A3R, A4R, A4, B4R, B5R, B5, A5R, SRA3, 11" x 17", LGLS, LTRL, LTRS, STMTS, 12" x 18", 13" x 19", Exec Custom sizes: 139.7 mm x 182 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 5.5" x 7.17" - 13" x 19.2" Only when enabled by your service representative and using the output tray: 100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 762 mm / 3.9" x 5.8" - 13" x 30"

Notes Feed coated paper one sheet at a time. Loading several sheets together may cause paper jams.

Not available in combination with external paper module.

Scanning license

Specification Value

Resolution 150 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 600 dpi

Destination Scan-to-Email, Scan-to-FTP, Scan-to-PRISMAaccess, Scan-to-USB

File format (Single- / Multi-page) TIFF, JPEG, PDF

Features Direct embedding of sRGB or Adobe RGB color profiles for scan- ning to PDF, Scan-while-warming-up, Standard and user-defined scan and copy templates

Scan options

Specification Value

Scan speed A4 / LTR 1-sided: 20 ipm A4 / LTR 2-sided: 15 ipm (with Automatic Document Feeder) For direct scan-to-print, i.e. copying the scan speed only influen- ces the output of the first set. From the second copy set the output is at full engine speed.

First copy time 33 seconds (from glass platen)

Resolution 600 x 600 dpi, 8 bit

Destination Scan-to-Email, Scan-to-FTP

Original size A5, A4, A3, Letter, Legal Custom sizes: 148 mm x 210 mm - 297 mm x 420 mm / 5.83" x 8.27" - 11.69" x 16.54"

Automatic Document Feeder (DADF-R1)

Specification Value

Description Duplex document feeder for 1- or 2-sided originals

Capacity 100 originals (80 g/m / 22 lb bond) 4

Specifications

390 Chapter 15 - Specifications

Specification Value

Original size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5 or Foolscap A5 originals cannot be placed horizontally (A5R).

11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, or 8" x 13" STMT originals cannot be placed horizontally (STMTR).

Custom sizes: 139.7 mm x 182 mm to 630 mm x 297 mm / 5.5" x 7.17" to 24.80" x 11.69"

Original paper weight A5 / STMT / A4 / LTR 1-sided/2-sided: 216 g/m / 80 lb cover A3 / 11" x 17" 1-sided: 216 g/m / 80 lb cover A3 / 11" x 17" 2-sided: 216 g/m / 80 lb cover

Dimensions (WxDxH) 646 mm x 570 mm x 143 mm / 25.43" x 22.44" x 5.63"

Power consumption From main engine

Weight unit 22.0 kg / 49 lb

Option for Scanner

Glass plate cover (Platen Cover Type K)

Specification Value

Description Glass plate cover to keep originals in place for scanning or copy- ing

Option for Scanner

Tab feeder (Tab Feeding Attachment-C1)

Specification Value

Description Needed for reliable tab feeding. One kit is needed per paper tray to support tab feeding

Option for For the paper modules of the main unit and the optional POD Deck-A1/Secondary POD Deck-A1

Stacker/Stapler AJ1 (Finisher-AJ1)

Specification Value

Description Finisher offering (offset) stacking and stapling with staple cut func- tionality for thin sets

Maximum stapling capacity A4, LTR, A4R, LTRR, B4, LGL, B5, EXEC: 100 sheets (80 g/m / 22 lb bond) A3 / 11" x 17", LGL: 50 sheets (80 g/m / 22 lb bond)

Output capacity Straight delivery: 3000 sheets (Top tray), 2000 sheets (Lower tray) Stapling: 100 sets (Top tray and Lower tray)

Paper weigh 60 - 325 g/m / 16 lb bond - 120 lb cover

Paper size Stapling: A4, A4R, A3, B5, B4, LTR, LTRR, LGL, EXEC, 11" x 17" Stacking: as defined for main engine 4

Specifications

Chapter 15 - Specifications 391

Specification Value

Dimensions (WxDxH) 800 mm x 792 mm x 1,180 mm / 31.5" x 31.18" x 46,46" 890 mm x 792 mm x 1,180 mm / 35.01" x 31.18" x 46,46" when Ex- pansion tray is attached

Weight 130 kg / 287 lb

Power consumption Maximum Power Consumption: 450 W

Power requirement 120-127 V AC, 60 Hz, 8 A

Features Corner stapling, Two-point stapling, Staple clinch

Note Staple cut depends on thickness set

Stacker/Stapler AJ2 (Saddle Finisher-AJ2)

Specification Value

Description Booklet maker with same stacking and stapling capabilities as stacker/stapler extended with saddle-stitch and saddle-press func- tionality.

Maximum stapling capacity 25 sheets (80 g/m / 22 lb bond)

Output capacity On Conveyor belt: 30 booklets (80 g/m / 22 lb bond) Unlimited stacking by delivering booklets to external catch tray

Paper weight Booklet pages: 60 - 220 g/m / 16 lb bond - 82 lb cover Booklet cover: 64 - 300 g/m / 17 lb bond - 110 lb cover

Paper size A4R, A3, SRA3, B4, LTR, LGL, 11" x 17", 12" x 18", 13" x 19" (before folding) Custom sizes: 210 mm x 279.4 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 8.27" x 11" - 13" x 19.2"

Dimensions (WxDxH) 800 mm x 792 mm x 1,180 mm / 31.5" x 31.18" x 46.46" 1,060 mm x 792 mm x 1,180 mm / 41,73" x 31.18" x 46.46" (includ- ing Booklet tray)

Weight 180 kg / 397 lb

Power consumption 450 W maximum

Power requirement 120-127 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 8 A

Features Saddle press functionality to increase the flatness of booklets, Sta- ple clinch

Note Staple cut depends on thickness set

Inserter (Document Insertion Unit-C1)

Specification Value

Description Unit to insert sheets and covers

Paper trays 2

Maximum paper capacity 2 x 200 sheets (80 g/m / 22 lb bond) 4

Specifications

392 Chapter 15 - Specifications

Specification Value

Media Uncoated paper (60 - 300 g/m / 16 lb bond - 110 lb cover), Coated paper (80 - 300 g/m / 22 lb bond - 110 lb cover), Recycled paper, Colored paper, Prepunched paper, Embossed paper, Vellum, Bond paper

Paper weight 60 - 300 g/m / 16 lb bond - 110 lb cover Coated paper 80 - 300 g/m / 22 lb bond - 110 lb cover

Paper size A4, A4R, B5, B5R, LTR, LTRR, EXECTray 1: A4, A4R, B5, B5R, LTR, LTRR, EXEC Custom sizes: 182 mm x 182 mm - 297 mm x 330.2 mm / 7,17" x 7.17" - 11.69" x 13" Tray 2: A4, A4R, A3, SRA3, B5, B5R, B4, LTR, LTRR, LGL, EXEC, EXECR, 11" x 17", 12" x 18", 13" x 19" Custom sizes: 182 mm x 182 mm - 330 mm x487.7 mm / 7.17" x 7.17" - 13" x 9.2"

Dimensions (WxDxH) 625 mm x 667 mm x 213 mm / 24.6" x 26.26" x 8.39"

Weight 17 kg / 38 lb

Option for Finisher-AJ1; Saddle Finisher-AJ2

Trimmer D1 (Booklet Trimmer-D1)

Specification Value

Description Leading-edge booklet trimmer with Conveyor belt

Trim capacity 50 sheets: 48 book pages (80 g/m / 22 lb bond) including 2 cover sheets (up to 300 g/m / 110 lb cover)

Trim width 2 - 20 mm / 0.08" - 0.8"

Output capacity 30 booklets

Waste tray capacity 1500 trimmed strips

Paper size As defined for Saddle Finisher-AJ2

Dimensions (WxDxH) 1,575 mm x 770 mm x 1,040 mm / 62" x 30.31" x 40,95"

Weight 152 kg / 335 lb

Power requirement From the finisher

Power consumption 300 W or less

Option for Saddle Finisher-AJ2

Trimmer A1 (Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer-A1)

Specification Value

Description Two-knife trimmer top-, bottom-edge (Two-Knife Booklet Trim- mer-A1) 4

Specifications

Chapter 15 - Specifications 393

Specification Value

Trim capacity Uncoated paper: 60 - 80 g/m / 16 lb bond - 22 lb bond: 25 sheets (50 sheets by half-fold) * 80.1 - 105 g/m / 23 lb bond - 28 lb bond: 15 sheets (30 sheets by half-fold) * 105.1 - 209 g/m / 29 lb bond - 78 lb cover: 5 sheets (10 sheets by half-fold) * 209.1 - 220 g/m / 79 lb cover - 82 lb cover: 4 sheets (8 sheets by half-fold) * 1 sheet fold: 105 - 300 g/m / 28 lb bond - 110 lb cover Coated paper: 70 - 79.9 g/m / 17 lb bond - 21 lb bond: 10 sheets (20 sheets by half-fold) * 80 - 81.4 g/m / 22 lb bond: 15 sheets (30 sheets by half-fold) * 81.5 - 128 g/m / 23 lb bond - 34 lb bond: 10 sheets (20 sheets by half-fold) * 128.1 - 209 g/m / 24 lb bond - 78 lb cover: 5 sheets (10 sheets by half-fold) * 209.1 - 220 g/m / 79 lb cover - 81 lb cover: 4 sheets (8 sheets by half-fold) * 1 sheet fold: 120 - 300 g/m / 32 lb bond - 110 lb cover * 64 - 300 g/m / 17 lb bond - 110 lb cover is available as cover sheet, but paper weight of cover sheet should be more than body sheet

Trim width 2 - 15 mm / 0.08" - 0.59" top and bottom

Minimum book height 190 mm / 7.48"

Output capacity 30 booklets Conveyor belt of Trimmer is attached to Two-Knife Booklet Trim- mer-A1

Waste tray capacity 1500 trimmed strips

Paper size As defined for Stacker/stapler (Saddle Finisher-AJ2)

Dimensions (WxDxH) 536 mm x 770 mm x 1,040 mm / 21.10" x 30.31" x 40.94" (without Conveyor belt and Output tray)

Weight 145 kg / 319 lb

Power requirement 120-127 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 4 A

Option for Trimmer

Punch unit (Puncher Unit-BB1 (2 / 3 holes))

Specification Value

Description Built-in 2- and 3-hole punch unit

Paper weight 60 - 200 g/m / 16 lb bond - 110 lb index (no Transparencies)

Paper size 2 holes: LTRR, Legal 3 holes: Letter, Executive, 11" x 17" 4

Specifications

394 Chapter 15 - Specifications

Specification Value

Hole diameter 6.5 mm / 0.26"

Option for Finisher-AJ1 or Saddle Finisher-AJ2

Puncher (Professional Puncher-B1; Professional Puncher Integration Unit-C1)

Specifications Value

Description Die punching with 12 interchangeable dies for plastic comb-, twin loop-, color coil-, pro click-, velo- and ring binding

Paper weight Uncoated paper: 75 - 216 g/m / 20 lb bond - 80 lb cover Coated paper: 120 - 216 g/m / 32 lb bond - 80 lb cover Exact specifications depend on die set

Paper size A4, Tabs (A4), Letter, Tabs (Letter)

Dimensions (WxDxH) 305 mm x 792 mm x 1,040 mm / 12" x 31.18" x 40.94" (Professional Puncher-B1) 250 mm x 792 mm x 1,040 mm / 9.84" x 1.18" x 40.94" (Professio- nal Puncher Integration Unit-C1)

Weight 80 kg / 176 lb (Professional Puncher-B1) 40 kg / 88 lb (Professional Puncher Integration Unit-C1)

Replaceable punch die sets (A4 / LTR)

Loose Leaf 3-Hole/5-Hole, Velo Bind 11 hole, Plastic Comb 19-hole, Twin Loop-21 hole/32 hole, ProClick 32-Hole, Color Coil 44-hole, Plastic Comb 19-hole (High Durability), Color Coil 44-hole (High Durability), Loose Leaf 3-Hole (High Durability)

Power requirement 120-127 V AC, 60 Hz, 5.5 A (Professional Puncher Integration Unit- C1)

Power consumption Professional Puncher-B1 takes power from Professional Puncher Integration Unit-C1

Specifications

Chapter 15 - Specifications 395

Settings Editor specifications

URL to access the Settings Editor http:// https://

Recommended resolution of your computer screen

Minimum 640 x 480 pixels

Supported web browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 and higher Mozilla Firefox 10 and higher Google Chrome 17 and higher Apple Safari 6 and higher

Language As defined in your browser, as long as the printer sup- ports this language

Settings Editor specifications

396 Chapter 15 - Specifications

Settings Editor settings and information The Settings Editor provides settings and overviews to enable configuration of the print system. The overview below shows the setting groups, and includes the location and authorization needed to change the settings. You can also use the search field at the upper right-hand corner of the Settings Editor to access a setting. Be aware that not all tabs are searched.

All staff can view the Settings Editor settings.

Meaning of the abbreviations

* = the setting is also available on the control panel

SA = only the system administrator can change the setting

KO = both the key operator and system administrator can change the setting

Access the Settings Editor

You can open the Settings Editor when you enter the IP-address or the hostname of the controller in the address bar of your web browser. The Settings Editor uses the same language as the web browser. When you want to change the language of the Settings Editor, change the language of the web browser. (See Settings Editor specifications on page 396)

General information

Settings and information Location Role

Contact information * [Support] -> [About] KO

Overview of system information * [Support] -> [About]

Overview of licenses * [Support] -> [Software]

Basic settings

Settings and information Location Role

Regional settings * (language of user interface, date and time, measurement method, time zone)

[Preferences] -> [System settings] KO

Software download, upgrade and installation

Settings and information Location Role

Upload license file * [Support] -> [Software] SA

Software upgrade * [Support] -> [Software updates] SA

Printer driver download * [Support] -> [Software] KO

Confirmation of automatic system recov- ery *

[Configuration] -> [Security] SA

Install from USB * [Configuration] -> [Security] SA

Settings Editor settings and information

Chapter 15 - Specifications 397

Connectivity

Settings and information Location Role

Integration into the network * (location, hostname, MAC address, net- work interface card)

[Configuration] -> [Connectivity] SA

TCP/IP connection * (DHCP server, IP address, Subnet mask, Default gateway, DNS server, DHCP serv- er)

[Configuration] -> [Connectivity] SA

SNMP, SNMP v1/v2c and SNMP v3 sup- port

[Configuration] -> [Connectivity] SA

Proxy server connection [Configuration] -> [Connectivity] SA

Web service printing [Configuration] -> [Connectivity] SA

IPP support for DPlink [Configuration] -> [Connectivity] SA

Authorization

Settings and information Location Role

Passwords for system administrators, key operators, maintenance for operator tasks, PRISMAsync remote manager

[Configuration] -> [Security] SA

Certificates

Settings and information Location Role

Certificates for secure http (https) [Configuration] -> [Security] SA

Software protection

Settings and information Location Role

Protection against running unauthorized software

[Configuration] -> [Security] SA

Security audit log

Settings and information Location Role

Download security audit log file [Configuration] -> [Security] SA

Settings Editor settings and information

398 Chapter 15 - Specifications

Print workflows

Settings and information Location Role

Set up of an automated workflow An automated workflow is a collection of preset settings for jobs. One default auto- mated workflow is available.

[Workflow] -> [Automated workflows] KO

Creation and definition of the DocBox folders

[Workflow] -> [DocBox] SA

Hotfolder creation and hotfolder connec- tion to an automated workflow

[Workflow] -> [Hotfolders] SA

Other printers to send jobs to The printers become available on the con- trol panel and in PRISMAsync remote manager.

[Workflow] -> [Remote printers] SA

LPR print path [Configuration] -> [Connectivity] SA

Socket printing [Configuration] -> [Connectivity] SA

Print workflow (receiving, RIP, printing)

[Preferences] -> [System settings] KO

Fonts [Workflow] -> [Fonts] SA

PRISMAsync remote manager

Settings and information Location Role

Enable PRISMAsync remote manager (default enabled)

[Preferences] -> [System settings] SA

Printers to manage with PRISMAsync re- mote manager PRISMAsync remote manager runs from a master PRISMAsync controller. Only the master controller requires the list of print- ers that are managed by PRISMAsync re- mote manager.

[Workflow] -> [Remote Manager] SA

Scan workflows

Settings and information Location Role

Scan to file configuration (FTP server)

[Configuration] -> [Connectivity] SA

Scan to email configuration (SMTP server, LDAP server)

[Configuration] -> [Connectivity] SA

Default sender name [Configuration] -> [Connectivity] SA

Maximum attachment size [Configuration] -> [Connectivity] SA 4

Settings Editor settings and information

Chapter 15 - Specifications 399

Settings and information Location Role

Creation of scan profiles (import and export of sjt files and xml files) A scan profile is a collection of preset set- tings for a scan job.

[Workflow] -> [Scan profiles] SA

Scan to SMB shares [Workflow] -> [SMB shares] SA

Energy saving

Settings and information Location Role

Energy save modes (low power mode, sleep mode) and timers

[Preferences] -> [System settings] KO

Media

Settings and information Location Role

Media catalog on Settings Editor (new media, export and import of media catalogs, restore the default media cata- log)

[Media] -> [Media] KO

Media management via control panel (manage media, optimize media, media family calibration warnings, warnings on missing media attributes)

[Media] -> [Configuration] SA

Media Families A media family is a set of media that uses the same output profile and calibration settings.

[Media] -> [Media families] KO

Media selection for separator sheets [Preferences] -> [Print job defaults] KO

Media selection for front and back covers [Preferences] -> [Print job defaults] KO

Media selection for banner pages, trailer pages and job ticket printing

[Preferences] -> [Print job defaults] KO

Media selection for calibration [Color] -> [Color calibration] KO

Color

Settings and information Location Role

Color quality defaults (spot color matching, default media fami- ly, PDF/X output intent, halftone for graphics, halftone for text color or resolu- tion priority)

[Color] -> [Color defaults] KO

4

Settings Editor settings and information

400 Chapter 15 - Specifications

Settings and information Location Role

Input profiles An input profile defines a reference color workspace (for RGB and CMYK color spaces) in a device independent way.

[Color] -> [Input profiles] KO

Output profiles An output profile defines the CMYK val- ues for every media/halftone combination and is independent to the device.

[Color] -> [Output profiles] KO

Color Presets A color preset is a collection of color and quality settings that matches output re- quirements. A color preset is available across the complete workflow.

[Color] -> [Color presets] KO

Spot Colors The print system prints a spot color in a document according to values described in the spot color library. Custom spot col- ors are stored in a custom spot color li- brary.

[Color] -> [Spot color libraries] [Color] -> [Spot colors]

KO

Advanced color management (device link support, device simulation, named color profile import and export, in- formation and color control bars, color mapping, leave out separations)

[Color] -> [Color mappings] [Color] -> [Color & information bars] [Color] -> [Output profiles] [Color] -> [Spot color libraries]

KO

Color calibration timing (shading correction, automatic gradation adjustment timing)

[Color] -> [Color calibration] KO

G7 calibration support [Color] -> [Color calibration] KO

Print quality

Settings and information Location Role

Compression, sharpness and raster ad- justments

[Preferences] -> [System settings] KO

Frequency of refreshment of the fixing belt

[Preferences] -> [System adjustments] KO

Color cast correction for each of the print colors A color cast is a tint of a particular color, usually unwanted, which affects white backgrounds.

[Preferences] -> [System adjustments] KO

Correction of color fading/graininess at the tail end of printed sheets.

[Preferences] -> [System adjustments] KO

Correction of white gaps between two areas of the printed color images.

[Preferences] -> [System adjustments] KO 4

Settings Editor settings and information

Chapter 15 - Specifications 401

Settings and information Location Role

Correction of uneven gloss caused by in- creased temperature of the fixing unit.

[Preferences] -> [System adjustments] KO

Print job production

Settings and information Location Role

Productivity improvement for combined 1- sided and 2-sided jobs

[Preferences] -> [System settings] KO

Print speed adjustments for low tempera- ture environments

[Preferences] -> [System adjustments] -> [Print quality adjustments]

KO

Transaction printing

Settings and information Location Role

Settings to enable the transaction printing mode and to define the port

[Transaction printing] -> [Settings] KO

Creation of transaction printing setups A transaction printing setup is a collection of preset settings for streaming jobs.

[Transaction printing] -> [Setups] KO

Attributes for the transaction printing set- ups (IPDS/PCL) (output location behavior, data resolution, offset stacking, font capture, extending logical page size, output recovery, face orientation)

[Transaction printing] -> [IPDS setup] [Transaction printing] -> [PCL setup]

KO

Image shift for preprinted media (IPDS/ PCL)

[Transaction printing] -> [IPDS setup] [Transaction printing] -> [PCL setup]

KO

Default input profiles, halftone, rendering intent, color/black & white printing (IPDS/ PCL)

[Transaction printing] -> [IPDS setup] [Transaction printing] -> [PCL setup]

KO

Black preservation, ignoring toner trans- fer curves and embedded output profiles (IPDS/PCL)

[Transaction printing] -> [IPDS setup] [Transaction printing] -> [PCL setup]

KO

Black color handling for PDF (rip to 100% black, or 100% of every color)

[Transaction printing] -> [IPDS setup] KO

Caching and overprint simulation of PDF [Transaction printing] -> [IPDS setup] KO

Logical tray mapping for paper trays (IPDS/PCL)

[Transaction printing] -> [IPDS setup] [Transaction printing] -> [PCL setup]

KO

Default media for paper trays (IPDS/PCL) [Transaction printing] -> [IPDS setup] [Transaction printing] -> [PCL setup]

KO

Color names and numbers for each color station (CMYK)

[Transaction printing] -> [IPDS setup] KO 4

Settings Editor settings and information

402 Chapter 15 - Specifications

Settings and information Location Role

Resources and defaults (fonts, PDF fonts, code pages, color map- ping tables)

[Transaction printing] -> [Resource man- agement]

KO

Finishing

Settings and information Location Role

Adjustments for new finishers * [Preferences] -> [System adjustments] KO

Error recovery behavior for external fin- ishers

[Preferences] -> [Print job defaults] KO

Feed direction of A4 / LTR output in finish- ers

[Preferences] -> [Print job defaults] KO

Face and header orientation in the output trays of finishers

[Preferences] -> [Print job defaults] KO

Delivery order of the output sheets [Preferences] -> [Print job defaults] KO

Distance between staples when output has two staples

[Preferences] -> [System adjustments] KO

Stacking

Settings and information Location Role

Feed direction of A4 / LTR output in the stacker/stapler

[Preferences] -> [Print job defaults] KO

Face and header orientation in the output trays of stacking/stapler

[Preferences] -> [Print job defaults] KO

Delivery order of the output sheets [Preferences] -> [Print job defaults] KO

Offset stacking on the output tray [Preferences] -> [Print job defaults] KO

Full tray behavior: stack eject or change output tray

[Preferences] -> [Print job defaults] KO

Job management

Settings and information Location Role

Availability of the list of printed jobs [Preferences] -> [System settings] KO

Automatic removal of printed jobs after a preset period

[Preferences] -> [System settings] KO

E-shredding configuration [Configuration] -> [Security] KO

Banner and trailer page per job [Preferences] -> [System settings] KO

Settings Editor settings and information

Chapter 15 - Specifications 403

Postscript

Settings and information Location Role

Behavior when a PostScript error occurs [Preferences] -> [PostScript] KO

Job time-out for PostScript jobs The print process will stop after a preset period and the print system prints an er- ror page.

[Preferences] -> [PostScript] KO

Page time-out for PostScript jobs The print process will stop after a preset period and the print system prints an er- ror page.

[Preferences] -> [PostScript] KO

Default media (color, size, type and weight)

[Preferences] -> [PostScript] KO

Default print settings (print resolution, 1-sided or 2-sided, bind- ing edge for 2-sided pages, offset stack- ing, sorting, output location, stapling)

[Preferences] -> [PostScript] KO

Default font substitution [Preferences] -> [PostScript] KO

PDF

Settings and information Location Role

Error pages when a PDF error occurs [Preferences] -> [PDF] KO

Selection of the PDF interpreter [Preferences] -> [PDF] KO

Rendering of large texts as graphics [Preferences] -> [PDF] KO

Default media (color, size, type and weight)

[Preferences] -> [PDF] KO

Default print settings (print resolution, 1-sided or 2-sided, offset stacking, sorting, output location, sta- pling)

[Preferences] -> [PDF] KO

XObject optimization per page or docu- ment

[Preferences] -> [PDF] KO

CropBox or MediaBox settings [Preferences] -> [PDF] KO

Font substitution [Preferences] -> [PDF] KO

PDF font conversion [Preferences] -> [PDF] KO

Include PDF fonts and resources per page or per document

[Preferences] -> [PDF] KO

PPML

Settings and information Location Role

Error pages when a PDF error occurs [Preferences] -> [PPML] KO 4

Settings Editor settings and information

404 Chapter 15 - Specifications

Settings and information Location Role

Rendering of large texts as graphics [Preferences] -> [PPML] KO

Default media (color, size, type and weight)

[Preferences] -> [PPML] KO

Default print settings (print resolution, 1-sided or 2-sided, offset stacking, sorting, output location, sta- pling)

[Preferences] -> [PPML] KO

Font substitution [Preferences] -> [PPML] KO

Accounting

Settings and information Location Role

Account log files (separation, encoding)

[Configuration] -> [Accounting] KO

Definition of account IDs for transaction printing mode

[Configuration] -> [Accounting] KO

Billing counter reports [Support] -> [Counters] KO

Troubleshooting

Settings and information Location Role

Logging reports (data dump file *, trace file (with or with- out machine data), audit log files, configu- ration report *, job logging (crashed jobs, last job), calibration report, color configu- ration report)

[Support] -> [Troubleshooting] KO

Handling of crashed jobs [Support] -> [Troubleshooting] KO

Error job analysis/save last received job when a problem occurs

[Support] -> [Troubleshooting] KO

Removal of printed jobs [Support] -> [Troubleshooting] KO

Removal of scheduled jobs [Support] -> [Troubleshooting] KO

Removal of waiting jobs [Support] -> [Troubleshooting] KO

Restore factory default settings or factory default color settings

[Support] -> [Troubleshooting] KO

Save current system settings [Support] -> [Troubleshooting] KO

Restore previous system settings [Support] -> [Troubleshooting] KO

Export or import of color settings [Support] -> [Troubleshooting] KO

Settings Editor settings and information

Chapter 15 - Specifications 405

Settings Editor settings and information

406 Chapter 15 - Specifications

Chapter 16 Third-Party Software

Third Party Software This Canon product (the PRODUCT) includes third-party software modules. Use and distribution of these software modules (the SOFTWARE) are subject to the conditions below.

(1) You agree that you will comply with any applicable export control laws, restrictions or regulations of the countries involved in the event that this product including the SOFTWARE is shipped, transferred or exported into any country.

(2) Rights holders of the SOFTWARE retain in all respects the title, ownership and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE. Except as expressly provided herein, no license or right, expressed or implied, is hereby conveyed or granted by rights holders of the SOFTWARE to you for any intellectual property of rights holders of the SOFTWARE.

(3) You may use the SOFTWARE solely for use with the PRODUCT.

(4) You may not assign, sublicense, market, distribute, or transfer the SOFTWARE to any third party without prior written consent of rights holders of the SOFTWARE.

(5) Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may transfer the SOFTWARE only when (a) you assign to a transferee all of your rights to the PRODUCT and all rights and obligations under the conditions governing the SOFTWARE and PRODUCT and (b) such transferee agrees in writing to be bound by all these conditions.

(6) You may not decrypt, decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble or otherwise reduce the code of the SOFTWARE to human readable form.

(7) You may not modify, adapt, translate, rent, lease or loan the SOFTWARE or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE.

(8) You are not entitled to remove or make separate copies of the SOFTWARE from the PRODUCT.

(9) The human-readable portion (the source code) of the SOFTWARE is not licensed to you.

Notwithstanding (1) through (9) above, in case any other license conditions accompany third- party software modules, these software modules are subject to these other conditions, as well.

ACCEPTANCE

THE TERMS OF THIS THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE STATED HERE OR IN RELATED WARRANTY PROVISIONS SHALL BE DEEMED ACCEPTED UPON YOUR USE OF THE PRODUCT FOR ONE OR MORE OF ITS NORMAL PURPOSES, IF THERE HAS BEEN NO OTHER PRIOR EXPRESS ACCEPTANCE.

THE TERMS OF THIS THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE GOVERN THE THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE AS DELIVERED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ALL UPDATED VERSIONS OF THE THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE PROVIDED UNDER MAINTENANCE AGREEMENTS OR OTHER SERVICE ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE PRODUCT WITH CANON USA OR CANON CANADA OR THEIR RESPECTIVE AUTHORIZED SERVICE ORGANIZATIONS.

Third Party Software

408 Chapter 16 - Third-Party Software

The Software Subjected to the Other Conditions Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding license conditions.

Table of Software

Names of Software License - Terms and Conditions of the License

FPU Emulation code The BSD License -> FPU Emulation code on page 410

J2ME -> J2ME on page 411

Library for SDE Compiler The BSD License -> Library for SDE Compiler on page 412

The Software Subjected to the Other Conditions

Chapter 16 - Third-Party Software 409

FPU Emulation code * Copyright 1992, 1993

* The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

*

* This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by

* Ralph Campbell.

*

* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions

* are met:

* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the

* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software

* must display the following acknowledgement:

* This product includes software developed by the University of

* California, Berkeley and its contributors.

* 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors

* may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software

* without specific prior written permission.

*

* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND

* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE

* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE

* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS

* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY

* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF

* SUCH DAMAGE.

*

* @(#)fp.s 8.1 (Berkeley) 6/10/93

FPU Emulation code

410 Chapter 16 - Third-Party Software

J2ME a. Restriction. Software is confidential copyrighted information of Canon and title to all copies is retained by Canon and/or its licensors. Software shall not be modified, decompiled, disassembled, decrypted, extracted, or otherwise reverse engineered. Software may not be leased, assigned, or sublicensed, in whole or in part.

b. Export Regulations. Software, including technical data, is subject to U.S. export control laws, including the U.S. export Administration Act and its associated regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries. You agree to comply strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-export, or import Software. Software may not be downloaded, or otherwise exported or re-exported (i) into, or to a national or resident of, Cuba, Iraq, Iran, North Korea, Libya, Sudan, Syria or any country to which the U.S. has embargoed goods; or (ii) to anyone on the U.S.Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nations or the U.S. Commerce Department's Table of Denial Orders.

c. Restriction Rights. Use, duplication or disclosure by the United States government is subject to the restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clauses in DFARS 252.227-7013(c) (1) (ii) and FAR 52.227-19(c) (2) as applicable.

J2ME

Chapter 16 - Third-Party Software 411

Library for SDE Compiler * 1/4 University of California, Berkeley

Copyright 1990 The Regents of the University of California.

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted

provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are

duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation,

advertising materials, and other materials related to such

distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed

by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the

University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived

from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

* 2/4 David M. Gay at AT&T

The author of this software is David M. Gay.

Copyright 1991 by AT&T.

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any

purpose without fee is hereby granted, provided that this entire notice

is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a copy

or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting

documentation for such software.

THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

WARRANTY. IN PARTICULAR, NEITHER THE AUTHOR NOR AT&T MAKES ANY

REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE

MERCHANTABILITY

OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

* 3/4 Sun Microsystems

Copyright 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Developed at SunPro, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business.

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this

software is freely granted, provided that this notice

is preserved.

* 4/4 Unless otherwise stated in each remaining newlib file, the

remaining files in the newlib subdirectory are governed by the following

Library for SDE Compiler

412 Chapter 16 - Third-Party Software

copyright.

Copyright 1994, 1997 Cygnus Solutions.

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted

provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are

duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation,

advertising materials, and other materials related to such

distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed

at Cygnus Solutions. Cygnus Solutions may not be used to

endorse or promote products derived from this software without

specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Library for SDE Compiler

Chapter 16 - Third-Party Software 413

Library for SDE Compiler

414 Chapter 16 - Third-Party Software

Index

1

1-Sided printing.................................................... 197

2

2-Sided printing.................................................... 197

A

Access other functions during copy job or scan job.......................................................................... 257 Account ID file

Content............................................................321 Account log file

Description of the data records.....................322 General information.......................................322 Name...............................................................322

Accounting Fields of the account log file......................... 322 Printer driver...................................................329

Add toner.............................................................. 334 Add

Automated workflow..................................... 206 Address list file

Download........................................................271 Edit.................................................................. 271 Records........................................................... 271 Upload.............................................................271

ADF rollers............................................................ 354 ADF.................................................................. 26, 248

Location............................................................ 16 Adjust image.........................................................264 Alignment..............................................................201 Assign....................................................................102 Auto color mismatch correction..........................351 Auto gradation adjustment

Message..........................................................375 Automated settings

Copy job..........................................................236 Print job...........................................................161 Scan job.......................................................... 278

Automated workflow Add..................................................................206 Delete.............................................................. 208 Edit.................................................................. 207 Restore default............................................... 209

Automated workflows Attributes........................................................ 205 Explanation.....................................................205 variable data printing.....................................172

Automatic Document Feeder...............................248 Location............................................................ 16 Main parts.........................................................26

Automatic gradation adjustment usage...............................................................363

Available documentation.......................................14

B

Basic copy............................................................. 254 Billing counters.............................................358, 359

Print the report............................................... 360 Binding edge.........................................................198 Booklet maker......................................................... 33 Booklet Trimmer-D1

Location............................................................ 18 Bulk media module

Adjust for media size..................................... 122 Load media.....................................................117

Bulk paper module Adjust outer size change plate......................129 Location............................................................ 17 Main parts.........................................................22

Bundle print jobs.......................................... 184, 195 Bundled jobs

Change job settings............................... 184, 195

C

Calibration description......................................................361 Message..........................................................375 perform media family calibration................. 365 perform printer calibration............................363 recommendation............................................362

Change Alignment....................................................... 201 Binding edge.................................................. 198 Check first set................................................. 192 Finishing method........................................... 204 Image shift......................................................202 Margin shift.................................................... 202 Media.............................................................. 199

Index

415

Number of sets...............................................191 Offset stacking................................................203 Output location...............................................203 Print order.......................................................203 Rotation...........................................................203 Separator sheets............................................ 193 Settings for covers.........................................200 Sheet order.....................................................203 Sheet orientation............................................203 Sort by page................................................... 203 Sort by set.......................................................203 Warning time....................................................88

Check first set........................................................192 Check

Punch waste box............................................151 Staple Cartridges............................................340 Toner level......................................................332 Waste toner container................................... 332

Clean roller............................................................352 Clean the glass plate............................................ 253 Clean the operator panel....................................... 28 CMYK values

adjust for media family..................................373 adjust for single jobs..................................... 371

Color bar..................................................65, 168, 306 Color Image Reader-H1

Description........................................................27 Location............................................................ 16

Color management calibration.......................................................361 perform media family calibration................. 365 perform printer calibration............................363

Color mappings...................................................... 63 Color pre-sets..........................................................57

Concept.............................................................48 PRISMAprepare (optional).............................. 66

Color preset printer driver.....................................................68

Color scanner Description........................................................27 Location............................................................ 16

Combine analog documents............................... 291 Combine subsets

Create 1 document.........................................256 Create 1 file.....................................................291 Create one file................................................ 291

Concept................................................................... 48 Configure

LDAP server....................................................270 Scan-to-email function.................................. 269 Scan-to-file function.......................................268

Connectivity Default gateway............................................... 92 DHCP................................................................. 92

DNS suffix follows domain............................. 92 Host name.........................................................92 Link speed and connection type..................... 92 MAC address.................................................... 92 Primary DNS suffix.......................................... 92 Subnet mask.....................................................92 TCP/P.................................................................92 Test TCP/IP connection.................................... 92

Contradiction handling........................................ 171 Controller

Concept.............................................................48 Turn on..............................................................44

Copy.......................................................................254 Non-standard size originals.......................... 261 Scan now, print later......................................262

Copy function Introduction.................................................... 234

Copy jobs Access other functions.................................. 257 Combined copy job........................................256 Minimize......................................................... 257 Zoom...............................................................258

Copy job Automated settings........................................236 Generic job settings.......................................246 Original settings.............................................237 Output settings...............................................238 Rename...........................................................260 Types of settings............................................236

Copy quality.......................................................... 264 Copy templates.............................................255, 290 Copy to.................................................................. 189 Corona wire...........................................................353 Correction

curled output media.......................................155 skewed and rotated images.......................... 158

Counters........................................................ 358, 359 Covers....................................................................200 Create a DocBox................................................... 298 Create a hotfolder.................................................212 Curled output media

correction........................................................155

D

DADF-R1 Location............................................................ 16 Main parts.........................................................26

Dashboard...............................................................74 Date and time..........................................................92 Day counters......................................................... 358 Deep sleep mode....................................................42 Default gateway......................................................92 Define job settings in hotfolder...........................214

Index

416

Delete jobs All jobs............................................................ 181 Jobs with available media.............................181 Jobs with label............................................... 181 List of Printed jobs......................................... 181 List of Scheduled jobs................................... 181 List of Waiting jobs........................................ 181 New jobs.........................................................181 One by one..................................................... 181 Printed jobs.....................................................181

Delete Automated workflow..................................... 208

DHCP........................................................................92 Disable

Warning time....................................................89 DNS suffix follows domain....................................92 DocBox job

Edit.................................................................. 308 DocBox

Build function................................................. 309 Combine jobs................................................. 309 Create..............................................................298 DocBox............................................................308 Interrupt function........................................... 315 Introduction.................................................... 296 Job settings.................................................... 299 Lock settings...................................................311 Print a job........................................................314 Print an urgent job......................................... 315 printer driver.....................................................68 Split a built job............................................... 310 Split function.................................................. 310 Unlock settings...............................................312 Urgent jobs.....................................................315

Document Insertion Unit-C1 Location............................................................ 18

Document printing......................................... 172 variable data printing.....................................172

E

Edit Automated workflow..................................... 207

Enable remote connection...................................357 Engine maintenance.............................................356 External paper modules

Location............................................................ 22

F

Finisher-AJ1 Location............................................................ 18

Finisher

Booklet maker...................................................33 Inserter..............................................................33 Punch unit.........................................................33 Saddle finisher................................................. 33 Stacker/stapler..................................................33 Stapler...............................................................33

Finishing equipment.............................................. 17 Finishing method..................................................204 Finishing options

Overview...........................................................32 Fixing roller........................................................... 355 Fixing Station

Location............................................................ 17 Main parts.........................................................19

Fusing unit Location............................................................ 17 Main parts.........................................................19

G

G7 output profiles use embedded profiler.................................. 377 use external tool.............................................376

Glass plate.............................................................252 Clean............................................................... 253

H

High Capacity Stacker-C1 Location............................................................ 17

High Capacity Stacker-F1 Location............................................................ 17

High Capacity Stacker-G1 Location............................................................ 17

High Capacity Stacker-H1 Location............................................................ 17

Host name............................................................... 92 Hotfolder

Activate........................................................... 211 Create shared network drive.........................213 Define job settings......................................... 214 Drag & drop....................................................210 General information.......................................210 Include in automated workflow.................... 212 Job settings.................................................... 210 Job ticket.........................................................210

I

Image quality media registration..........................................156

Image shift............................................................ 202 Transaction printing.......................................220

Imaging unit Location............................................................ 17

Index

417

Main parts.........................................................19 Information bar.......................................65, 168, 306 Input profiles...........................................................59 Inserter.................................................................... 33

Load media.....................................................146 Location............................................................ 18

Installation.............................................................381 Integrated paper trays

Location............................................................ 17 Main parts.........................................................19

IPDS Output recovery............................................. 226

J

Job management other printer....................................................189

Job name Truncate............................................................90

Job preparation printer driver.....................................................68

Job settings DocBox............................................................299 Hotfolder.........................................................210

Job status................................................................77 Job status icons......................................................77 Job ticket............................................................... 177 Job window

File settings.....................................................281 Original settings.............................................279

Job Change alignment..........................................201 Change binding edge.....................................198 Change finishing method.............................. 204 Change number of sets................................. 191 Change settings for covers............................200 Change the media..........................................199 Check the first set...........................................192 Give priority....................................................174 Make a proof...................................................178 Print later........................................................ 175 Print the job parameters................................177 Reprint.............................................................176 Separator sheets............................................ 193 Shift the image...............................................202 Shift the margin............................................. 202 To top..............................................................174

Jobs view Overview...........................................................77

Jobs with available media................................... 183 Jobs with label......................................................183

K

Key operator settings............................................. 92 key operator

settings............................................................397

L

Label...................................................................... 183 Labels

printer driver.....................................................68 Landscape..................................................... 248, 250 LDAP server.......................................................... 270 LEF................................................................. 248, 250 Left-hand paper module

Location............................................................ 17 Main parts.........................................................22

Link speed and connection type............................92 Load the media

Bulk media module........................................117 Inserter............................................................146 Paper tray........................................................107 Schedule view.................................................. 99 Special feeder.................................................135 Tab feeder.......................................................138 Trays view.......................................................102

Lock settings in DocBox.......................................311 Logging

Printing the Configuration Report.................. 92 Save the datadump file....................................92 Save the zipped log file................................... 92

Low power mode....................................................42

M

MAC address...........................................................92 Main parts............................................................... 25 Main unit

Location............................................................ 17 Main parts.........................................................19

Maintenance......................................................... 356 Maintenance view................................................ 350 Make a proof......................................................... 178 Margin shift...........................................................202 Marking Engine

Location............................................................ 17 Main parts.........................................................19

Maximum media capacity..................................... 22 Media capacity........................................................22 Media catalog................................................. 53, 103

adding media to............................................. 104 adding temporary media to.......................... 106 Concept.............................................................48 curled media correction.................................155 media corrections.......................................... 156

Index

418

printer driver.....................................................68 PRISMAprepare (optional).............................. 66 skew and rotation adjustments.....................158

Media family........................................................... 55 calibration.......................................................361

Media handling Description......................................................103

Media registration performing......................................................156

Media adding to the media catalog......................... 104 Bulk media module........................................117 Icons................................................................101 Information.....................................................101 Inserter............................................................146 Paper tray........................................................107 registration..................................................... 156 Schedule view.................................................. 99 Special feeder.................................................135 Tab feeder.......................................................138 Trays view.......................................................102

Monitor remotely....................................................71

N

New Scan to file......................................................285

Non-standard size originals.................................261 Number of sets..................................................... 191

O

Oc PRISMAprepare Concept.............................................................48

Offset stacking...................................................... 203 Changes in the Properties window...............194 Every N sets....................................................203 Types...............................................................194

Operator attention light Description........................................................31 Location............................................................ 16

Operator panel Brightness.........................................................91 Clean................................................................. 28 Contrast.............................................................91 Location............................................................ 16 Main components............................................ 28

Optimize the scan quality.................................... 292 Optional finishing equipment................................17 Original cover

Location............................................................ 16 Originals................................................ 248, 250, 252 Output profile

Media tab..........................................................53

Output profiles........................................................60 creation of.......................................................378

Output recovery....................................................226

P

Page Programming DocBox............................................................308

Paper Deck-AC1 Location............................................................ 17 Main parts.........................................................22

Paper jams............................................................ 154 Paper tray icons.................................................... 101 Paper tray

Adjust for media size..................................... 113 Load media.....................................................107

Paper trays Location............................................................ 22 Main unit...........................................................17

Platen Cover Type K Location............................................................ 16

POD Deck-A1 Location............................................................ 17 Main parts.........................................................22

Portrait...........................................................248, 250 Postponed copying...............................................262 Power modes

Deep sleep mode............................................. 42 Low power mode............................................. 42 Off......................................................................42 Ready................................................................ 42 Sleep mode.......................................................42

Power supply unit Location............................................................ 17 Main parts.........................................................19

Power switch...........................................................42 Primary DNS suffix.................................................92 Print a job from USB drive...................................186 Print a scheduled job later................................... 175 Print an urgent job

DocBox............................................................315 Print delivery settings

Offset stacking................................................203 Output location...............................................203 Print order.......................................................203 Rotation...........................................................203 Sheet order.....................................................203 Sheet orientation............................................203 Sort by page................................................... 203 Sort by set.......................................................203

Print immediately................................................. 173 Print jobs

Bundle several jobs................................184, 195 convert to variable data job.......................... 187

Index

419

Split bundled jobs.................................. 184, 195 Print job

Automated settings........................................161 Generic job settings...............................169, 307 Output settings.......................................162, 300 Types of settings............................................161

Print ticket creation............................................................. 68

Printer Driver Concept.............................................................48 download..........................................................68 Enable accounting..........................................329 job preparation.................................................68 Use accounting...............................................329

Printer Shut down........................................................ 45 Sleep mode.......................................................45 Turn on..............................................................44 Wake up............................................................ 44

Printing the Configuration Report.........................92 Print

All jobs............................................................ 183 Job parameters.............................................. 177 Job settings.................................................... 177 Jobs in list of Waiting jobs............................182 Jobs with available media.............................183 Jobs with label............................................... 183 variable data...................................................188

Priority for a job....................................................174 PRISMAprepare

Job preparation................................................66 variable data printing.....................................172

PRISMAsync Remote Manager........................... 190 Production printing................................................ 70 Professional Puncher Integration Unit-C1............ 40

Location............................................................ 18 Professional Puncher-B1........................................40

Location............................................................ 18 Proof...................................................................... 178 Punch unit

Location...................................................... 18, 33 Punch waste................................................... 152

Punch waste tray.................................................... 33 Punch waste..........................................................152

Check...............................................................151 Puncher Unit-BB1

Location............................................................ 18 Puncher................................................................... 40

Location............................................................ 18

Q

Quality Manually......................................................... 264

R

Records..................................................................188 Remote Assistance............................................... 357 Remote connection

Status.............................................................. 357 Test..................................................................357

Remote Diagnostics............................................. 357 Remote Manager.................................................. 190 Remote Meter Reading........................................ 357 Remote Service.....................................................357 Replace staple cartridge

Saddle stitcher unit........................................345 Stapler unit..................................................... 342

Replace the waste toner container......................338 Reprint a job..........................................................176 Restart the system..................................................46 Restore

Default workflow............................................209 Right-hand paper module

Location............................................................ 17 Main parts.........................................................22

S

Saddle finisher........................................................33 Saddle Finisher-AJ2

Location............................................................ 18 Saddle press........................................................... 33 SADF......................................................................250 SADF tray................................................................ 26 Save the audit log files.........................................357 Save the datadump file.......................................... 92 Save the zipped log file..........................................92 Scan function

Introduction.................................................... 266 Scan jobs

Access other functions.................................. 257 Combined scan job........................................ 291 Minimize......................................................... 257 Zoom...............................................................258

Scan job Automated settings........................................278 File settings.....................................................281 Optimize scan quality.................................... 292 Original settings.............................................279 Types of settings............................................278

Scan profiles file Download........................................................272 Edit.................................................................. 272 Records........................................................... 272 Upload.............................................................272

Scan quality.......................................................... 264 Scan templates............................................. 255, 290

Index

420

Scan to email Address list file.......................................270, 271 Configuration..................................................269 Configure LDAP server.................................. 270

Schedule view Introduction...................................................... 96 Jobs pane......................................................... 96 Load media.......................................................99 Media toolbar................................................... 97 Output locations pane..................................... 97 Overview...........................................................76 Required media pane.......................................97 Streaming jobs.................................................96 Zoom control....................................................98

Schedule waiting jobs..........................................182 Secondary POD Deck-A1

Location............................................................ 17 Main parts.........................................................22

Security PIN printer driver.....................................................68

SEF.................................................................248, 250 Select .

Different media for job.................................. 199 Separator sheets...................................................193 Serial number......................................................... 92 Settings Editor

Access............................................................... 51 Access through operator panel.......................92 Accounting settings....................................... 320 Change settings................................................92 Concept.............................................................48 settings and information............................... 397 specifications..................................................396 View settings.................................................... 92

Shading correction manual procedure..........................................369 Message..........................................................375 usage...............................................................363

Shut-down procedure............................................ 45 Skewed and rotated images

correction........................................................158 Sleep button............................................................42 Sleep mode............................................................. 42 Software................................................................ 381 Software licenses................................................... 92 Special feeder......................................................... 25

Load media.....................................................135 Location............................................................ 17

Specifications paper trays..................................... 22 Split print jobs.............................................. 184, 195 Spot color................................................................62 Spot color library....................................................61 Stack Bypass-A1..................................................... 25

Location............................................................ 17

Stacker.....................................................................17 Stacker/stapler

Location............................................................ 18 Main parts.........................................................33

Staple Cartridge Replace in saddle stitcher unit...................... 345 Replace in stapler unit................................... 342

Staple icons...........................................................340 Staple waste tray.................................................... 33 Staple

Replace in saddle stitcher unit...................... 345 Replace in stapler unit................................... 342

Stop behavior Stop after a job...............................................179 Stop after a set............................................... 179

Stop the printer After a job....................................................... 179 After a page.................................................... 179 After a set........................................................179 Automatically................................................. 179 Manually......................................................... 179

Subnet mask........................................................... 92 Subsets

Tab sheets...............................................256, 291 System administrator settings.............................. 92 system administrator

settings............................................................397 System of measurement........................................92 System settings

Date and time................................................... 92 System of measurement................................. 92 Time zone......................................................... 92

Installation System software............................................ 381

System view Overview...........................................................80 Setup section....................................................82 Transaction section........................................215

System Restart...............................................................46 Turn on..............................................................44

T

Tab feeder Adjust media size...........................................144 Load media.....................................................138 Location............................................................ 17 Main parts.........................................................24

Tab Feeding Attachment-C1 Location............................................................ 17 Main parts.........................................................24

TCP/P....................................................................... 92 Templates

Index

421

Copy........................................................ 255, 290 printer driver.....................................................68 Scan.........................................................255, 290

Temporary media................................................. 103 adding to the media catalog......................... 106

Test remote connection....................................... 357 Test TCP/IP connection.......................................... 92 Ticket..................................................................... 177 Time zone................................................................92 To top.................................................................... 174 Toner..................................................................... 334 Toner cartridge..................................................... 334 Toner compartment cover

Location............................................................ 17 Toner counter....................................................... 359 Toner icons........................................................... 332 Toner indicator

Status bar........................................................334 Toner icon.......................................................334

Total media capacity.............................................. 22 Transaction printing............................................. 215

Activate........................................................... 218 Deactivate....................................................... 219 Image shift......................................................220 Media messages............................................ 229 Printer offline..................................................219 Printer online..................................................218

Transaction setup Activate........................................................... 223 Create new......................................................221 Edit.................................................................. 222 Export..............................................................224 Import..............................................................224

Trapping........................................................ 168, 306 Trapping preset

creation of.......................................................367 Trays view

Load media.....................................................102 Overview...................................................79, 100

Trimmer Location............................................................ 18

Truncate Job name..........................................................90

Turn on Controller..........................................................44 Printer................................................................44 System.............................................................. 44

Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer-A1 Location............................................................ 18

Two-knife trimmer Location............................................................ 18

U

Unassign............................................................... 102 Unlock settings in DocBox...................................312 Urgent job............................................................. 173 Urgent jobs

DocBox............................................................315 USB drive

Print job...........................................................186 Save a file to another location...................... 186

V

Variable data printing convert from normal job............................... 187 description......................................................172 job information...............................................188 records............................................................ 188

Version of printer software....................................92 View

Maintenance view..........................................350

W

Warning time Disable.............................................................. 89

Waste toner container..........................................332 Replace............................................................338

Waste toner tray Location............................................................ 17

Wire cleaning........................................................ 353 Workflow profiles

Check and print................................................ 84 Function............................................................ 84 Job by job.........................................................84 Manual planning.............................................. 84 Standard........................................................... 84 Unattended.......................................................84

Z

Zoom behavior..................................................... 258

Index

422

CANON INC.

30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan

CANON U.S.A., INC.

One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A.

CANON CANADA INC.

6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada

CANON EUROPA N.V.

Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands

CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.

703 Waterford Way Suite 400 Miami, Florida 33126 U.S.A.

CANON CHINA CO., LTD

15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China

CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.

1 HarbourFront Avenue #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632

CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD

19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong

CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD

1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney, N.S.W. 2113, Australia

(See http://www.canon-europe.

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the imagePRESS Canon works, you can view and download the Canon imagePRESS C7011VPS Series Operation Guide on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operation Guide for Canon imagePRESS as well as other Canon manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operation Guide should include all the details that are needed to use a Canon imagePRESS. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Canon imagePRESS C7011VPS Series Operation Guide is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Canon imagePRESS C7011VPS Series Operation Guide consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Canon imagePRESS C7011VPS Series Operation Guide free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Canon imagePRESS C7011VPS Series Operation Guide, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Canon imagePRESS C7011VPS Series Operation Guide as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.